JP2021142150A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing the attention paid to a game.SOLUTION: In an MPU 402 of a main control device 162, a winning/losing lottery is executed on the basis of the winning to a first operation port and a second operation port, and a control process for a game round is executed on the basis of the lottery result. When a big winning result is obtained in this winning/losing lottery, a game state is shifted to a special game state. An electric accessory 93 is attached to the second operation port, and when the electric accessory 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state, a winning to the second operation port is permitted. The support mode by the electric accessory 93 includes a low frequency support mode, a high frequency support mode A, and a high frequency support mode B. When a particular losing result is obtained in the lottery or when the number of games after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode A without going through the special game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 11

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Some game machines such as pachinko machines include a game board in which a game area is formed, and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by the player. When the game ball launched from the game ball launching means enters the ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The game is diversified by making the ball-entry portion variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state to the ball-entry section according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2002-78904

In the above-mentioned type of gaming machine, there is still room for improvement in its configuration in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to the game.

The present invention
The game board where the game area is formed and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball based on a ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the ball entry section, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. This is regarded as one game time, and the game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. ,
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information and second determination information are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable ball entry section as the ball entry section, which can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the receiving state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state.
A control means for a variable mechanism for controlling the variable mechanism is provided.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode and a second switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. And a third switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode is provided.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and
A third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, and
It is provided with a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. It is a feature.

According to the present invention, the degree of attention to the game can be suitably improved.

It is a front view which shows the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a perspective view which shows the main configuration of a pachinko machine in an unfolded manner. It is a front view which shows the structure of the inner frame. It is a front view which shows the structure of the game board unit. It is a perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the back side. It is a rear view which shows the structure of the inner frame. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows the back pack unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the display content on the display screen of a symbol display device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows (a) the hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / miss table for a high probability mode. (A) is a schematic view showing a distribution table for big hits, and (b) is a schematic view showing a distribution table for special deviations. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of jackpot and the lottery mode and the support mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the type of special deviation and the lottery mode and the support mode. (A) Schematic diagram showing a support lottery table for low frequency support mode, (b) Schematic diagram showing support lottery table for high frequency support mode A, (c) Support lottery table for high frequency support mode B. It is a schematic diagram. It is the schematic which shows the outline of the support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the winning process for a working opening. It is a flowchart which shows the information acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control process. It is a flowchart which shows the data setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to a jackpot. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display time table corresponding to a special deviation. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is a flowchart which shows the control process for a through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing for a through gate. It is the schematic which compared the display time of a pattern in the display part for a through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the process for electric service support. It is a flowchart which shows the electric service opening / closing process. It is a flowchart which shows the process for confirmation display. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching a support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure which concerns on the notification / effect control device and the display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation display control processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control device. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process for the 1st variation start. It is the schematic which exemplifies the outline of the game rotation production. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a big hit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a symbol combination corresponding to a special deviation. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the game when it shifts to the 4th normal game state with a special deviation as an opportunity. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a timing chart exemplifying the change of the holding ball. (A) Schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the second embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the display contents when shifting to the high-frequency support mode A1, and (c) When shifting to the high-frequency support mode A2. It is the schematic which shows the display content of. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process of the support mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of a variation display time. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process for the 1st and 4th normal game states. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a front view of the game board unit in 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 1st operation port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 2nd operation port. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is the schematic which shows the variation display time table for the 2nd operation port. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic which shows the distribution table for the operating port in 4th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation start processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control apparatus. (A) is a schematic view showing the flow of the first special effect, and (b) is a schematic view showing the flow of the second special effect. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is a front view of the game board unit in 5th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the internal structure of the variable winning apparatus. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. (A) is a schematic view showing a hit / fail table for the first operating port, and (b) is a schematic view showing a hit / fail table for the second operating port. It is a schematic diagram which shows (a) the distribution table for the 1st operation port, and (b) is the schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the 2nd operation port. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the behavior when a special hit result is obtained, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a transition pattern of a gaming state. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU of the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which is executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to a special hit game state. It is a flowchart which shows the start process for special hits. It is a flowchart which shows the end processing of a special hit game. It is a flowchart which shows the V distribution setting process. It is a flowchart which shows V prize processing. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process to the jackpot game state. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of a big hit. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a flowchart which shows the pre-confirmation process executed by MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special variation display time table for the 2nd operation port. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic which shows the right-and-behind table for the operating port in 6th Embodiment. It is the schematic which shows the transition pattern of a game state. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a front view of the game board unit in 7th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 1st operation port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / fail table for the 2nd operation port. It is a schematic diagram which shows (a) the distribution table for the 1st operation port, and (b) is the schematic diagram which shows the distribution table for the 2nd operation port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a winning type and a lottery mode and a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching a support mode. It is a block diagram which shows the relationship of each game state. It is a front view of the game board unit in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows (a) the hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / miss table for a high probability mode. (A) is a schematic view showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) is a schematic view showing a hit / fail table for the second operating port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a winning type and a lottery mode and a support mode. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process of the support mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a schematic diagram which shows the winning / failing table in 9th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a distribution table for big hits, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the relationship between the winning type and the lottery mode and the support mode. (A) is a schematic view comparing the support modes, and (b) is a schematic view comparing the display time of a pattern on the display unit for a through gate. It is a flowchart which shows the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed by the MPU of a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the game round end processing executed by the MPU of the main control device. It is a timing chart exemplifying the change of the holding ball. (A) Schematic diagram comparing the support modes in the tenth embodiment, (b) Schematic diagram showing the display contents when shifting to the high-frequency support mode A1, and (c) When shifting to the high-frequency support mode A2. It is the schematic which shows the display content of. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game. It is the schematic which shows the relationship between the lottery result in 11th Embodiment, and the pattern displayed on the display part for actuating opening. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display time table corresponding to a special deviation. It is a schematic diagram which shows the variation display mode of a symbol on a display screen. It is a flowchart which shows the process for switching the support mode in 12th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU of a main control unit. (A) A flowchart showing a special notification process executed by the MPU of the notification / effect control device, and (b) (c) a schematic diagram showing a special notification. It is a flowchart which shows the special notification control processing executed by MPU of a main control device. It is a front view of the game board unit in 13th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the structure of various counters used for a winning / failing lottery. It is a schematic diagram which shows (a) the hit / fail table for a low probability mode, and (b) is a schematic diagram which shows the hit / miss table for a high probability mode. (A) is a schematic view showing a distribution table for the first operating port, and (b) is a schematic view showing a hit / fail table for the second operating port. It is a schematic diagram which shows the relationship between a winning type and a lottery mode and a support mode. It is the schematic which shows the transition of a game state. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st variation start processing executed by MPU of a notification / effect control apparatus. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of a game.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 3 and 4 are perspective views showing the main configurations of the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 3, for convenience, the configuration in the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 is composed of an outer frame 11 forming an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and a game machine main portion 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

As shown in FIG. 2, the outer frame 11 is formed by connecting long frame members on four sides and is formed so as to form a rectangular frame as a whole. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island equipment, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. The outer frame 11 is not an indispensable configuration in the pachinko machine 10, and the outer frame 11 may be provided in the island equipment of the game hall or the like.

The game machine main portion 12 is supported by an outer frame 11 in a state where it can be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support metal fitting 17 is fixed to the connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further below to the connecting portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. A side support metal fitting 18 is provided. A support mechanism is composed of the upper support metal fittings 17 and the lower support metal fittings 18, and the support mechanism causes the game machine main portion 12 to rotate on the left side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11. , The right side is the rotation tip side, and the pachinko machine 10 can be rotated forward (see FIGS. 3 and 4).

As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the gaming machine main portion 12 is arranged behind the inner frame 13 as a base body, the front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and the inner frame 13. It is equipped with a back pack unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the main portion 12 of the gaming machine is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can rotate forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine.

The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the front door frame 14 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. ing. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13, and the back pack unit 15 can rotate backward with the left side as the rotation base end side and the right side as the rotation tip side when viewed from the front of the gaming machine. It is said that.

(Front door frame 14)
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 1, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 having an outer shape substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. There is. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that almost the entire area of the game area PE, which will be described later, can be visually recognized from the front, and the window portion 21 is the same by the glass unit 22. It is closed from the back side of the front door frame 14.

The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of transparent glass panels 23 and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion that partitions the holding region of the glass panel 23 back and forth, and both glass panels 23 face each other in the front and rear with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the two glass panels 23, the game area PE is doubly covered from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 by the glass panels 23 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

It is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 by using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame body 20. Further, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and crime prevention, it is preferable to use a plurality of glass panels and to face each of the glass panels in the front-rear direction with a predetermined gap in between. Incidentally, it is also possible to use a transparent synthetic resin panel member instead of the glass panel.

Light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination portion 26 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the peripheral edge of the window portion 21. The annular illumination unit 26 is lit or blinked according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach. In addition, an error indicator lamp 27 that lights up when a problem such as an error occurs is provided at the center of the annular illumination section 26 and at the top of the pachinko machine 10, and further to the left and right of the error indicator lamp section 27, during the payout of prize balls. A illuminating prize ball lamp unit 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 for outputting sound effects, BGM, etc. according to the game state is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 (see FIG. 3).

Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 bulging toward the front side and a lower bulging portion 32 are vertically arranged side by side. An upper plate 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower plate 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32 (see FIG. 2). The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing the game balls paid out from the payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launch mechanism described later while arranging them in a line. Further, the lower plate 34 has a function of storing the surplus game balls in the upper plate 33 and a game in which the game balls launched by the game ball launching mechanism do not reach the game area PE (see FIG. 3). When the ball is returned to the player, it has a function as a saucer for storing the discharged game ball.

An effect button 35 operated by the player is arranged in a portion of the upper bulging portion 31 in front of the upper plate 33. The effect button 35 is connected to the notification / effect control device 140, and the notification / effect control device 140 executes an operation-corresponding effect or the like based on the operation of the effect button 35.

A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to project toward the front side. By operating the game ball launching handle 41, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism described later. The rate of fire of the game ball increases as the operation amount (rotation amount) of the game ball launch handle 41 increases, and when this operation amount is adjusted by the player to reach a predetermined amount, the game ball is played. It will reach the region PE. In addition, by adjusting this amount of operation by the player, it is possible to separate the game ball into the right route and the left route, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of synthetic resin and has a front door side upper plate passage leading to the upper plate 33 and a front door side lower plate passage leading to the lower plate 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed in the upper corner portion thereof, and the entrance portion of the upper plate passage on the front door side is formed by partitioning the receiving portion to the left and right by a partition wall. A section is formed between the portion and the entrance portion of the lower plate passage on the front door side. The upper plate passage on the front door side and the lower plate passage on the front door side lead to the game ball distribution section described later on the upstream side, and the game balls entering the upper plate passage on the front door side are guided to the upper plate 33 and lower on the front door side. The game ball that has entered the plate passage is guided to the lower plate 34.

On the rotation base end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14, protrusion shafts are provided at the upper end portion and the lower end portion thereof. These protrusion shafts form an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13.

Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a front view of the inner frame 13. In FIG. 5, as in FIG. 3, the configuration in the gaming area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

(Inner frame 13)
The inner frame 13 is mainly composed of an inner frame base body 50 having a substantially rectangular outer shape like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base body 50 is set to be slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. Further, the inner frame base body 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base body 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close this gap. The curtain plate is arranged below the inner frame base body 50 (specifically, the lower end thereof), and when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame base body 50 is placed on the curtain plate. It will be listed. A slight clearance may be provided between the curtain plate and the inner frame base body 50 for the purpose of preventing mutual interference.

Support metal fittings 71 and 72 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the rotation base end side (left side in FIG. 5) on the front surface of the inner frame base body 50. Although not shown, the support metal fittings 71 and 72 have shaft portions, and by inserting the bearing portions provided in the front door frame 14 into these shaft portions, the front door frame with respect to the inner frame 13 is inserted. 14 is rotatably supported.

A locking device 75 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is provided on the rotating tip side (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame base body 50. The locking device 75 extends vertically along the right end portion (vertical frame member described later) of the inner frame base body 50, and the hook members 76 for the front door are arranged scattered in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) thereof. have. In the inner frame base body 50, slits for projecting the hook receiving member 49 (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 to the front side of the inner frame 13 correspond to each front door hook member 76. It is formed in this way. The front door hook member 76 protruding through the slits is locked to the front door hook member 76 provided in the front door frame 14 in a one-to-one correspondence with each front door hook member 76. The front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened. Further, the locking device 75 has an inner frame hook member 77 extending to the rear side of the inner frame 13. The inner frame hook member 77 is hooked on the hook receiving member 19 fixed to the outer frame 11, so that the gaming machine main portion 12 is locked with respect to the outer frame 11.

A cylinder lock 78 for unlocking the locking device 75 is installed in the inner frame base body 50 (locking device 75). The cylinder lock 78 is provided separately from the locking unit (each hook member 76, 77, interlocking rod, etc.) that constitutes the main part of the locking device 75, and is arranged adjacent to the locking unit. When the key inserted in the keyway of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the right (clockwise), the front door frame 14 is unlocked from the inner frame 13, and the key inserted into the keyway of the cylinder lock 78 is turned to the left (counterclockwise). And the lock of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released.

A storage recess 51 for accommodating the game board unit 80 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base body 50. The accommodating recess 51 is recessed in the rear of the gaming machine according to the outer shape of the gaming board unit 80, and the gaming board unit 80 is fixed to the accommodating recess 51 by a manual lock mechanism in a state of being fitted from the front of the gaming machine. .. A substantially rectangular window hole 52 is formed at the bottom of the accommodating recess 51, and the rear surface configuration of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b described later) projects rearward of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. .. Almost the entire window hole 52 is covered from the front of the gaming machine by the gaming board unit 80 mounted on the inner frame base body 50.

(Game board unit 80)
The game board unit 80 is provided on the back side of the game board 80a formed mainly of wooden plates and the game board 80a, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable production mechanism, etc.) described later. Is integrated with the back block 80b mounted on the base body 251.

The above-mentioned game area PE on which the game ball flows down is formed on the front surface of the game board 80a. As described above, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 80a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game ball flowing down the game area PE is the same as the game area PE. They are arranged so that they are not lined up in front and behind at the points. As a result, ball clogging in the game area PE is suppressed. The game board 80a is not limited to wood, and may be made of synthetic resin.

Hereinafter, the game board unit 80 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 80a) will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the game board unit 80, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the game board unit 80 as viewed from the rear.

The game board 80a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the thickness direction (front-back direction) of the game board 80a. As shown in FIG. 6, each opening is provided with a general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82, a variable winning device 83, a through gate 84, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning device 83, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor provided corresponding to each entry portion, and a predetermined number is detected based on the detection result. Benefits such as prize balls (payout of game balls) are given to the players. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the bottom of the game board 80a (game area PE), and game balls that do not enter various entry sections or the like are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86. .. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish from the entry of the game ball into the out opening 86, the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 81, the operating opening unit 82, and the variable winning device 83 is also expressed as "winning". do.

Further, on the game board 80a, various game parts such as a large number of game nails 87 and a windmill 94 are arranged in order to appropriately disperse the flow path of the game balls. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and a prize is generated in the general winning opening 81 or the like described above with an appropriate probability.

A central opening is formed in the center of the game board 80a, and a transparent opening cover is attached so as to cover the central opening from the back side of the game board unit 80. A variable display unit 85 or the like belonging to the back block 80b is located behind the central opening, and the variable display unit 85 or the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening (opening cover).

An actuating port unit 82, a through gate 84, and the like are arranged around the central opening. The actuating port unit 82 is provided with a first actuating port 91 arranged below the variable display unit 85 and a second actuating port 92 arranged below the first actuating port 91. Of these two operating ports 91 and 92, the second operating port 92 is provided with an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an electric accessory 93 as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 93 includes a movable piece and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable piece, and has an open state (auxiliary state) that allows the ball to enter the second operating port 92 and the same ball. It is possible to switch to the closed state (non-auxiliary state) that disables.

When the electric accessory 93 is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the second operating port 92, and by switching to the open state, the electric accessory 93 enters the second operating port 92 rather than in the closed state. It may be configured to facilitate the sphere.

The through gate 84 is arranged on the upstream side of the second operating port 92, specifically on the side of the variable display unit 85, and when the support lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 84 of the game ball is won. Will switch the electric accessory 93 from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

When a ball enters the first operating port 91, three game balls are paid out, and when a ball enters the second operating port 92, four game balls are paid out. Is executed, but the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above.

The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 83 can be switched between a large winning opening, a permissible state in which the ball is allowed to enter the large winning opening, and a blocking state in which the ball cannot be entered. A shutter is provided. In the following description, the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the allowable state is referred to as "open state", and the state of the variable winning device 83 when the shutter is in the blocking state is referred to as "closed state". ..

Regarding the variable winning device 83, when the variable winning device 83 is in the closed state, it becomes difficult to enter the variable winning device 83, and when the variable winning device 83 is switched to the open state, the ball is entered into the variable winning device 83 rather than in the closed state. May be configured to facilitate.

In the normal game state described later, an internal lottery is executed based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92, and when the internal lottery is won (for example, when a big hit is obtained), it is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. It shifts to the special game state (open / close execution mode). The variable winning device 83 is maintained in the closed state, and is switched to the open state when the game shifts to the special gaming state. In the special gaming state, for example, the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or the winning of a predetermined number (for example, 10 pieces) is set as one round, and the switching to the open state up to a plurality of rounds (for example, 6 rounds) is repeated. It is set.

Next, the variable display unit 85 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 85 has a symbol display device 95 that variably displays (variably displays) the symbols triggered by winning a prize in the operating ports 91 and 92. The symbol display device 95 is configured as a liquid crystal display device provided with a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device described later. On the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, the symbols are displayed side by side in the upper, middle, and lower directions, and these symbols are scrolled in the horizontal direction to be displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the jackpot is won, the symbols of the predetermined combination are stopped and displayed on the preset effective line, and the mode shifts to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or jackpot). The symbol display device 95 does not necessarily have to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

The game board 80a is provided with a center frame 96 so as to surround the central opening. The center frame 96 is fixed to the game board 80a from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 96 and the glass unit 22 stand up from the front side of the game board 80a. The gap between the two and the ball is configured to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, it is prevented that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 95, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is on the right side of the variable display unit 85 (specifically, the center frame 96). It is roughly divided into the above right route that detours from the left side and the above left route that detours from the left side. In the present embodiment, various game parts provided in the game area PE are arranged so as to be symmetrical (so-called symmetrical gauge), and a difference in advantages and disadvantages between the right route and the left route is provided. The game balls fired on either the right route or the left route can win the operating ports 91, 92, the through gate 84, and the variable winning device 83.

A stage on which the game ball can roll left and right is formed on the upper surface of the frame portion forming the lower part of the center frame 96. The game ball flowing in from the inflow port formed in the left frame portion of the center frame 96 is discharged onto the stage through the warp passage also formed in the center frame 96. Regarding the stage, specifically, the game ball that has reached the stage flows into the first operating port 91 as compared with the game ball that does not pass through the stage so that the game ball that has reached the stage can easily flow into the first operating port 91. It is configured to be easy to play, and contributes to increasing the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on this stage. In the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening is covered with the transparent opening cover, and the game ball that has reached the stage is regulated so as not to move to the back block 80b (variable display unit 85) side.

The operating ports 91 and 92 are arranged at positions closer to the variable display unit 85. Since it is possible to shift to the special gaming state by using the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not the operating ports 91 and 92 are won and grasps whether or not to shift to the special gaming state. It is considered that attention should be paid to the symbol display device 95 as much as possible. The fact that the operating ports 91 and 92 are provided closer to the variable display unit 85 is a device for concentrating the points that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 85.

At the right end of the game board 80a, a game area partition member 98 for partitioning the game area PE is arranged together with the guide rail 100 described later. The game area partition member 98 is provided with a stopper member and a main display unit 99 on which a game ball flying along the guide rail 100 collides. The stopper member is a cushioning member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after its momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a de-energizing function that weakens the momentum of the colliding game ball.

Here, the main display unit 99 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 99 is embedded in the game area partition member 98, and a part thereof is arranged so as to face the glass unit 22. A main display unit D on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided on the facing portions. The main display unit 99 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit D is controlled by the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 6B, the main display unit D has a display unit D1 for the first operating port that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the first operating port 91, and a winning of the second operating port 92. It has a display unit D2 for a second operating port that displays the result of the lottery performed based on the above. In the display unit D1 for the first operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the first operating port 91 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 91. The result of the internal lottery will be clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the variable display is stopped on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and stopped. As a result, after the predetermined pattern is displayed, the game shifts to the special gaming state.

In the display unit D2 for the second operating port, the variation display of the pattern is performed with the winning of the second operating port 92 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, it is performed based on the winning of the second operating port 92. The result of the internal lottery will be clearly shown. If the result of the internal lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92 is the winning result corresponding to the transition to the special gaming state, the variable display is stopped on the display unit D2 for the second operating port and stopped. As a result, after the predetermined pattern is displayed, the game shifts to the special gaming state according to the result.

Here, based on the winning of any of the operating ports 91 and 92, the variation display is started on the corresponding operating port display units D1 and D2, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the above variation display is stopped ( (Confirmed display), and the period until the confirmed display time elapses while maintaining that state corresponds to one game. However, one game round is not limited to the above contents, and for example, a single display area is provided, and even if any of the operating ports 91 and 92 is awarded, the single one is provided. In a configuration in which variable display is performed in the display area, variable display is started in the single display area, and the above variable display is stopped (confirmed display) with a predetermined stop result displayed, and that state. It is also possible to set one game time until the confirmed display time elapses while maintaining the above.

In the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is held up to four times (up to eight in total), and the main display unit 99 is adopted. The main display unit D is provided with a first operating port holding number display unit S1 and a second operating port holding number display unit S2 for displaying the number of holdings of the operating ports 91 and 92, respectively.

Further, in addition to the operation port display units D1 and D2, the main display unit D of the main display unit 99 is provided with a through gate display unit DS that displays the lottery result based on the winning of the through gate 84. .. In the through gate display unit DS, the variation display of the pattern is performed triggered by the winning of the through gate 84, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 84 is obtained. Explicit (confirmation display is executed). If the result of the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the support winning result, the predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit DS, the variable display is stopped, and the final display is completed. , Shift to the electric service open state. In the electric service open state, the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is opened in a predetermined manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to 4 times, but the number of times held is displayed on the main display unit D of the main display unit 99. A display unit SS for the number of holdings to be held is provided.

The main display unit D described in detail above can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, and the game ball is prevented from moving in front of these various display units. Therefore, its visibility is guaranteed.

Explaining the configuration of the inner frame 13 again with reference to FIG. 5, a game ball is launched into the game area PE below the game board unit 80 in the inner frame base body 50 based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 is provided.

(Game ball launch mechanism 110)
The game ball launch mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball arranged at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines a launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying balls and a base plate 114 on which these various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as a main configuration, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base body 50 to form the same. It is integrated with the inner frame base body 50.

The launch rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in a state of being inclined obliquely so as to be inclined upward toward the game board unit 80 side. A groove portion having a substantially V-shaped cross section is formed on the launch rail 112, and the front-rear position of the game ball is defined by fitting the game ball into the groove-shaped portion.

At a position closer to the downstream end (that is, the lower end) of the launch rail 112, a ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 to the launch standby position described above is arranged. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream from the ball stopper.

The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power supply / emission control device described later. The output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the expansion / contraction direction based on the output of the electric signal from the power supply / launch control device, so that the game ball placed in the launch standby position is on the game board unit 80 side, in detail. It is launched toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the game board unit 80.

The guide rail 100 is formed by partitioning the game area PE together with the game area partition member 98 fixed to the game board unit 80 (specifically, the front surface of the plate body) so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. .. Further, the guide rail 100 is composed of an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the guide passage 103 is formed by the two rails 101 and 102. Has been done. The guidance passage 103 has an entrance portion 104 opened to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the launch rail 112, and an exit portion 105 located above the game area PE. The game ball launched based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the launch rail 112 → the guidance rail 100 (entrance portion 104 → exit portion 105). In the game board unit 80, a reversion prevention member 106 for preventing the reversal of the game ball that has reached the game area PE into the guidance passage 103 is provided on the front side of the exit portion 105, specifically, near the tip of the inner rail 101. It is attached, and it is suppressed that the game ball that has reached the game area PE first prevents the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered.

Each of the rails 101 and 102 constituting the guide rail 100 has an arc shape centered on a substantially central portion of the game area PE. Therefore, the game ball passing through the guide passage 103 is likely to move (slide or roll) along the outer rail 102, that is, while in contact with the outer rail 102, due to the centrifugal force generated by itself. That is, when the game ball is launched so as to deliver the game ball to the game area PE, the area along the outer rail 102 in the guidance passage 103 constitutes a passage area (passage path) through which the game ball substantially passes. However, the region along the inner rail 101 is substantially a region through which the game ball does not pass.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112, the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 face each other diagonally with the lower end edge of the game board unit 80 in between. Have been placed. That is, both of the rails 100 and 112 are arranged so that the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the launch rail 112 are displaced to the left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board unit 80. As a result, both rails 100 and 112 are brought closer to the lower end edge of the game board unit 80, and a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the inlet portion 104 of the guide rail 100 and the launch rail 112.

A foul ball passage is arranged below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage is integrally molded with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 110 does not reach the game area PE and returns in the guidance passage 103 as a foul ball, the foul ball enters the foul ball passage through the gap. Become. The foul ball passage leads to the lower plate passage on the front door side, and the game ball that has entered the foul ball passage is discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. As a result, the interference between the foul ball and the game ball to be launched next is suppressed.

In the inner frame base body 50, a through hole is formed on the left side of the launch rail 112 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14) to penetrate the inner frame base body 50 in the front-rear direction. A passage forming member 121 is arranged in the door. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base body 50, and has a main body side upper plate passage 122 and a main body side lower plate passage 123. The upstream side of the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 leads to a game ball distribution unit described later. Further, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 is inserted below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side upper plate passage 122. The front door side upper plate passage is arranged below the main body side lower plate passage 123.

In the inner frame base body 50, below the passage forming member 121, an opening / closing member 124 for opening and closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123 is attached. The opening / closing member 124 is urged at a front position for closing the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the main body side lower plate passage 123, and when the front door frame 14 is opened, each opening / closing member 124 is urged by this urging force. By being in the closed state, the game balls are prevented from falling out from the passages 122 and 123. On the other hand, when the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the urging force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage communicate with each other.

Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (inner frame base body 50 and game board unit 80) will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 8 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

As shown in FIG. 8, a bearing metal fitting 132 is attached to the rotation base end side (right side in FIG. 8) on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50. Bearing portions 133 are formed on the bearing fitting 132 so as to be separated from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions 133. Further, on the back surface of the inner frame base body 50, a plurality of fixing levers 134 for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base body 50 in a closed state are provided.

As described above, the bottom portion of the accommodating recess (game board accommodating portion) 51 in the inner frame base body 50 penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50 and is opened to the back side of the inner frame base body 50. A window hole 52 is formed, and the window hole 52 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by a game board unit 80 housed in the storage recess 51. Various configurations such as a control device are mounted on the back surface of the game board unit 80 (rear block 80b), and these various configurations are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 52. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 80 will be described with reference to FIG. 7.

As described above, the back block 80b is attached to the back surface of the game board 80a. The back block 80b has a substantially box-shaped base body 251 open to the game board 80a side, and the base body 251 is fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 to form the game board 80a and the back block. 80b is integrated.

The front side of the base body 251 is an arrangement area for a movable effect mechanism and the like, and the back side thereof is an arrangement area for a control device for controlling various configurations and the variable display unit 85 (design display device 95). It has become.

More specifically, a part of the base body 251 protrudes to the back side of the inner frame base body 50, and the above-mentioned symbol display device 95 (see FIG. 6) and the symbol display device thereof with respect to the protruding portion. A display control device for driving the 95 is attached. The symbol display device 95 and the display control device are arranged so as to be stacked so that the symbol display device 95 is on the front side and the display control device is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base body 50). Further, a notification / effect control device 140 is mounted on the back surface of the base body 251 so as to be located behind the display control device.

The notification / effect control device 140 includes a notification / effect control board that controls voice output, lamp display, and control of the display control device according to instructions from the main control device described later, and the notification / effect control board is transparent. It is housed in a substrate box 141 made of a resin material or the like.

Below the notification / effect control device 140, a main control device unit 160 is provided so as to cover the base body 251 from the rear. The main control device unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back surface of the game board unit 80 (specifically, the back block 80b) and a main control device 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. There is. The main control device 162 includes a main control board having a function of controlling the main control of the game (main control circuit) and a function of monitoring the power supply (power failure monitoring circuit), and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be housed in a substrate box 163 made of the above.

The substrate box 163 includes a box base (front case body) having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover (back case body) that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a box sealing portion 164 as a sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of box sealing portions 164 are provided on the short side portions of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used to perform the sealing process.

Any configuration can be applied to the box sealing portion 164 as long as the box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be opened. However, by inserting a locking pin into the locking hole portion constituting the box sealing portion 164, the box can be used. The base and the box cover are combined so that they cannot be opened. The sealing process by the box sealing unit 164 prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation early and easily even if the illegal opening is performed. Even after opening the package, it is possible to perform the sealing process again. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting the locking pin into at least one locking hole of the plurality of box sealing portions 164. When the board box 163 is opened when a defect occurs in the housed main control board or when the main control board is inspected, the connecting portion between the box sealing portion into which the locking pin is inserted and the main body of the board box 163 is formed. To disconnect. As a result, the box base of the board box 163 and the box cover are separated, and the main control board inside can be taken out. After that, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking pin is inserted into another locking hole. If the history of opening the board box 163 is left in the board box 163, it is easy to find out that the illegal opening has been performed by looking at the board box 163.

The board box 163 and the mounting base 161 are connected to each other by a pedestal sealing portion 165 so as not to be opened. Specifically, the pedestal sealing portion 165 has a locking hole portion and a locking pin as in the box sealing portion 164, and the locking pin is inserted into the locking hole portion to form a board box 163. It is designed to be inseparably coupled to the mounting base 161. This makes it easier to grasp the fact when the board box 163 is illegally removed.

The portion of the front surface of the base body 251 that faces the lower back surface of the game board unit 80 corresponds to the game board opening of the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82, and the variable winning device 83, and is on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) that gathers at one place is formed. As a result, all the game balls that have won the general winning opening 81 or the like are gathered below the game board unit 80 via the collection passage. That is, the base body 251 is provided with a function of collecting the game balls that have won prizes in various winning openings.

A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 80, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 80 are led out into the discharge passage by the collection passage. The out port 86 is also connected to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won a prize in any of the winning ports is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 86.

Further, the base body 251 constituting the back block 80b has, as the detection sensors for each of the above-mentioned ball-entry portions, a general-winning opening detection sensor for detecting the game ball that has won the general winning opening 81, and an operating port 91. , 92 is equipped with a detection sensor for the operating port that detects the game ball, and the winning detection mechanism is composed of these various detection sensors. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main control device 162, and detection information (detection signal) is output from each detection sensor to the main control device 162.

Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. FIG. 9 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 10 is a front view of the back pack unit 15.

As shown in FIG. 9, the inner frame 13 is covered from the rear by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201 as a main body of the back pack unit 15, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device collecting unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201. ..

The back pack 201 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and as shown in FIG. 10, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion that protrudes rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. It has 212 and. The protective cover portion 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 85.

The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate. Various output terminals are provided on the external terminal board, and various signals are output to the management control device (hall computer) on the game hall side through these output terminals. Further, as shown in FIG. 10, the base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower hooking pins 214 at the right end portion when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the bearing pin 214 is provided on the inner frame 13. The back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by being inserted through the portion 133. The base portion 211 is formed with a plurality of insertion portions through which the fixing lever 134 provided in the inner frame 13 is inserted, and the fixed lever 134 is inserted into the insertion portion and hits the base portion 211 from behind. The back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13 by being in contact with the inner frame 13.

The payout mechanism portion 202 is arranged on the base portion 211 so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism unit 202 is provided with a tank 221 arranged at the uppermost part of the back pack 201 and opened upward, and game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. NS. A tank rail 222 that gently inclines toward the downstream side is connected to the side of the tank 221 and a case rail 223 that extends in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 222. A payout device 224 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 223. The game balls paid out from the payout device 224 are supplied to the game ball distribution section 225 provided on the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 224.

The game ball distribution unit 225 has a function for distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 224 to any of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, or the discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body described above. Formed so that it leads to the upper plate 33 via the side upper plate passage 122 and the front door side upper plate passage, and the outer opening leads to the lower plate 34 via the main body side lower plate passage 123 and the front door side lower plate passage. Has been done.

A discharge passage board and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion back and forth. The discharge passage board is formed with a discharge passage that is open to the rear on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and the open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island equipment of the game hall, etc., and the game ball led out from the above-mentioned collection passage or the like to the discharge passage passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. It is discharged.

The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base 241, and the payout control device 242 and the power supply / emission control device 243 are mounted on the mounting base 241. The payout control device 242 and the power supply / launch control device 243 are arranged so as to be stacked in the front-rear direction so that the payout control device 242 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

In the payout control device 242, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 224 is housed in the board box 244, and a state return switch 245 provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box 244. For example, when the state return switch 245 is pressed when a payout error such as a ball jam in the payout device 224 occurs, the ball jam is cleared.

In the power supply / launch control device 243, the power supply / launch control board is housed in the board box 246. A predetermined power source required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the power supply / launch control board, and the launch of the game ball is controlled by the player operating the game ball launch handle 41. Specifically, the drive control of the solenoid 111 constituting the game ball launch mechanism 110 and the drive control of the ball feeding device 113 are executed.

Further, the power supply / emission control device 243 is provided with a power supply switch 247. By operating the power switch 247, the power of the pachinko machine 10 can be switched between an on state (on state) and a cutoff state (off state).

Here, the pachinko machine 10 has a storage and holding function for various data, retains the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and returns to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure. You can do it. For example, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure as in the case of the closing of the game hall, the state before the shutoff is stored in memory. On the other hand, when the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166 provided on the main control device 162, the RAM data is initialized.

These various switches can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine by opening the main portion 12 (inner frame 13) of the gaming machine to expose the back portion of the inner frame 13. On the other hand, in a state where the opening of the game machine main unit 12 is restricted by the locking device 75, these various switches cannot be operated from the front side of the game machine. That is, the above-mentioned various switches are difficult to operate when the game machine main unit 12 is closed, and are operated from the front side of the game machine by a person who does not have a key for the locking device 75 (for example, a cheating person). Is difficult.

(Electrical configuration of pachinko machine 10)
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to the block of FIG.

The MPU 402 is mounted on the main control board 401 provided in the main control device 162. The MPU 402 is a ROM 403 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 402, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 403 is executed. It is an element having a built-in RAM 404, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. It should be noted that a configuration may be configured in which a part of the functions of the MPU 402, for example, the function of the ROM 403 and the function of the RAM 404 are provided as another element.

The MPU 402 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242, various detection sensors, and the like provided in the main control device 162 are connected to the input side of the MPU 402. A power supply / emission control device 243 is connected to the power failure monitoring board 405, and power is supplied to the MPU 402 via the power failure monitoring board 405.

As a part of various detection sensors, a ball entry detection sensor 391a that detects a ball entry (winning) into the general winning opening 81, a ball entry detection sensor 391b that detects a ball entry (winning) into the variable winning device 83, the first Ball entry detection sensor 391c that detects ball entry (winning) into the operating port 91, ball entry detection sensor 391d that detects ball entry (winning) into the second operating port 92, ball entry (winning) into the through gate 84 The ball entry detection sensor 391e for detecting the above is connected, and the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 makes a winning determination (ball entry determination) for each ball entry portion. Further, in the MPU 402, a big hit lottery is executed based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92, and a support lottery is executed based on the winning of the through gate 84.

A power failure monitoring board 405, a payout control device 242, and a notification / effect control device 140 are connected to the output side of the MPU 402. A prize ball command is output to the payout control device 242 based on, for example, a prize-winning determination result for the prize-winning ball-winning portions such as the operating ports 91 and 92 described above. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when the prize ball command is output. Then, when the winning to the general winning opening 81 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 game balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 83 is specified, 15 game balls are output. The prize ball command corresponding to the payout is output, and when the winning to the first operating port 91 is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is output, and the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output to the second operating port 92. When a prize is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

Various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, the command information storage area 425 of the ROM 403 is referred to when outputting these various commands. Details of these various commands will be described later. Each of the above commands is configured as information on a predetermined number of bytes, and includes various information as information on the predetermined number of bytes.

Further, on the output side of the MPU 402, a variable winning drive unit that opens and closes the shutter of the variable winning device 83, an electric accessory drive unit that opens and closes the electric accessory 93 of the second operating port 92, and a main display unit 99 are connected. Has been done. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 401, and the MPU 402 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

That is, the drive control of the variable winning drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the variable winning device 83 is opened and closed in the opening / closing execution mode. Further, when the support lottery for the electric accessory 93 is won, the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit is executed in the MPU 402 so that the electric accessory 93 is opened and closed. Further, the MPU 402 executes display control of the main display unit D of the main display unit 99.

Furthermore, an external output terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 402, and through this external output terminal plate 213, the management control device (hall computer) on the game hall side can be informed of the entry into various ball entry sections. Information about lottery results such as jackpots is output. As a result, the state of the pachinko machine 10 and the game situation can be grasped by the hall computer.

The power failure monitoring board 405 relays the main control board 401 and the power supply / emission control device 243, and the power failure monitoring board 405 has a DC stable 24 volt voltage which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply / emission control device 243. The function to monitor is given. The payout control device 242 controls the payout of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 224 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

The power supply / launch control device 243 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a playground or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power source, the operating power required for each of the main control board 401, the payout control device 242, etc. is generated, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. do. Further, the power supply / launch control device 243 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when a predetermined launch condition is satisfied.

The notification / effect control device 140 is provided with a notification / effect control board on which an MPU is mounted. The MPU is a ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM is executed. A certain RAM and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built-in. It is not essential that the ROM and RAM are integrated into one chip for the MPU, and each may be individually chipped. The MPU of the notification / effect control device 140 drives and controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162, and also displays the display control device. It controls 410.

The display control device 410 executes the display control of the symbol display device 95 based on the command input from the notification / effect control device 140. In this case, in the notification / effect control device 140, based on various commands input from the main control device 162, the variation display mode of the symbol in the symbol display device 95 (for example, the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the content of the reach effect) and the like. The stop display mode of the symbol (the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display) is determined.

Here, the configuration related to the variable display of the symbol of each game and the content of the variable display will be described. In the following description, FIGS. 12 and 13 will be referred to as appropriate. 12 and 13 are schematic views for explaining the display contents on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.
For convenience of explanation, the background image and the like displayed on the display screen 95a are omitted in FIG. 13 and the like.

The display control device 410 is provided with a character ROM. In the character ROM, data of nine types of main symbols with numbers "1" to "9" (see FIGS. 12 (a) to (i)) and data of sub-symbols without numbers are attached. (See FIG. 12 (j)) is stored in advance.

As shown in FIG. 13A, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 of an upper row, a middle row, and a lower row are set on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is configured by arranging a main symbol and a sub symbol in a predetermined order. Then, on the display screen 95a, the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are variably displayed so as to scroll in a predetermined direction (specifically, from right to left) with periodicity.

In the upper symbol row Z1, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in descending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. In the lower symbol row Z3, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and one sub symbol is arranged between each main symbol. That is, the upper symbol row Z1 and the lower symbol row Z3 are composed of 18 symbols. On the other hand, in the middle symbol string Z2, nine types of main symbols "1" to "9" are arranged in ascending order of numbers, and then between the main symbol of "9" and the main symbol of "1". The main symbol of "4" is additionally arranged in the above, and one sub symbol is arranged between each of these main symbols. That is, only in the middle symbol row Z2, 10 main symbols are arranged and composed of 20 symbols.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13B, on the display screen 95a, three symbols are stopped and displayed for each symbol row, and as a result, a total of nine symbols of 3 × 3 are stopped and displayed. It is supposed to be done. Further, on the display screen 95a, five effective lines, that is, a left line L1, a middle line L2, a right line L3, a right-down line L4, and a right-up line L5 are set. Then, the variable display was stopped in the order of the upper symbol row Z1 → the lower symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2, and a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol combination with the same number) was formed on one of the effective lines. When the variable display of all the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 is completed in this state, the jackpot moving image is displayed as the occurrence of the normal jackpot result or the probabilistic jackpot result.

In view of the fact that the variable display of each symbol row is stopped as described above, the upper symbol row Z1 is the first symbol row (or the first symbol row), and the lower symbol row Z3 is the second symbol row (or the second symbol row). (2 pattern rows), the middle symbol row Z2 can be referred to as a 3rd symbol row (or a 3rd symbol row).

Of the above main symbols, the main symbols with odd numbers (1,3,5,7,9) correspond to "specific symbols" and have even numbers (2,4,6,8). The main symbol corresponds to a "non-specific symbol". When the probability variation jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same specific symbol combination or the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed. In addition, when a normal jackpot result is obtained, for example, the same non-specific symbol combination is stopped and displayed.

The mode of variable display of symbols in the symbol display device 95 is not limited to the above, and is arbitrary, such as the number of symbol rows, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the number of symbols in each symbol row, and the like. Can be changed as appropriate. For example, a plurality of symbol rows may be set to be arranged side by side, and the direction of the variation display of the symbols in the symbol row may be set to the vertical direction.

A hold display is placed at the bottom of the display screen 95a, specifically below the variable display area ME composed of the variable display area for the upper symbol column, the variable display area for the middle symbol column, and the variable display area for the lower symbol column. The area is set. The hold display area includes a hold number display area Da in which the same number of unit hold display areas as the maximum number of holds when the game balls win the operating ports 91 and 92 are arranged in the left-right direction, and a variable display area. It is composed of an execution target display area Dc capable of displaying a hold image (hold icon) corresponding to the game times being executed by ME.

More specifically, when the game ball wins the operating ports 91 and 92, the maximum number of holdings is eight, and correspondingly, the holding number display area Da includes the first unit holding display area and the second unit holding. A display area, a third unit hold display area, a fourth unit hold display area, a fifth unit hold display area, a sixth unit hold display area, a seventh unit hold display area, and an eighth unit hold display area are set.

For example, when the number of hold balls is one when the game ball wins the operating ports 91 and 92, a predetermined hold image (hold icon) is displayed only in the first unit hold display area, and the game ball is displayed. When the number of holdings is 4 when the operating ports 91 and 92 are won, a predetermined holding image (holding icon) is displayed in the 1st unit holding display area to the 4th unit holding display area. It has become. FIG. 13B exemplifies the case where the number of holdings at the operating ports 91 and 92 is three. In the following description, the "holding number" is also simply referred to as the "holding number".

(About various counters)
Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

The MPU 402 uses various counter information during the game to perform a big hit lottery, set the display of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D), set the symbol display of the symbol display device 95, and the like. As shown in FIG. 14, when the hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery, the type counter C2 used for determining the hit type such as the probability variation jackpot result or the normal jackpot result, and the symbol display device 95 are disengaged and fluctuate. The reach random number counter C3 used for the reach lottery, the random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the winning random number counter C1, the fluctuation display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99, and A variation type counter CS that determines the variation display time of the symbol on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is used. Further, the electric accessory opening counter C4 used for the lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is set to the electric service open state is used.

Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 404. The RAM 404 is provided with a hold ball storage area 432 including a hold area RE for the operation port, an execution area AE, and a total hold number storage area.

The holding area RE for the operating port includes a first area, a second area, a third area, a fourth area, a fifth area, a sixth area, a seventh area, and an eighth area, and the first operating port 91 or Each numerical information of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 431 according to the winning history of the second operating port 92 is the above-mentioned hold information in the first area. ~ Stored in any of the 8th area. The reserved information corresponds to special information.

In this case, in the first area to the eighth area, when the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 is awarded a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → the third area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order in the order of the fourth area. Then, up to four winning histories of the game balls to the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 are stored on hold. Further, the holding ball storage area 432 is provided with a total holding number storage area, and the total holding number storage area holds the winning history of the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92. Information for identifying is stored.

The execution area AE is for moving each value stored in the first area of the operation port holding area RE when the variable display of the pattern is started on the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99. At the start of one game, a hit / fail judgment is made based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

Here, various counters will be supplementarily described.

The hit random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 599). In particular, when the hit random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the hit random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the hit random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The winning random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the operating port holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92.

The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a hit / miss table (hit / miss information group) in the hit / miss table storage area 421 as the hit / miss information group storage means in the ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 15, as the pass / fail table, a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group) are set. .. That is, the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability mode (low probability state) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low and a high probability mode (high probability) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively high as the lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means. State) and is set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15A) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) that are big hits are "7", "107", and " There are a total of 6 pieces, "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15B) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. Incidentally, if the winning probability in the high probability mode is higher than that in the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers that will be the big hits are arbitrary.

In the present embodiment, the value of the random number that wins the jackpot corresponds to the deviation result. The deviation result is roughly divided into a normal deviation result and a special deviation result. The details will be described later, but the special deviation result is given preferential treatment over the normal deviation result in that the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is switched to the high frequency support mode A described later, and the predetermined conditions. In the case of a special deviation below, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode after the game rounds related to the special deviation are completed. In the following description, the out-of-order result is also simply referred to as the "out-of-order result".

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 15A) is referred to in the lottery, the values of the random numbers that are special deviations (that is, special deviation information) are "111" and "333". , "555", a total of three. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "111", "333", and "555" correspond to the special deviation result. On the other hand, even under the gaming state in which the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 15B) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that is a special deviation (that is, the special deviation information) is "111". , "333" and "555", for a total of three. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "111", "333", and "555" correspond to the big hit result. That is, the probability of becoming a special deviation is the same in both the low probability mode and the high probability mode.

Next, the type counter C2 will be described. The type counter C2 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 29, reach the maximum value (that is, 29), and then return to 0. Here, in the present embodiment, a plurality of jackpot results are set. These multiple jackpot results are different in two conditions: (1) a lottery mode in the winning / failing lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode by the electric accessory 93 after the opening / closing execution mode ends. ..

As a support mode by the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92, when the game ball is continuously launched to the game area PE in the same manner, the second operating port 92 Low-frequency support mode (low-frequency support state or low-frequency guide state) and high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support state or high-frequency support state) so that the frequency with which the electric accessory 93 is opened per unit time is relatively high or low. High frequency guide state) is set. The high-frequency support mode is roughly divided into a high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the above-mentioned special deviation or the like occurs, and a high-frequency support mode B that shifts when a big hit occurs. The difference between these support modes will be described later.

The type counter C2 is periodically updated, and the game ball is stored in the operating port holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92 wins a prize.

The distribution destination of the game result with respect to the type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in the distribution table storage area 422 as the distribution information group storage means in the ROM 403. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. The distribution tables include the jackpot distribution table (first distribution information group) shown in FIG. 16 (a) and the special deviation distribution table (second distribution information group) shown in FIG. 16 (b). ) And are set.

As shown in FIG. 16A, in the jackpot distribution table, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability corresponding special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding special game result) are distributed to the game results. ) Is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "15 to 29" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the 6R normal jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (open / close execution mode). In this high-frequency support mode B, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode B reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, the game shifts to the special game state). If you do), it will end and switch to low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, 40 times is set as the end reference number of times.

The 6R probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (open / close execution mode). This high-frequency support mode B is continued until the next big hit result and the transition to the special gaming state is performed, and the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode with the start of the special gaming state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16B, in the special deviation distribution table, the special deviation result A and the special deviation result B are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 23" corresponds to the special deviation result A, and "24 to 29" corresponds to the special deviation result B. ..

As shown in FIG. 17B, neither the special deviation result A nor the special deviation result B is a trigger for switching the lottery mode, but a trigger for switching the support mode by the electric accessory 93. ..

Specifically, the special deviation result A is an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game times that resulted in the special deviation result A. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (If migrated), exit and transition to low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, 20 times is set as the end reference number of times.

The special deviation result B also serves as an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game times that resulted in the special deviation result B. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (If migrated), exit and transition to low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, 40 times is set as the end reference number of times.

The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 238). The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the operating port holding area RE of the holding ball storage area 432 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the first operating port 91 or the second operating port 92. Then, it is decided whether or not to generate the reach based on the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 403.

However, in the game round that shifts to the open / close execution mode, the MPU 402 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3. The number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display is the same in each game state, but may be set individually according to the game state. For example, when the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, the number of reach random number counters C3 corresponding to the occurrence of the reach display may be set to be larger than that in the low-frequency support mode.

Here, the reach display (reach state) is provided with a symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) capable of performing variable display (or variable display) of the symbol (picture), and the game result is compatible with the open / close execution mode. In the game times that are the game results, the stop display result after the variation display can be the special display result. Refers to a display state for making the player think that the special display result is likely to be a variable display state before the derivation display is performed.

In other words, by stopping and displaying some of the symbols among the plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, it is possible to establish a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode. It is a display state in which a reach symbol combination having a characteristic is displayed, and in that state, a variable display of symbols is performed in the remaining symbol rows.

More specifically, as a pre-stage for ending the variation display of the symbol, it is possible to establish a symbol combination corresponding to the occurrence of the open / close execution mode on the preset effective line in the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying a characteristic reach symbol combination, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of symbols is performed by the final stop symbol sequence.

The display contents on the display screen 95a will be described in more detail. A reach line is formed by stopping and displaying the main symbol with a number that constitutes the above, and in a situation where the reach line is formed, a variable display of the symbol is performed in the middle symbol row to display the reach. It becomes. Then, when a big hit occurs, the main symbols forming the reach line and the main symbols with the numbers constituting the hit symbol combination are stopped and displayed on the reach line, and the variation display of the symbols in the middle symbol row is displayed. It will be terminated.

Further, in the reach display, in the state where the reach symbol combination is displayed as described above, the remaining symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen to produce a reach effect. This includes those that perform the reach effect by reducing or hiding the reach symbol combination and then displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen 95a. In addition, when the reach display is performed or before the reach display, it is determined whether or not to perform the notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character by using the reach random number counter C3 or other counters. You may.

The variation type counter CS has a configuration in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 198, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198), it returns to 0. The fluctuation type counter CS includes the fluctuation display time of the first operating port display unit D1 and the second operating port display unit D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D) and the fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 95. And are used in determining in the MPU 402. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time the normal process described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the start of the variation display on the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the display unit D2 for the second operating port and at the start of the variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 95. Will be done.

The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 599, reach the maximum value (that is, 599), and then return to 0. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 433 of the RAM 404 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 84. Then, at a predetermined timing, a support lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 93 of the second operating port 92 to the open state according to the value of the stored electric accessory opening counter C4. Hereinafter, the support mode will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 18 and 19.

The value of the random number that wins the support is stored as a support lottery table (win / fail information group) in the win / fail table storage area 421 as the win / loss information group storage means in the ROM 403. As shown in FIG. 18, as the support lottery table, the support lottery table for the low-probability support mode (low-probability hit / miss information group) and the support lottery table for the high-frequency support mode A (low-probability hit / miss information group). And a support lottery table (high-probability winning / failing information group) for the high-frequency support mode B are set.

In the situation where the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode (FIG. 18A) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the support are "1" and "3". , "5", "7" ... "595", "597", "599", for a total of 300 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7" ... "595", "597", "599" correspond to the support winning result. doing. Other values correspond to support non-winning results.

In the situation where the support lottery table (FIG. 18B) for the high frequency support mode A is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the support are "1", " 3 ”,“ 5 ”,“ 7 ”...“ 595 ”,“ 597 ”,“ 599 ”, for a total of 300 pieces. That is, among the values of the random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "1", "3", "5", "7" ... "595", "597", "599" correspond to the support winning result. doing. Other values correspond to support non-winning results. That is, the support lottery table for the high frequency support mode A is shared with the support lottery table for the low frequency support mode.

On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table (FIG. 18C) for the high frequency support mode B is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that wins the support (that is, the winning information) is "4", A total of 598 pieces except "304". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", all values other than "4" and "304" correspond to the support winning results. That is, the high-frequency support mode B is differentiated from the high-frequency support mode A and the low-frequency support mode in that the support is won in almost all of the support lottery.

As shown in FIG. 19, in the low-frequency support mode, the support winning probability is halved, and the number of times (opening number) that the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support winning result is obtained is ". It is specified to be "once", and the time (opening time) in which the electric accessory 93 is maintained in the open state is specified to be "0.1 sec". As described above, by extremely shortening the opening time, the winning of the second operating port 92 is substantially avoided during the low frequency support mode.

In the high frequency support mode A, the support winning probability is halved, which is the same as in the low frequency support mode, but the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support winning result is obtained. (Number of times of opening) is specified to be "2 times", the time (opening time) that the electric accessory is kept in the open state is "2 sec", and the interval time that is kept in the closed state is "0.2 sec". It is stipulated to be. By extending the opening time as compared with the low frequency support mode in this way, the second operating port 92 is allowed to win a prize during the high frequency support mode A. By appropriately generating a prize in the second operating port 92 in this way, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held. That is, the high-frequency support mode A is configured such that the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired game balls (so-called base) is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode.

In the high-frequency support mode B, the support winning probability is 1 / 1.1, and the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state (opening number) is "2 times" when the support winning result is obtained. The time (opening time) for keeping the electric accessory in the open state is "2 sec", and the interval time for keeping the electric accessory in the closed state is "0.2 sec". By extending the opening time as compared with the low frequency support mode in this way, the second operating port 92 is allowed to win a prize during the high frequency support mode B. In the high-frequency support mode B, the winning frequency of the second operating port 92 is higher than that in the high-frequency support mode A, so that it is possible to proceed with the game while further suppressing the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held. There is. That is, the high-frequency support mode B is configured such that the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of fired game balls (so-called base) is higher than that of the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode A. ing.

As described above, the game state in the present embodiment shifts to the normal game state in which the game progresses by repeating the game times based on the entry into the operating ports 91 and 92, and the variable winning is triggered by the jackpot. It is roughly classified into a special game state (open / close execution mode) in which the device 83 is opened / closed. The normal game state is the first normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode, and the second normal game state in which the lottery mode is the high probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B. In the third normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode B, and the fourth normal game state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the high frequency support mode A. It is configured. Regarding the advantage of the player, the difference is provided so that the first normal game state <the fourth normal game state and the third normal game state <the second normal game state become higher in this order.

(About various processes executed by the main controller 162)
Next, the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing executed in advancing the game by the MPU 402 in the main control device 162 will be described. In the MPU 402, in addition to the timer interrupt processing and the normal processing, the main processing activated when the power is turned on and the NMI interrupt processing activated by inputting a power failure signal to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal) are executed. , The description of these various processes will be omitted.

(Timer interrupt processing)
First, the timer interrupt processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This process is periodically started by the MPU 402 (for example, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In step S101, reading processing of various winning detection sensors (for example, the detection sensors 391a to 391e) is executed. That is, the state of various winning detection sensors connected to the main control device 162 is read, the state of the winning detection sensor is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S103, the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each added by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values, they are cleared to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S104, a winning process for thru accompanying the winning of the thru gate 84 is executed. In the through winning process, it is determined whether or not the through gate winning detection flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and if the flag is stored, it is stored in the electric service holding area 433. The value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 above is set on condition that the number of reserved information for the through gate 84 (hereinafter, also referred to as the accessory reserved storage number SN) is less than 4. It is stored in the electric service holding area 433. When the winning detection flag for the through gate is stored in the various flag storage areas 435, the winning detection flag for the through gate is deleted and the winning process for the through gate is completed.

After executing the winning process for the through gate in step S104, the process proceeds to step S105, and in the step S105, the winning process for the operating port accompanying the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed, and the timer interrupt process ends. do.

(Prize processing for the operating port)
Here, the winning process for the operating port will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 21 and 22.

In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the first operating port 91. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for paying out three game balls is set in the payout control device 242.

In the following step S203, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the first operating port 91 to the hall computer on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer grasps that the ball has entered the first operating port 91. In the following step S204, a value corresponding to the first operating port 91 is read from the holding number storage area, and this value is set as the holding storage number RaN for the first operating port (hereinafter, also referred to as the holding storage number RaN for the first operating port). say). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first operating port 91, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (winned) the second operating port 92. When it is determined that the game ball has entered the second operating port 92, the process proceeds to step S207, and a prize ball command for paying out four game balls is set in the payout control device 242. The prize ball command set in steps S202 and S207 is transmitted to the payout control device 242 in the external output process S401 of the normal process described later.

In the following step S208, an external signal setting process is performed so as to output information indicating that the game ball has entered the second operating port 92 to the hall computer on the game hall side. As a result, the hall computer grasps that the ball has entered the second operating port 92. In the following step S209, a value corresponding to the second operating port 92 is read from the holding number storage area, and this value is set to the holding storage number RbN for the second operating port (hereinafter, also referred to as the holding storage number RbN for the second operating port). say). After that, in step S205, information acquisition processing for storing each value of the winning random number counter C1 and the type counter C2 is performed, and the main winning process is completed.

If a negative determination is made in both the processes of steps S201 and S206, that is, if there is no ball in any of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92, the main winning process is terminated as it is. ..

Here, the information acquisition process in step S205 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

(Information acquisition process)
In the information acquisition process, first, in step S301, the information acquisition process of the operation hold storage number N stored in the hold number storage area of the hold ball storage area 432, specifically, the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92. It is determined whether or not the operation hold storage number N (RaN or RbN described above) related to the ball entry portion that triggered the above is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). If the operation hold storage number N is the upper limit value, the information acquisition process is terminated as it is, and if it is less than the upper limit value, the operation hold storage number N of the corresponding operation port is added by 1 in step S302. , The total number of holds stored in the hold number storage area in step S303 (hereinafter referred to as the common hold number CRN) is added by 1.

In the following step S304, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in the above step S103 are set to the first of the free storage area areas of the operation port hold area RE. It is stored in the storage area, that is, the storage area corresponding to the common hold number CRN added by 1 in step S302.

That is, when the reserved storage number RaN for the first operating port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS updated in step S103 are set. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of the operation hold hold area RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation hold storage number N added by 1 in step S302.

When the reserved storage number RbN for the second operating port is set, the values of the hit random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 above are set to the holding area for the operating port. It is stored in the first storage area of the free storage area of RE, that is, the area corresponding to the operation hold storage number N added by 1 in step S302.

After storing the hold information, the process proceeds to step S305. In step S305, the display update process is executed for the hold number display unit of the main display unit 99. In the display update process, when the current entry destination (winning destination) is the first operating port 91, the display of the hold number display unit S1 for the first operating port is updated, and the current entry destination (winning destination) is changed. In the case of the second operating port 92, the display of the hold number display unit S2 for the second operating port is updated.

Each of the hold number display units S1 and S2 is composed of four LEDs, and the number of LEDs lit by the hold number display units S1 and S2, the hold number related to the first operation port 91, and the second operation. The configuration is such that the number of holds related to the mouth 92 matches. When the number of holdings related to the first operating port 91 increases due to this prize, the number of LEDs lit on the holding number display unit S1 for the first operating port is increased accordingly, and the second operation is performed. When the number of holdings related to the port 92 increases, a process of increasing the number of lit LEDs on the holding number display unit S2 for the second operating port is performed accordingly.

In the following steps S306 and S307, the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410, which are the control devices on the sub side (sub side), recognize that the operation ports 91 and 92 have won a prize, and hold them, which will be described later. The pre-confirmation process and the hold command setting process, which are the processes for executing the notice, etc., are executed, and this information acquisition process is terminated. The hold command includes information on which of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is based on the winning.

The hold command set in the hold command setting process in step S307 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in the external output process (step S401) of the normal process described later.

(Normal processing)
Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. The normal process is a process that is started after the main process that is started when the power is turned on is executed, and in the normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S401 to S407 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S409 and S410 are executed in the remaining time.

In the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S401. In the external signal output process of step S401, the output data such as the timer interrupt process or the command set in the previous normal process is transmitted to each control device and the hall computer on the sub side.

Specifically, the presence or absence of the prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 242. In addition, if various commands such as a fluctuation start command, a type command, a fluctuation end command, and other effects commands, a hold command, and a shift command described later are set, they are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140. ..

Further, as will be described in detail later, for example, each time the display units D1 and D2 for the operation port of the main display unit D finish the variable display of the design, an external signal indicating that the design is confirmed is output to the hall computer, and the opening / closing execution mode is executed. The inside outputs an external signal indicating that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress to the hall computer, and outputs an external signal indicating that the high frequency support mode is in the high frequency support mode to the hall computer.

Next, in step S402, the variation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 404.

In the following step S403, a game time control process for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In this game time control process, jackpot determination, setting of symbol variation display by the symbol display device 95, display control of the main display unit 99, and the like are performed.

After executing the game times control process in step S403, the process proceeds to step S404 to execute the game state transition process. The details will be described later, but by this game state transition process, the game state shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode), a high probability mode, a high frequency support mode B, and the like. The details of the game turn control process in step S403 and the game state transition process in step S404 will be described later.

In the following step S405, the control process for the through gate including the support lottery process based on the winning of the through gate 84 is executed, and in the step S406, the electric power for driving and controlling the electric accessory 93 attached to the second operating port 92 is executed. Executes role support processing. Details of the through-gate process in step S405 and the electric service support process in step S406 will be described later.

After that, in step S407, the game ball launch control process is executed. In the game ball launch control process, the solenoid 111 of the game ball launch mechanism 110 is once in a predetermined interval period (for example, 0.6 sec) on condition that the launch permission signal is input from the power supply / launch control device 243. To excite. As a result, the game ball is launched toward the game area PE.

In the following step S408, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is reached.

Since the execution time of each process of steps S401 to S407 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the hit random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly. The variable type counter CS can also be updated at random.

(Game times control process)
Next, the game rotation control process in step S403 will be described with reference to the flowcharts and the like of FIGS. 24 to 27.

In the game times control process, first, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 24, it is determined in step S501 whether or not the game is in the special game state (in the open / close execution mode). When the open / close execution mode is in progress, the main game is performed without executing any of the processes after step S502, that is, the game round start process of steps S503 to S506 and the game round progress process of steps S507 to S509. End the control process.

If it is not in the open / close execution mode, it is determined in steps S502 and S503 whether or not the game is being played. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 are in the variable display. If the variation is being displayed, a negative determination is made in step S502 and the process proceeds to step S503. In step S503, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display on the operation port display units D1 and D2 has been completed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S503, the process proceeds to the game round start process of steps S504 to S506. In the game round start process, first, in step S504, it is determined whether or not the total number of start hold balls (common hold number CRN) is "0". When the common hold number CRN is "0", it means that the hold information is not stored in the hold ball storage area 432. Therefore, the main game times control process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when the common hold number CRN is not "0", the data setting process for setting the data stored in the hold area RE for the operation port of the hold ball storage area 432 for the variable display is performed in step S505. After executing, in step S506, the fluctuation start processing for starting the fluctuation display of the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the fluctuation display of the symbol display device 95 in the main display unit 99 is executed, and then the game round control process. To finish.

Here, the data setting process in step S505 and the fluctuation start process in step S506 will be described in detail. First, the data setting process in step S505 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Data setting process)
In the data setting process, first, in step S601, among the operation hold storage numbers N stored in the hold number storage area, the one that is the target of the current setting process and the common hold number CRN are subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE for the operation port (see FIG. 14), that is, the operation hold storage number N is "0". When the operation hold storage number N is "0", the present data setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the operation hold storage number N is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the operation port hold area RE is moved to the execution area AE. Then, the data (holding information) stored in the second area to the eighth area of the holding area RE for the operation port is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. As a result, for example, with the movement of the data in the first area to the execution area AE, the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, the fifth area → the fourth. The data in each area is shifted in the order of area, 6th area → 5th area, 7th area → 6th area, 8th area → 7th area.

In the following step S604, a shift command is set, which is information for causing the notification / effect control device 140 to recognize that the data in the operation port holding area RE has been shifted. After that, this data setting process is terminated. The shift command set in step S604 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). Then, this shift command is also transmitted to the display control device 410 via the notification / effect control device 140.

(Fluctuation start processing)
Next, the fluctuation start processing in step S506 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the fluctuation start processing, first, in step S701, the update processing of the game count counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is executed. The game count counter is cleared to 0 with the transition to the special game state, and "1" is added each time the update process of step S701 is executed. In the MPU 402, the game times executed after the end of the special game state can be specified by referring to the value of the game number counter.

In the following step S702, the winning / failing determination process based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is executed. This hit / fail determination process is a process for determining whether or not the hold information referred to in the current fluctuation start process corresponds to the jackpot winning. Specifically, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for jackpot determination, that is, the information acquired from the hit random number counter C1 is grasped. Then, when the winning / failing lottery mode is the low probability mode, the winning / failing table for the low probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the above-recognized information is included in the information corresponding to the jackpot. If the winning / failing lottery mode is the high probability mode, the above grasped information becomes a big hit by referring to the winning / failing table for the high probability mode stored in the winning / failing table storage area 421 of the ROM 403. Identify if it is included in the corresponding information.

In the following step S703, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / fail determination process in step S702 is the result corresponding to the jackpot. If the result corresponds to a jackpot, the jackpot type determination process is executed in step S704.

In this type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the distribution table for jackpots stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of ROM 403, which of the 6R normal jackpot result and the 6R probability variation jackpot result corresponds to the above-mentioned information for type determination grasped. To identify.

If it is a 6R probability variation jackpot, an affirmative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706, and the stop result setting process for the 6R probability variation jackpot is executed in the step S706. If it is a 6R normal jackpot, a negative determination is made in step S705, the process proceeds to step S707, and the stop result setting process for the 6R normal jackpot is executed in the step S707.

Returning to the description of step S703, if a negative determination is made in step S703, that is, if it is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S708. If the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal range described above, a negative determination is made in step S708 and the process proceeds to step S713. In step S713, the stop result setting process for normal deviation is executed. If the result of the lottery this time is the above-mentioned special deviation, an affirmative determination is made in step S708, the process proceeds to step S709, and the special deviation type determination process is executed.

In this type determination process, among the information stored in the execution area AE, the information for type determination, that is, the information acquired from the type counter C2 is grasped. Further, with reference to the special deviation distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 422 of the ROM 403, the above-identified type determination information corresponds to either the special deviation result A or the special deviation result B. Identify.

If the special deviation result A is obtained, an affirmative determination is made in step S710, the process proceeds to step S711, and the stop result setting process for the special deviation A is executed in the step S711. If the special deviation result B is obtained, a negative determination is made in step S710, the process proceeds to step S712, and the stop result setting process for the special deviation B is executed in the step S712.

In each stop result setting process of steps S706, S707, S711 to S713, the stop result table in which the information of the mode of the pattern to be finally stopped and displayed on the main display unit 99 is stored in the stop result table storage area 424 of the ROM 403. Is specified, and the specified information is stored in the RAM 404.

In step S706 and step S707, information for specifying in the MPU 402 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is a 6R probability variation jackpot result or a 6R normal jackpot result is stored in various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Specifically, in step S706, the 6R probability variation jackpot flag is stored, and in step S707, the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored.

Further, in step S711 and step S712, information for identifying in the MPU 402 that the hit / fail determination result of the current game round is the special deviation result A or the special deviation result B is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. do. Specifically, in step S711, the special deviation A flag is stored, and in step S712, the special deviation B flag is stored.

After executing any of the processes of steps S706, S707, and S711 to S713, the variable display time setting process is executed in step S714. In the variation display time setting process, the variation display time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time is acquired by referring to the variation display time table stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. After that, the acquired fluctuation display time information is set in the fluctuation display time counter (variation display time measuring means) provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After executing the variation display time setting process in step S714, the process proceeds to step S715 to set the variation start command and the type command. The fluctuation start command includes information on whether or not reach has occurred and information on the fluctuation display time. In addition, the type command includes information on the game result. That is, the type command includes information on the 6R probability variation jackpot result, information on the 6R normal jackpot result, information on the special deviation result A, information on the special deviation result B, and the like as information on the game result. In step S713, the presence or absence of reaching the ceiling is specified by referring to the value of the game count counter, and this information is also included in the fluctuation start command.

The fluctuation start command and the type command set in step S715 are transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the light emission pattern of the lamp unit 26 and the output pattern of the sound (BGM and sound effect) from the speaker unit 29 in the game round based on the received fluctuation start command and type command. The lamp unit 26 and the speaker unit 29 are controlled so that the determined content of the effect is executed. Further, the notification / effect control device 140 determines the details of the game effect such as the pattern variation display pattern on the symbol display device 95 in the game times based on the received fluctuation start command and type command, and determines them. Information is added to the fluctuation start command and the type command and transmitted to the display control device 410. The display control device 410 displays the symbol display device 95 so that the game effect (display effect) is executed in the mode determined by the notification / effect control device 140 based on the received fluctuation start command and type command. Control.

After that, in step S716, the variation display of the pattern is started on one of the display unit D1 for the first operating port and the display unit D2 for the second operating port of the main display unit 99, and then the variation start processing is performed. finish. It is also possible to configure the variable display of the pattern or the like to start before the lottery is executed.

(Variable display time setting process)
Next, an outline of the variation display time setting process (step S714) will be described with reference to FIGS. 27 to 29. As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold information is acquired based on the entry of the ball into the first operation port 91 and the second operation port 92, and the pattern in the game round is based on the acquired hold information. The configuration is such that the variable display to the final display of the symbol are executed. Here, regarding the variable display time of the pattern or the symbol, as a result of this winning / failing lottery based on the current game state and the entry into the operating ports D1 and D2, the holding information stored in the operating port holding area RE It is set according to the number and so on. Regarding the variable display time, when comparing the jackpot result and the missed result, the former is more likely to be longer than the latter, and in the case of the missed result and the reach display does not occur. Is configured to become shorter as the number of stored information on hold increases.

In the variable display time setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the lottery in step S702 described above has resulted in a big hit or a special loss. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 6R probability variation jackpot flag, the 6R normal jackpot flag, the special outlier A flag, and the special outlier B flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

(Fluctuating display time table for normal deviation)
When the lottery result is a normal deviation (complete deviation) that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling (not reached), it is determined whether or not to generate the reach display on the symbol display device 95 in this game round. Specifically, whether to generate the reach display by referring to the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE and the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 403. Decide whether or not. Then, the variation display time table corresponding to the complete deviation from the various variation display time tables stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 is referred to, and the current game state and the operation port hold area RE are stored. Set the variable display time according to the number of pending information and the presence or absence of reach.

FIG. 27 (a1) illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7,8,9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 27 (a2) illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7,8,9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec". That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the first normal gaming state.

FIG. 27 (a3) illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 27 (a4) illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal gaming state. In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

By the way, in any of the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in the game times in which the reach display (out-of-reach) corresponding to the out-of-order result occurs, the variable display time is irrespective of the number of stored information. Is set to any of "20 to 30 sec". This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (see FIG. 28), and in the case of the jackpot result, a relatively long time in the range. If it is easy to set and the result is off, it is easy to set a relatively short time in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach display having a short variable display time.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment, when the game progresses without becoming a big hit and the number of games played in the normal game state reaches a preset upper limit (hereinafter, also referred to as a ceiling). The support mode may be forcibly switched to the high-frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. In the game times that reach the ceiling, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set as in the case of a big hit, a game time that is a special loss, and the like.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to set a variable display time that does not correspond to the reach display in the game times when the game reaches the ceiling. For example, the setting mode of the variable display time may be unified between the game times in which the ceiling is reached and the game times in which the ceiling is not reached regardless of whether or not the ceiling is reached.

Incidentally, the "complete deviation" shown in the following explanation is a general term for game results that do not correspond to any of a jackpot, a special deviation, and a normal deviation that does not correspond to reaching the ceiling.

(Variable display time table for jackpots)
When the lottery result is a big hit (6R probability variable big hit or 6R normal big hit), refer to the variable display time table corresponding to the big hit from various variable display time tables stored in the variable display time table storage area 423 of ROM 403. , The variable display time is set regardless of the current game state and the number of hold information stored in the hold area RE for the operation port.

FIG. 28 illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. Regardless of the number of stored information on hold being "0" to "8", "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case where the above-mentioned deviation reach occurs, and it is easy to set a relatively long time in the range as compared with a relatively short time. In the first normal game state, the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are "1 sec". Therefore, in the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are "0.5 sec".

(Variable display time table for special deviation)
If the lottery result is a special deviation (special deviation A or special deviation B), the variation display time table corresponding to the special deviation is selected from the various variation display time tables stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403. Refer to it to set the variable display time.

FIG. 29 (c1) shows the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Regardless of the number of stored information on hold being "0" to "8", any of "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case where the above-mentioned deviation reach occurs, and it is easy to set a relatively long time in the range as compared with a relatively short time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 29 (c2) shows the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. Regardless of the number of stored information on hold being "0" to "8", any of "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as that in the case where the above-mentioned deviation reach occurs, and it is easy to set a relatively long time in the range as compared with a relatively short time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 29 (c3) shows the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Regardless of the number of stored information on hold being "0" to "8", any of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as the above-mentioned case of complete deviation, and it is difficult to distinguish the special deviation from the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 29 (c4) shows the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. Regardless of the number of stored information on hold being "0" to "8", any of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. The range of this variable display time is the same as the above-mentioned case of complete deviation, and it is difficult to distinguish the special deviation from the variable display time. In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 shown in the present embodiment, when the game progresses without becoming a big hit and the number of games in the normal game state reaches a preset upper limit (ceiling), the ceiling is concerned. Upon arrival, the support mode may be forcibly switched to the high-frequency support mode A. Although reaching the ceiling does not occur during the high-frequency support mode B, it occurs in the first normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the low-frequency support mode and the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode A. Can be done. In the game times in which the ceiling is reached in the first normal game state and the fourth normal game state, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) similar to the reach display or the like is set as the variable display time. That is, the reach display is executed in the game times when the player reaches the ceiling.

Returning to the description of the game times control process (FIG. 24), if the operating port display units D1 and D2 are in the variable display or the final display in the main display unit 99, the process proceeds to step S507. In step S507, it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value (variation display time information) of the fluctuation display time counter of the RAM 404 is "0". The value is decremented (subtracted) by 1 each time the timer interrupt process (FIG. 20) is activated.

If the variation display time has not elapsed, the variation display process is executed in step S508. In the variable display process, the display mode of one of the operating port display units D1 and D2 is changed. After that, the game times control process is terminated. If the variable display time has elapsed, the final display process is executed in step S509, and then the game turn control process is terminated. Details of this confirmation display process will be described later.

(Game state transition process)
Next, the game state transition process in step S404 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the game state transition process, first, in step S801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode (during the special game state) is in progress. If it is not in the open / close execution mode, the process proceeds to step S802, and it is determined whether or not it is the timing when one game round is completed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a preset fixed display time (stop display time) has elapsed since the variable display is completed on any of the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit D. judge. If it is not the timing when the game round is finished, the main game state transition process is finished as it is.

If it is the timing when the game round is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S802 and the process proceeds to step S803. In step S803, it is determined whether or not the game result of the current game times (the result of the above-mentioned winning / failing lottery) corresponds to the transition to the open / close execution mode (special game state). Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 6R probability variation jackpot flag and the 6R normal jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If none of the above flags is stored, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

When any of the above flags is stored, the start processing of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S804. By the start processing, the operation restriction of the variable winning device 83 by the lock device is released, and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning device 83 is allowed until the opening / closing execution mode ends. Further, in the start processing of step S804, the open / close execution mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the waiting time for the opening in the open / close execution mode is set. In step S801, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress depending on the presence / absence of the opening / closing execution mode flag.

In the following step S805, "6" is set in the round counter RC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The round counter RC1 functions as a means for grasping the number of times the variable winning device 83 is opened. After executing the process of step S805, the process proceeds to step S806, and the high-frequency support mode flags A and B stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased. As a result, the support mode in the open / close execution mode is forcibly switched to the low frequency support mode. After that, the opening command setting process is executed in step S807, the external signal setting process is executed in step S808, and then the game state transition process is terminated.

The opening command set in step S807 is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. The content of this effect includes a display mode in the symbol display device 95, and the determined display mode is output from the notification / effect control device 140 to the display control device 410 as a display content command. In the display control device 410, based on the opening command received from the main control device 162 and the display content command received from the notification / effect control device 140, the display corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode of this time, for example, the display content corresponding to the jackpot The display control of the symbol display device 95 is executed so that the moving image of the character or the like and the background image can be switched.

Further, the external signal set in step S808 is also transmitted to the hall computer of the game hall in step S401 in the normal processing (FIG. 23), and the hall computer is in the opening / closing execution mode based on this external signal. It becomes possible to identify that.

Returning to the description of step S801, if it is determined in step S801 that the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S809. In step S809, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the large winning opening opening / closing process is executed in step S810. Here, the large winning opening opening / closing process will be described with reference to FIG. 31.

(Opening and closing of the winning opening)
In the large winning opening opening / closing process, first, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the drive unit for the variable ball entry device of the variable winning device 83. If the big winning opening is not open, it is determined in step S902 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S902, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S902, the process proceeds to step S903. In step S903, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is “0”. The timer counter TC1 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time or interval time of the winning opening, and its value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. .. If a negative determination is made in step S903, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is terminated.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S904 to execute the opening process of the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening). Specifically, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is set to the drive state in order to open the large winning opening.

After that, the processes of steps S905 and S906 are executed as the closing condition setting process (opening setting process) corresponding to the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening). Specifically, in step S905, the timer counter TC1 is set to "15000" (corresponding to 30 sec), and in the following step S906, the first winning counter PC1 is set to "10".

After executing the process of step S906, an open command indicating that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) has been opened is set in step S907 to end the opening / closing process of the large winning opening. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (see FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the release based on the received release command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S901, if it is determined in step S901 that the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening) is open, the process proceeds to step S908, and whether or not the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0" is determined. judge. If the value of the timer counter TC1 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S909, and it is determined based on the detection signal from the detection sensor provided in the variable winning device 83 whether or not the game ball has won the big winning opening. do.

If a prize has been won, the output process of the prize command is executed in step S910. The winning command is output to the notification / effect control device 140, and the effect in the open / close execution mode executed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95, for example, is changed by the winning command.

After executing the command output process in step S910, the process proceeds to step S911. In step S911, the value of the first winning counter PC1 is subtracted by 1, and in the following step S912, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0". The opening / closing process is completed.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S912, that is, when the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0", or when an affirmative judgment is made in step S908 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC1 is "0"). If it is determined), it means that the condition for closing the large winning opening is satisfied. In this case, in step S913, the drive unit for the variable ball entry device is put into a non-drive state in order to close the variable winning device 83 (large winning opening).

In the following step S914, the round counter RC1 is updated. Specifically, when the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the value of the round counter RC1 is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the value of the round counter RC1 is set to "0". Keep it as it is.

After that, in step S915, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round counter RC1 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S915, the process proceeds to step S916, and "1000" (corresponding to 2.0 sec) is set in the timer counter TC1.

After executing the process of step S916, the closing command is set in step S917, and the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. This set closing command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the closing command based on the received closing command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

Returning to the description of step S915, if it is determined in step S915 that the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S918. In step S918, the ending process is executed. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After that, in step S919, after setting the ending command, the opening / closing process of the main winning opening is completed. The set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 in the normal process (FIG. 23).

Returning to the description of the game state transition process (FIG. 30), after executing the large winning opening opening / closing process in step S810, the process proceeds to step S811 to determine whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is “0”. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0", the game state transition process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S812. In step S812, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the game state transition process is terminated as it is.

If the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode is executed in step S813, and then the game state transition process is terminated. Hereinafter, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, first, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the current open / close execution mode is triggered by the 6R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1001, the process proceeds to step S1002, and the high-probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds.

After that, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, the D-support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric service support processing, and the through-gate display unit DS The variable display time table for the high frequency support mode B is referred to as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the pattern in.

Returning to the explanation of step S1001, when the jackpot that triggered the opening / closing execution mode this time is a 6R normal jackpot, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 (step S1004), and various types of the RAM 404 are set. “40” is set in the continuation number counter provided in the counter area 434. After that, the process proceeds to step S1003, and the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

The value of the continuation number counter is subtracted by "1" each time the game is executed, and when the value of the continuation counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode B ends. That is, the upper limit (the above-mentioned end reference number of times), which is the number of games that can be executed during the high frequency support mode B, is defined by the value of the continuation number counter.

After executing the process of step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1006, and the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is cleared (reset) to 0. After that, in step S1007, various flags (big hit flag, etc.) for the open / close execution mode stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is stopped.

Next, the through-gate control process in step S405 in the normal process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 and 34.

(Control processing for through gate)
In the through gate control process, first, in step S1101, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 93 is supporting. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. The support flag is a flag that is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 at the start of support by the electric accessory 93 and is deleted from the various flag storage areas 435 at the end of support.

If the support flag is stored, the control process for this through gate is terminated as it is. If the support flag is not stored, a negative determination is made in step S1101 and the process proceeds to step S1102. In step S1102, it is determined whether or not the variable display or the definite display of the pattern is being performed on the through-gate display unit DS in the main display unit D. If a negative determination is made in step S1102, the process proceeds to step S1103.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of times the game ball has passed through the through gate 84 is held up to 4 times, that is, the hold information (electric service hold) based on the winning of the through gate 84 is the maximum. Up to four are stored in the electric service holding area 433. In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the number of stored items SN on hold is "0". If the number of stored items SN is "0", an affirmative determination is made in step S1103 to end the control process for the through gate. If the character hold storage number SN is not "0", a negative determination is made in step S1103, and the process proceeds to step S1104. In step S1104, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the electric service holding area 433 for variable display is executed.

In this data setting process, the number of stored items SN on hold is subtracted by 1. Then, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved information stored in the electric service holding area 433 is "0". If the number of stored items SN is "0", the data setting process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the character hold storage number SN is not "0", the data (hold information) stored in the first area of the electric service hold area 433 is moved to the execution area. Then, the data (holding information) stored in the second to fourth areas of the electric service holding area 433 is sequentially shifted to the lower area side. As a result, for example, as the data in the first area is moved to the execution area, the data in each area is such that the second area → the first area, the third area → the second area, the fourth area → the third area, and so on. Is shifted.

After executing the data setting process in step S1104, the pattern variation start process in the through gate display unit DS is executed in step S1105, and then the through gate control process is terminated. Here, the fluctuation start processing in step S1105 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 34.

(Fluctuation start processing)
In the fluctuation start process, first, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If the current support mode is either the low-frequency support mode or the high-frequency support mode A, a negative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1202. In step S1202, the support lottery process (low probability support lottery process) is executed with reference to the support lottery tables (see FIGS. 18A and 18B) corresponding to the low frequency support mode and the high frequency support mode A. If the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B, an affirmative determination is made in step S1201 and the process proceeds to step S1203. In step S1203, the support lottery process (high probability support lottery process) is executed with reference to the support lottery table (see FIG. 18C) corresponding to the high frequency support mode B.

If a support is won in the support lottery process of steps S1202 and S1203, an affirmative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1205, and a stop result setting process for support winning is executed. If no support is won in the support lottery process of steps S1202 and S1203, a negative determination is made in step S1204, the process proceeds to step S1206, and a stop result setting process for non-winning support is executed.

After executing the stop result setting process of steps S1205 and S1206, the process proceeds to step S1207 to set the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS.
The variable display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403 stores a variable display time table for the low frequency support mode and a variable display time table for the high frequency support mode, respectively. When the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the variable display time of the pattern is set by referring to the variable display time table for the low frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the variable display time set with reference to the variable display time table for the low frequency support mode is defined to be "10 to 20 sec" (see FIG. 35). On the other hand, when the current support modes are the high-frequency support modes A and B, the variable display time of the pattern is set with reference to the variable display time table for the high-frequency support mode. In the present embodiment, the variable display time set with reference to the variable display time table for the high frequency support mode is defined to be "0.5 sec" (see FIG. 35). That is, in the high-frequency support modes A and B, the variation display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is significantly shortened as compared with the low-frequency support mode.

In any of the support modes, the final display time of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is unified to "0.5 sec".

After executing the setting process of step S1207, the variation display of the pattern on the through-gate display unit DS is started in step S1208, and the through-gate control process is completed.

(Processing for electrical support)
Next, the electric service support process of step S406, which is executed as a part of the normal process, will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 36 and 37.

In the electric service support process, first, in step S1301, it is determined whether or not the electric service is being supported by the electric accessory 93. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the support flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If it is not being supported, a negative determination is made in step S1301 and the process proceeds to step S1302. In step S1302, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed on the through gate display unit DS. If it is not the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed, the process for supporting the main electric service is terminated by denying it in step S1302. If it is the timing when the final display of the pattern is completed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1302, and the process proceeds to step S1303.

In step S1303, it is determined whether or not the support has been won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84. If the support is not won, a negative determination is made in step S1303, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the support is won in the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84, an affirmative determination is made in step S1303 and the process proceeds to step S1304. In step S1304, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B. If there is a low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1305, and "1" is set in the round counter RC2 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The round counter RC2 functions as a means for grasping the number of times the electric accessory 93 is opened. If the high frequency support modes A and B are set, the process proceeds to step S1306, and "2" is set in the round counter RC2.

After executing the processes of steps S1305 and S1306, the process proceeds to step S1307, and the support flags are set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the opening start process is executed in step S1308, and then the main electric service support process is terminated. In the opening start process, the waiting time for the opening is set. After this standby time has elapsed, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 93 is started.

Returning to the description of step S1301, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the opening set in step S1308 has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, a negative determination is made in step S1309, and the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, an affirmative determination is made in step S1309 and the process proceeds to step S1310. Here, with reference to FIG. 37, the electric service opening / closing process in step S1310 will be described.

(Electric service opening / closing process)
In the electric function opening / closing process, first, in step S1401, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 93 is open (open state). Whether or not the electric accessory 93 is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory drive unit is in the driving state. If the electric accessory 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1402, and it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. When the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1403. In step S1403, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is “0”. The timer counter TC2 is a counter that is referred to when grasping the opening time and the interval time of the electric accessory 93, and the value is decremented by "1" each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) is executed. NS. If a negative determination is made in step S1403, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1403, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the electric service release process is executed. Specifically, the output of the drive signal to the electric accessory drive unit (solenoid) is started, and the electric accessory 93 is switched from the closed state to the open state. After that, in step S1405, "10" is set in the second winning counter PC2. In the following step S1406, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B. Set the timer counter TC2 to "1000" (corresponding to 2 sec) in the high frequency support modes A and B (step S1407), and set the timer counter TC2 to "50" (0) in the low frequency support mode. .Equivalent to 1 sec) is set.

Returning to the description of step S1401, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1401, that is, if the electric accessory 93 is open, the process proceeds to step S1409. In step S1409, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0". If the value of the timer counter TC2 is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1410. In step S1410, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won a prize in the second operating port 92 based on the detection signal from the detection sensor for the second operating port 92. If no prize has been won, the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is. If a prize has been generated, the value of the second prize counter PC2 is subtracted by 1 in step S1411, and in the subsequent step S1412, it is determined whether or not the value of the second prize counter PC2 is "0". If it is not "0", the main electric function opening / closing process is terminated as it is.

When an affirmative judgment is made in step S1412, that is, when the value of the second winning counter PC2 is "0", or when an affirmative judgment is made in step S1409 (that is, the value of the timer counter TC2 is "0"). If it is determined), it means that the opening end condition of the electric accessory 93 is satisfied. In this case, in step S1413, the output of the drive signal to the drive unit for the electric accessory is stopped in order to close the electric accessory 93 (second operating port 92).

In the following step S1414, the round counter RC2 is updated. Specifically, when the value of the round counter RC2 is not "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is subtracted by 1, and when the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the value of the round counter RC2 is set to "0". Keep it as it is.

After that, in step S1415, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1415, the process proceeds to step S1416, and "100" (corresponding to 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter TC2.
If it is determined in step S1415 that the value of the round counter RC2 is "0", the process proceeds to step S1417. In step S1417, the ending process is executed. In the start process, the waiting time for the ending of the electric service support is set. Specifically, the waiting time information for the ending stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the waiting time counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

Returning to the description of FIG. 36, after executing the electric service opening / closing process in step S1310, the process proceeds to step S1311. In step S1311, it is determined whether or not the value of the round counter RC2 is “0”. If a negative determination is made in step S1311, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1311, the process proceeds to step S1312, and it is determined whether or not the ending waiting time set in step S1417 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1312, the main electric service support process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1312, the process proceeds to step S1313. In step S1313, the support flags stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the main electric service support process is terminated. As a result, the regulation of the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 will be lifted.

As described in detail above, the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is configured to switch from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode mainly via the special gaming state, but when the above special deviation occurs or the ceiling is reached. In the case of, the low frequency support mode may be switched to the high frequency support mode without going through the special game state. Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 and 39, a configuration for switching the support mode, specifically, a final display process (step S509) of the game turn control process (FIG. 24) executed as a part of the normal process. ) Will be supplementarily explained.

(Processing for confirmation display)
As shown in FIG. 38, in the confirmation display processing, first, in step S1501, it is determined whether or not the confirmation display is being performed by the operation port display units D1 and D2. If a negative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1502. In step S1502, the confirmation display time setting process is executed. In the present embodiment, "1 sec" is set as the fixed display time in the first normal game state, the third normal game state, and the fourth normal game state, and "0" is set as the fixed display time in the second normal game state. Set ".5 sec".

In the following step S1503, the confirmation display start process is executed. In the start process, the display control of the operation port display units D1 and D2 is performed in order to stop the pattern determined in each process of steps S706, S707, S711 to S713. After that, the variable end command is set in step S1504 to end the final confirmation display process. The variation end command is output to the notification / effect control device 140 or the like in step S401 of the normal process, and the notification / effect control device 140 is being executed by the symbol display device 95 or the like based on the reception of the variation end command. End the variable display of the symbol of (shift to the final display).

Returning to the description of step S1501, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1501, the process proceeds to step S1505. In step S1505, it is determined whether or not it is the timing when the final display time of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 has elapsed. If a negative determination is made in step S1505, the final confirmation display process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1505, the support mode switching process is executed in step S1506 to end the final confirmation display process. Here, the process for switching the support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 39.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S1601, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1602. In step S1602, it is determined whether or not the number-of-times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S1602, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1602, the process proceeds to step S1603. In step S1603, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1604, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1604, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1604, the process proceeds to step S1605, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are deleted. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S1601, if a negative determination is made in step S1601, the process proceeds to step S1606. In step S1606, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1606, the process proceeds to step S1607. In step S1607, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S1607, the process proceeds to step S1608. In step S1608, the continuation number counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S1609, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1609, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared in step S1605, and the switching process ends. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S1606, if a negative determination is made in step S1606, that is, if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S1610. In step S1610, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S1610, the process proceeds to step S1611. In step S1611, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If it does not correspond to the special deviation, a negative determination is made in step S1611, and the main switching process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1611 (when the special deviation is supported) or when an affirmative determination is made in step S1610 (when the ceiling is reached), the process proceeds to step S1612. In step S1612, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the following step S1613, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S1614, the continuation count counter setting process is executed, and then the switching process is terminated.

In the continuation count counter setting process, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) in the current game round, "400" is set in the continuation counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is continued until it becomes a big hit during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 400 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation A, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until it becomes a big hit during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 20 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation B, "40" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is continued until it becomes a big hit during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 40 times.

Returning to the explanation of step S1607, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit during the high frequency support mode A (when the ceiling is reached), "400" is set (overwritten) in the continuation counter in step S1614. ), And the process for switching is completed. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is extended so that the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A becomes 400. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special deviation, the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode A is continued is reset (overwritten), and other normal game states, etc. are changed. The upper limit of the fourth normal game state will be raised without going through.

(About the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410)
Next, with reference to the block diagram of FIG. 40, the electrical configuration of the notification / effect control device 140 and the display control device 410 will be supplementarily described.

The MPU 442 is mounted on the notification / effect control board 441 provided in the notification / effect control device 140. The MPU 442 is a ROM 443 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 442, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 443 is executed. A certain RAM 444 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit are built in. It is not essential that the ROM 443 and the RAM 444 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 442, and each may be individually chipped. This also applies to the MPU of other control devices.

The MPU 442 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. A main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 442, and receives game times control commands (game times control information) such as the above-mentioned fluctuation start command, type command, and fluctuation end command from the main control device 162. .. In addition, it receives hold display control commands (hold display control information) such as shift commands and hold commands, and open / close execution mode commands (open / close execution mode information) such as opening commands and ending commands.

Lamp units 26 to 28, speaker units 29, and display control device 410 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected to the output side of the MPU 442. Some of the various commands input from the main control device 162 to the notification / effect control device 140 are transmitted (transferred) to the display control device 410 while maintaining the information form.

The display control device 410 is a display control board 471 on which an MPU 472, which is an element in which a program ROM 473 and a work RAM 474 are combined into chips, a video display processor (VDP) 475, a character ROM 476, and a video RAM 477, respectively, are mounted. It has. It is not essential that the program ROM 473 and the work RAM 474 are integrated into one chip with respect to the MPU 472, and each may be individually chipped.

The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 analyzes various commands received from the main control device 162 via the notification / effect control device 140, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received commands to control the VDP 475 (specifically). Is to generate an internal command for VDP475). More specifically, in the MPU 472, the process of specifying the variation display pattern of each game time in the symbol display device 95 is executed based on the command transmitted from the notification / effect control device 140, and the process related to the hold notice and the like is performed. It is executed, and the drawing process for VDP475 is executed according to the processing result. As a result, various images are displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95.

The program ROM 473 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 472 and fixed value data, and also stores and holds JPEG format image data for a background image. The work RAM 474 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when executing various programs by the MPU 472. These work data, flags, and the like are stored in each area of the work RAM 474.

The VDP475 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 95. Since the VDP475 is an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and its substance can be said to be a microcomputer chip with a built-in firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 475 adjusts the timings of the MPU 472, the video RAM 477, and the like to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the image data stored in the video RAM 477 from the character ROM 476 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 95.

The character ROM 476 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as a symbol displayed on the symbol display device 95. The character ROM 476 holds bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table to be referred to when determining the expression color of each dot of the bitmap image, and the like.

It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 476 and store image data and the like in each character ROM 476. Further, it is also possible to have a configuration in which the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 473 is stored in the character ROM 476.

The video RAM 477 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 95, and the display content of the symbol display device 95 is changed by rewriting the content of the video RAM 477.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the outline of the variation display mode of the symbol on the display screen 95a is specified by the notification / effect control device 140 with reference to the command from the main control device 162, and based on the specific result. The details of the variable display mode are determined by the display control device 410. Specifically, in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, the variation display control process is executed as a part of the periodic process started in a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec), and the variation display of the symbol is displayed by this variation display control process. The outline of the aspect and the like are specified. Here, the variation display control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 41.

(Variable display control processing)
In the variation display control process, when the gaming state is the first normal gaming state, an affirmative determination is made in step S1701, and the first variation display control process for the first normal gaming state is executed in step S1702. When the gaming state is the second normal gaming state, a negative determination is made in step S1701 and an affirmative determination is made in step S1703, and the second variation display control process for the second normal gaming state is executed in step S1704. When the gaming state is the third normal gaming state, a negative determination is made in steps S1701 and S1703, and the third variation display control process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S1705. When the gaming state is the fourth normal gaming state, a negative determination is made in steps S1701 and S1703 and an affirmative determination is made in step S1707, and a fourth variation display for the fourth normal gaming state is made in step S1708. Execute control processing.

(1st variable display control process)
Here, the first variation display control process executed in the first normal gaming state will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 42.

In the first variation display control process, first, whether or not one game is being executed in step S1801, that is, whether or not the symbol display device 95 is executing the variation display or the final display of the symbol for one game. Is determined. If it is determined that the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S1802, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received.

If a negative determination is made in step S1802, the variation display control process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1802, the variation display control process ends after executing the first variation start process described later in step S1803.

Returning to the description of step S1801, if an affirmative determination is made in step S1801, that is, if it is determined that the game is in progress, the process proceeds to step S1804. In step S1804, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control device 162 is received. If a negative determination is made in step S1804, the variable display control process is terminated after the variable intermediate processing is executed in step S1805. The variable middle processing is a process for executing various effects and changing the determined effects in the game times started by the variable start process.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1806 to execute the variation end process, and then the variation display control process ends. In the variation end processing, the variation display of the symbol and the effect being executed are terminated (fixed and stopped) so as to correspond to the hold information related to the game times. In such a process, the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 are driven and controlled to produce an effect corresponding to the fixed stop. Then, after outputting the confirmation command to the display control device 410, the process for ending the fluctuation is terminated. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the symbol display device 95 to confirm and stop the symbol based on the received confirmation command.

(Process for starting the first fluctuation)
Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43, the first variation start process in step S1803 will be supplementarily described. The first variation start process is a process for starting the effect for game rounds based on the reception of the variation start command from the main control device 162. In the first variation start process, the reach display and the like are set as the effect for the game round.

In the first fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S1901 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S1601, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and from the command, the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, the special deviation result information, the normal deviation result information, and reaching the ceiling. Identify various information related to the game result, such as the information of. Then, in step S1901, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot winning, information on the presence or absence of a special deviation, and information on the type of special deviation in the case of a special deviation. Information, information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped when the jackpot is not won and the special is not out of order, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

In the following step S1902, based on the information grasped in step S1901, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. If the game result this time is a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), the effect setting process for jackpot is executed in the following step S1903. The jackpot effect setting process includes a stop result determination process for determining the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode determination for determining the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol. It is roughly divided into processing (effect pattern determination processing).

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol , "3" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" Symbol, "6" symbol combination, "7" symbol, "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination, "8" symbol, "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination, "9" symbol, "9" symbol The combination of the symbol and the symbol "9" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot (see, for example, FIG. 45 (a)).

As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for the jackpot, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the above is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1904. In step S1904, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in this game round. When reaching the ceiling, an affirmative determination is made in step S1904, and the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for reaching the ceiling to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for reaching the ceiling. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for reaching the ceiling, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols for reaching the ceiling is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)).

When it reaches the ceiling, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a big hit is made in a game that reaches the ceiling, the big hit is given priority. That is, the symbol combination and the variable display mode that are stopped and displayed in the game round are set by the setting process in step S1903.

If a negative determination is made in step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1906. In step S1906, it is determined whether or not the current game round corresponds to the special deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907. In step S1907, the effect setting process for special deviation is executed. The effect setting process for special deviation includes the stop result determination process for determining the special deviation symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the special deviation symbol. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for special deviation, the stop result in which the combination of symbols corresponding to special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation as in the case of reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)). ).

In the case of a special deviation, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for special deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1908 to execute the effect setting process for complete disengagement. In the effect setting process for complete deviation, it is grasped whether or not reach will occur in this game round. When reach occurs, the effect setting process for generating reach is executed, and when reach does not occur, the effect setting process for non-reach is executed.

The effect setting process for generating reach includes a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination for reach-compatible complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode of the symbol for reach-compatible complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining.

In the stop result determination process for reach-corresponding complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for reach correspondence complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

The effect setting process for non-reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for non-reach complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the symbol for non-reach complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variation display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining a variation display mode.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so that it does not become any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. .. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for non-reach complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for non-reach non-correspondence storage stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time is acquired. And the effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908, the process proceeds to step S1909. In step S1909, a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 in order to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S1909, in the following step S1910, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 to start the effect for game rotation.

Here, the display mode of the symbol displayed on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 will be supplementarily described based on the schematic diagram of FIG. 44.

(Display mode)
The variable display mode of the symbol executed in the variable display area ME of the display screen 95a is roughly classified into five types: non-reach compatible, normal reach A, normal reach B, super reach A, super reach B, and super reach C. .. These variable display modes are set so that the variable display time is different, and it is possible to grasp the outline of the variable display mode for each game based on the information related to the variable display time given to the command from the main control device 162. It has become.

Specifically, the variable display time that is not compatible with reach is "1 sec to 14 sec" (the difference is set according to the game state, the number of holds, etc.), and the variable display time of normal reach A is "20 sec". The fluctuation display time of normal reach B is "25 sec", which is longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A, and the fluctuation display time of super reach A to C is "30 sec", which is longer than the fluctuation display time of normal reach A and B. .. For example, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "20 sec", it is understood that the normal reach A should be executed by the notification / effect control device 140, and the main control device When the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from 162 is "25 sec", it is understood that the normal reach B should be executed by the notification / effect control device 140. On the other hand, when the information regarding the fluctuation display time given to the command from the main control device 162 is "30 sec", the determination as to which of Super Reach A to C is executed is notification / effect control. It will be entrusted to the device 140.

In this decision, it is easier to select Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A in the game times corresponding to the jackpot, and Super Reach A> Super in the game times corresponding to the complete deviation. The structure is such that it is easy to select in the order of reach B> super reach C. In other words, in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result, it is easier to select in the order of Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. ＞ Normal Reach A ＞ Normal Reach B ＞ Super Reach A ＞ Super Reach B ＞ Super Reach C. That is, the jackpot winning expectation is set to increase as the variable display time becomes longer, and the expectation is set to increase in the order of Super Reach A <Super Reach B <Super Reach C. ing.

In addition, it is easier to select the game times corresponding to special deviations in the order of Super Reach C> Super Reach B> Super Reach A> Normal Reach B> Normal Reach A. The selection rate is evenly divided so that reach C = super reach B = super reach A.

Here, the variation display mode of the normal reach A and B will be described with reference to FIG. 44 (a). When normal reach A and B are selected, first, the variable display (scroll display) of all the stopped and displayed symbol rows is started, and then the variable display of the symbols in the upper symbol row (upper symbol row Z1) is started. Is finished (stop display), and the variation display of the symbol is finished (stop display) in the lower symbol row (lower symbol row Z3). In this way, in the state where the upper and lower symbol rows Z1 and Z3 are stopped and displayed, the main symbols with the same numbers attached to any of the effective lines L1 to L5 (see FIG. 13A) are stopped and displayed. A reach line is formed at. Then, in the situation where the reach line is formed, the variation display of the middle symbol sequence (middle symbol sequence Z2) is performed, so that the reach display (reach variation display) is obtained. After the reach display is displayed, the variable display ends by stopping and displaying the middle symbol column Z2. Then, when the same symbol as the symbol constituting the reach display stops on the reach line, it is notified that the jackpot has been won, and when the other symbols stop on the reach line, the jackpot is won. You will be notified that you have not done so. In this way, the combination of the symbols displayed as the final stop is maintained as it is for a predetermined period. That is, the current game round continues until the stop display period elapses, and the transition to the next game round is allowed after the stop display period elapses.

In the present embodiment, the difference in the variable display time between the normal reach A and the normal reach B is secured by setting the difference in the variable display time of the middle symbol row Z2 after the reach line is formed. How to set the difference between is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to secure the difference in the fluctuation display time by setting the difference in the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the formation of the reach line.

Next, the variable display modes of the super reach A, B, and C will be described based on the variable display modes of the normal reach A and B described above. As shown in FIGS. 44 (b) to 44 (c), the super reach A, B, and C form the above-mentioned reach line through the same process as the normal reach A and B. Then, after forming the reach line, the reach effect is performed by displaying a predetermined character as a moving image in addition to the variable display of the middle symbol row Z2. Specifically, in Super Reach A, after the reach line is formed, a character imitating a fairy is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2, and in Super Reach B. After the reach line is formed, a character imitating a boy is displayed in the center of the variable display area of the middle symbol row Z2 (the center of the variable display area ME), and in Super Reach C, after the reach line is formed, A character imitating a girl is displayed in the center of the variable display area (center of the variable display area ME) of the middle symbol sequence Z2.

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A when the special deviation or the arrival at the ceiling is triggered will be described. FIG. 46 is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game in the case of shifting to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation.

At the timing of ta1 during the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the variation display of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port and the variation display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are based on the winning of the operating port. Has been started. Since this game round corresponds to a special deviation, the variation display mode of the symbol shifts to the reach display at the timing of ta2 when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the variation display of the symbol and the symbol. After that, at the timing of ta3, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) prior to the confirmed display of the symbol on the operation port display unit. Immediately after, at the timing of ta4, the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 goes dark, and at the timing of ta5, the symbol corresponding to the special deviation is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the operation port, and high frequency support is provided on the display screen 95a. A message indicating the transition to mode A (for example, the characters "entering the chance zone") is displayed.

At the timing of ta6 when the fixed display time has elapsed from the timing of ta5, the support mode is switched to the high frequency support mode A, and the background of the display screen 95a is switched to the background corresponding to the high frequency support mode A at the same time. Further, in the corner of the display screen 95a, the number of remaining games for which the high frequency support mode A is continued is displayed.

As described above, the notification is overlooked by displaying the design combination corresponding to the special deviation prior to the final display of the design on the operation port display unit and gaining the notification time indicating the transition to the high frequency support mode A. It is suppressed.

The flow of the game when the transition to the high-frequency support mode A reaches the ceiling is basically the same as the flow of the game when the transition is triggered by the special deviation. However, unlike the case of the special deviation, the display of the remaining number of games on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is omitted during the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which is shifted when the ceiling is reached.

(Outline of the game)
Next, the outline of the game of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. 47 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each game state, and FIG. 48 is a timing chart illustrating changes in the holding ball as the game progresses.

As described above, the first normal gaming state in which the lottery mode is the low probability mode and the support mode is the low frequency support mode is the most disadvantageous gaming state for the player, and in the first normal gaming state, the first It is intended to generate a prize in the operating port 91 and to shift to another gaming state such as a special gaming state. As described above, the game board 80a shown in the present embodiment has a so-called symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), and the first operation is performed regardless of the direction in which the game ball is fired on the right route or the left route. A prize may occur in the mouth 91. Further, through gates 84 are arranged on the right route and the left route, respectively, and a part of the game balls launched aiming at the first operating port 91 can win a prize in the through gate 84. However, the opening time of the electric accessory 93 when the support is won by the support lottery based on the winning of the through gate 84 during the low frequency support mode is extremely short, and the second operating port 92 is won. Is virtually impossible. That is, during the first normal game state, the benefit of the electric accessory 93 cannot be received, and the number of balls held increases as the game progresses (see FIG. 48).

As shown in FIG. 47, when a 6R probability variation jackpot is obtained in the first normal game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state.

In the second normal gaming state, the electric accessory 93 is opened at a high frequency, and the opening time is defined so that the winning of the second operating port 92 is substantially allowed. Therefore, in addition to the winning of the first operating port 91, the winning of the second operating port 92 occurs, and a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the second operating port 92. The prize ball will be given to the player. As a result, during the second normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held due to the progress of the game is alleviated as compared with the first normal game state, and the game can be advanced while suppressing investment (decrease in the number of balls held). Further, since the second normal game state is continued until the next big hit, the number of balls held can be greatly increased by continuously shifting to the special game state. If a 6R probability variation jackpot is achieved in the second normal game state, the game returns to the second normal game state through the special game state. By looping the second normal game state and the special game state in this way, the number of balls held is significantly increased (see FIG. 48).

When a 6R normal jackpot is achieved in the first normal game state or the second normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state.

In the third normal gaming state, the electric accessory 93 is opened at a high frequency, and the opening time is defined to be a length substantially allowed to win a prize in the second operating port 92. Therefore, in addition to the winning of the first operating port 91, the winning of the second operating port 92 occurs, and a predetermined number (four in the present embodiment) based on the winning of the second operating port 92. The prize ball will be given to the player. As a result, during the third normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held is alleviated as in the second normal game state, and the game can be advanced while suppressing investment (decrease in the number of balls held). However, the end reference number of times (upper limit: 40 times) is set for the high frequency support mode B in the third normal game state. When the number of games executed during the third normal game state reaches the upper limit, the game shifts to the first normal game state.

Here, it is feared that the lengthening of the stay in the first normal gaming state causes the game to become monotonous and causes a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In this respect, in the present embodiment, when a special deviation occurs during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

Although the jackpot probability during the fourth normal game state is the same as that in the first normal game state, the electric accessory 93 is opened more frequently, and the second operating port 92 is frequently won. As a result, during the fourth normal game state, the decrease in the number of balls held is alleviated as compared with the first normal game state, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing investment (decrease in the number of balls held) (see FIG. 48). .. Further, in the fourth normal game state, as in the first normal game state, the variation display time of each game is greatly shortened as the number of pending numbers increases. Therefore, by shifting to the fourth normal game state, as a result of frequent winning of the second operating port 92, the progress speed of the game is also increased.

In addition, when the special game state occurs during the first normal game state, the process shifts to the fourth normal game state without going through the special game state. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the time required from the time when the player is out of the special position until the player can enjoy the benefits of the high frequency support mode A as much as possible. It is preferable to realize a configuration in which the benefits of the high-frequency support mode can be quickly enjoyed in this way in order to suppress the delay during the transition to the state and emphasize the lightness of the game. In addition, diversifying the transition pattern as a configuration capable of migrating to the high-frequency support mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) via two different routes, via the special gaming state and not via the special gaming state, is diversifying the game. It is also preferable to realize.

Here, in the first normal game state, the probability of becoming a big hit is low and the base is also low. Therefore, there is a possibility that the investment will be excessively increased in advancing the game. This not only becomes a factor that deteriorates the impression of the gaming machine, but can also be a factor that deteriorates the soundness of the game. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, a ceiling (upper limit of the number of games) is set in the first normal game state, and when the ceiling is reached, a low probability mode and a high frequency support mode A are supported. Shifts to the 4th normal game state of. In the fourth normal game state, the jackpot winning probability itself is the same as in the first normal game state, but the electric accessory 93 is frequently opened, so that the second operating port 92 is frequently won. As a result, the game can be advanced while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held (see FIG. 48).

According to the first embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

If a big hit result is obtained in the lottery based on entering the operating ports 91 and 92, the support mode is changed via the special game state, and if a special out-of-game result is obtained, the special game state is passed. The support mode is changed without any notice. With such a configuration, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game when changing the support mode to a higher one, and to contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game. Further, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when the support mode is switched to a higher-level one, the electric accessory 93 is opened depending on whether the trigger is a big hit result or a special deviation result. The frequency will be different. By providing game assistance in the high-frequency support mode A while ensuring the superiority of the support in the high-frequency support mode B, diversification of the game can be suitably realized. In particular, with respect to the disadvantageous high-frequency support mode B, the support mode is quickly switched without going through the special gaming state. Such a configuration is preferable in order to improve the satisfaction of the player.

If a special deviation result occurs during the first normal game state, the process shifts to the fourth normal game state without going through the special game state. At this time, although the low probability mode is inherited in the lottery mode, the support mode is changed from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. As a result, it becomes possible to aim for a big hit result while suppressing investment, and a kind of player relief function will be exhibited. When such a relief function is exerted, the special gaming state is not passed through as described above, so that the time required for the function to be exerted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the game is unnecessarily delayed. It is possible to make it difficult to give the player the impression as if it were.

As shown in this embodiment, when the low frequency support mode → the high frequency support mode B is established, the winning probability of the support lottery based on the passage of the through gate 84 is changed, and the low frequency support mode → the high frequency support mode A In that case, the time required from winning to the opening of the electric accessory 93 is shortened without changing the winning probability. If the high-frequency support mode A and the high-frequency support mode B are differentiated by using different parameters in this way, the two high-frequency support modes can be preferably coexisted.

In the high frequency support mode B, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, that is, the number of game balls paid out is set as compared with the high frequency support mode A. The value divided by the number (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes higher, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. That is, when the result is a big hit and the mode shifts to the high frequency support mode B via the special game state, there is a chance to win a large number of balls. On the other hand, in the high-frequency support mode A, the above-mentioned base is given preferential treatment over the low-frequency support mode, but the degree of the base is suppressed to be lower than that of the high-frequency support mode B, so that the relief function becomes excessive. Can be suppressed. With such a configuration, the sharpness of the game can be enhanced by using a plurality of support modes together.

By setting an upper limit (end reference number of times) for the number of games in the high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to return from the high-frequency support mode A to the low-frequency support mode, and after the high-frequency support mode A is set. It is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the tension of the game.

In the 3rd normal game state, which shifts when a normal jackpot result is obtained, the end reference number of high frequency support mode B is 40 times, and in the 4th normal game state, which shifts when a special out-of-order result is obtained, the frequency is high. It is stipulated that the end reference number of times of support mode A is equal to or less than the end reference number of times of high frequency support mode B (specifically, 20 times or 40 times). This is advantageous in increasing the frequency of transition to the fourth normal gaming state and increasing the frequency of transition to the gaming state. In addition, by setting a part of the end reference number set in the 4th normal game state that shifts when a special out-of-order result occurs to the same number as the end reference number of the high frequency support mode B, it is apparently 1. It is possible to make it appear as if a plurality of transition routes to the gaming state (third normal gaming state, fourth normal gaming state) are provided. This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game and to avoid it as a factor that causes confusion for the player.

Further, the end reference number of times is set in each of the second normal game state and the fourth normal game state. It is possible to contribute to the diversification of games by providing a transition route to a limited advantageous state in which an upper limit is set on the number of games, via / not via the special game state. In such a configuration, the base in the high frequency support mode A is configured so that the difference from the base in the high frequency support mode B is smaller than the difference from the base in the low frequency support mode. As a result, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

According to the present embodiment, when a special deviation result is obtained in the first normal game state, or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) during the first normal game state, the frequency is high. It shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the support mode A. In this way, excessive investment is made by relieving the player in the 4th normal gaming state as a judgment result or reaching the ceiling that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state as the trigger for the transition to the 4th normal gaming state. Can contribute to suppression. In particular, by diversifying the game and strengthening the relief function by relatively increasing the number of end reference times set when reaching the ceiling and relatively decreasing the number of end reference times set when the special deviation result is triggered. Can be preferably realized.

<Modification example 1>
The support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by the special disconnection and reaching the ceiling is more advantageous to the player than the support mode of the high-frequency support mode B triggered by the jackpot, that is, to the second operating port 92. You may give preferential treatment so that the winning frequency of the prize will be high.

<Modification 2>
The base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode A was set to be closer to the latter of the base (benefit) of low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of high-frequency support mode B, but this was changed to the former. It may be set to be close. Further, the base (benefit) of the high-frequency support mode A may be set to be intermediate between the base (benefit) of the low-frequency support mode and the base (benefit) of the high-frequency support mode B.

<Modification example 3>
The variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state may be different from the variable display time set when the special deviation occurs during the first normal game state. For example, the difference is such that the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is longer than the variable display time set when the special deviation occurs during the first normal game state. May be provided, or the variable display time set when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is larger than the variable display time set when the special deviation occurs during the first normal game state. The difference may be provided so as to be shorter.

<Modification example 4>
There may be a difference between the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special disconnection and the support mode of the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. For example, the difference is that the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by the special disconnection has a higher winning frequency to the second operating port 92 than the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. In addition, the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by the special disconnection has a higher winning frequency to the second operating port 92 than the support mode of the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. The difference may be provided so as to be low.

<Modification 5>
The end reference number set when the special deviation occurs may be larger than the end reference number set when the ceiling is reached, or the end reference number may be the same.

<Modification 6>
The game count counter may be reset (cleared to 0) when the high-frequency support mode A, which has been shifted to the ceiling, is terminated.

<Modification 7>
It is also possible to configure the continuation count counter to be reset (overwritten) when the special deviation occurs again during the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation. However, the continuous special deviation reduces the player's satisfaction that the number of games that can actually be continued is less than the number of games that the high-frequency support mode A should have been able to continue. It is expected to be a factor to cause. Therefore, in consideration of such a situation, it is preferable to fix the value set in the continuation number counter to "40" when the special deviation occurs during the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation. Specifically, it is preferable to unify the types of special deviations into one and set "40" in the continuation number counter when the special deviation occurs.

<Modification 8>
In the first embodiment described above, the value of the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) in the transition process at the end of the special game state, but the value of the game counter is changed when the jackpot result is obtained. If it is reset, the specific timing of the reset is arbitrary. For example, it is possible to reset the value of the game count counter at the end of the game round corresponding to the jackpot result, or to reset the value of the game count counter at the start of the special game state or during the round game.

<Second Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, the continuation count counter The value of is overwritten with the value triggered by the arrival at the ceiling (specifically, "400"). When reaching the ceiling, the configuration is such that the fourth normal gaming state is promptly taken over when the ceiling is reached, that is, the benefits of reaching the ceiling are seamlessly exhibited without going through other normal gaming states. In other words, the configuration is such that the fourth normal game state related to reaching the ceiling is prioritized over the fourth normal game state related to special deviation. In the present embodiment, the configuration related to the transition of the gaming state when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 49 (a), in the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 becomes blue, and the transition occurs when the ceiling is reached. In the frequency support mode A, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is differentiated so as to be green. That is, the background color of the display screen 95a can clearly indicate the trigger for transition to the high-frequency support mode A. In the following explanation, the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs is referred to as "high-frequency support mode A1", and the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when reaching the ceiling is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2". .. By the way, the support modes of the high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are common, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out to the number of game balls fired) is configured so that there is no difference between the two. Then, it is the same as the first embodiment.

Here, the flow of the start notification of the high frequency support mode A will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 49 (b) to 49 (c).

In the game times in which the game shifts to the high frequency support mode A1 due to the special deviation, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation in the game times is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a (confirmed display). ). Specifically, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines after the reach display. Then, the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to blue at the start of the next game round, and the remaining number of games of the high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

On the other hand, in the game round that shifts to the high frequency support mode A2 when the ceiling is reached, as shown in FIG. 49 (c), the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling reach in the game round is displayed on the display screen 95a. Stop display (confirmed display) may be displayed. Specifically, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines via the reach display. On the other hand, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete disconnection is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without the reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a is also maintained in blue.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 50, the support mode switching process constituting the game turn control process executed as a part of the normal process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2001, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002. In step S2002, it is determined whether or not the number-of-times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S2002, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003. In step S2003, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2004, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2004, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2004, the process proceeds to step S2005, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are deleted. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S2001, if a negative determination is made in step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2006. In step S2006, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2007. In step S2007, the continuation number counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2008, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S2008, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared in step S2005, and the switching process ends. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

If a negative determination is made in step S2008, the process proceeds to step S2009 to determine whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit (whether or not the ceiling has been reached). If a negative determination is made in step S2009, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2009, the process proceeds to step S2010, the preparation flags are set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the main switching process is completed.

Returning to the description of step S2006, if a negative determination is made in step S2006, the process proceeds to step S2011. In step S2011, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If it corresponds to the special deviation, an affirmative determination is made in step S2011 and the process proceeds to step S2012. In step S2012, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S2013, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, after executing the setting process of the continuation number counter in step S2014, the present switching process is terminated.

In the continuation count counter setting process, when the game result of this time is a special deviation A, "20" is set in the continuation counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A1 is continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A1 reaches 20. On the other hand, if the result of this game is a special deviation B, "40" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A1 is continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A1 reaches 40.

Returning to the description of step S2011, if a negative determination is made in step S2011, that is, if it does not correspond to the special deviation, the process proceeds to step S2015. In step S2015, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2015, the preparation flag is cleared in step S2016, and each process of steps S2012 to S2014 is executed. In the setting process of the continuation number counter in step S2014 this time, "400" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A2 is continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

Incidentally, when the transition to the special gaming state is made while the preparation flag is stored, the preparation flag is deleted at the end of the special gaming state.

Returning to the description of step S2015, if a negative determination is made in step S2015, that is, if the preparation flag is not stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2017. In step S2017, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit (whether or not it has reached the ceiling). If a negative determination is made in step S2017, the switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2017, the process of steps S2012 to S2014 is executed, and then the process for switching is terminated. In the setting process of the continuation number counter in step S2014 this time, "400" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A2 is continued until the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A2 reaches 400.

According to the configuration described in detail above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the high frequency support mode A2 is supported after one game round in the first normal game state. It will shift to the fourth normal game state. That is, it returns to the fourth normal game state after one game round in the first normal game state. Here, even though the return to the fourth normal game state is confirmed, the longer game times of the above 1 give the impression that the transition to the advantageous state is delayed without any darkness. It is feared that it will be a factor to give to people. One of the features of the present embodiment is that, in consideration of such circumstances, a device is made to realize a quick return to the fourth normal gaming state. Hereinafter, the device will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54. First, the variation display time setting process (step S714 of FIG. 26) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 51 to 52.

(Variable display time setting process)
In the variable display time setting process, first, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is either the first normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is executed, and then the setting process for the variable display time ends. If a negative determination is made in step S2101, it is determined in step S2103 whether or not the current gaming state is the second normal gaming state. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2103, the setting process for the second normal game state is executed in step S2104, and then the setting process for the variable display time ends. When a negative determination is made in step S2103, that is, when the current gaming state is the third normal gaming state, the setting process for the third normal gaming state is executed in step S2105, and then the variable display time is set. End the process. Here, with reference to FIG. 52, the setting process for the first and fourth normal gaming states will be described.

(Setting processing for the 1st and 4th normal game states)
In the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states, first, in step S2201, it is determined whether or not the current game times correspond to the jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2201, the jackpot setting process is executed in step S2202, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. In the process of step S2202, the variation display time in the current game round is determined with reference to the variation display time table for jackpots (see FIG. 28) stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

If a negative determination is made in step S2201, the process proceeds to step S2203. In step S2203, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204 to execute the special deviation setting process, and then ends the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states. In the process of step S2204, the variation display time in the current game round is determined with reference to the variation display time table for special deviation (see FIG. 27) stored in the variation display time table storage area 423 of the ROM 403.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, it is determined whether or not the current game round is a game round that reaches the ceiling. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2205, the setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed in step S2206, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Returning to the description of step S2005, if a negative determination is made in step S2005, the process proceeds to step S2207. In step S2207, it is determined whether or not the preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2207, the continuous transition setting process is executed in step S2208, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S2207, the setting process for complete disconnection is executed in step S2209, and then the setting process for the first and fourth normal game states is terminated.

Here, in both step S2206 and step S2208, although the fluctuation display time table corresponding to the normal deviation is referred to, the fluctuation display time table is individually provided depending on the presence or absence of the preparation flag. Hereinafter, the variable display time table will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54.

When the ceiling is reached in the situation where the preparation flag is not stored during the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the reach display is displayed as the fluctuation display time of the operation port display unit. The corresponding variable display time "20 to 30 sec" is set. That is, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination (see FIG. 49 (c)) indicating reaching the ceiling via the reach display is stopped and displayed (confirmed) on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95. Will be displayed).

On the other hand, if the ceiling is reached under the condition that the preparation flag is not stored during the 4th normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A1, the fluctuation display time of the operation port display unit is set. The same fluctuation display time (see FIG. 27) as in the case of complete deviation is set. Then, in this game round, the symbols other than the symbols corresponding to reaching the ceiling, in detail, the symbol combinations corresponding to the complete detachment are stopped and displayed. That is, the symbol displayed as stopped does not include the above-mentioned "CHANGE" symbol. As a result, it is difficult to identify that the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state from the symbol combination and the variation display time (variation display mode) of the symbols.

A game result that does not correspond to either a big hit or a special loss (normal loss) when the player shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode under the situation where the preparation flag is stored. In the case of, "3 sec" is set as the fluctuation display time of the operation port display unit. This variation display time coincides with the shortest variation display time that can be set in the game times that are completely out of the first normal game state (see FIG. 27). That is, when the preparation flag is stored when the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal game state, the 4th normal game state is returned to the 4th normal game state again via the 1st normal game state after the end of the 4th normal game state. However, it is suppressed so that the staying time in this first normal gaming state is not extended.

In the fourth normal game state, the game times may be repeated while the preparation flag is stored. The variable display time set in such a case is the same as the variable display time set in the game times in which the preparation flag is not stored (see FIGS. 27 and 53).

(Flow of continuous transition)
Next, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 55, the behavior when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A1 will be described.

At the timing of tb1 after shifting to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation, the 299th gaming round after the end of the special gaming state has started. In the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue.

At the timing of tb2 that follows, the 300th game round after the end of the special game state has started, and at the timing of tb3, the symbol combination corresponding to the 300th game round is confirmed and displayed. Since the player is currently in the fourth normal game state, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete disengagement (normal disengagement) is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) instead of the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling. In the example shown in FIG. 55, since the end reference number (upper limit) in the fourth normal game state has not been reached even in the game times started at the timing of tb2, the fourth normal game state is continued and the preparation flag is described. Will be stored.

Since the end reference number (upper limit) is not reached even for the game times started at the timing of tb4, the above-mentioned blue background is maintained. However, after the fourth normal gaming state is completed, a message (characters of "STANDBY") suggesting that the fourth normal gaming state is restored is displayed at the upper part of the display screen 95a to indicate the number of remaining continuations. The counter is hidden.

At the timing of tb5, the final game round that reaches the end reference number of times is started in the fourth normal game state. In the example shown in FIG. 55, the game times correspond to complete deviation (normal deviation), and at the timing of tb6 when the confirmation display of the symbol and the symbol is completed, the fourth normal gaming state shifts to the first normal gaming state. At the same time, a new game round has started. Although this game time corresponds to the first normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a is maintained in blue, and the characters "STANDBY" displayed at the upper part of the display screen 95a are also displayed. Will remain. At the timing of tb7 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, the display screen 95a is blacked out. Then, at the timing of tb8 when the confirmation display is started, the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival is stopped and displayed (reduced display) at the upper corner of the display screen 95a, and the ceiling arrival is triggered at the center of the display screen 95a. The characters "Entering the Super Chance Zone" will be displayed as a message clearly indicating the transition to the fourth normal gaming state.

At the timing of tb9 when the confirmed display time has elapsed, the gaming state shifts from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A2. Along with this, the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from blue to green.

According to the second embodiment described in detail above, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (big hit result) is not established, the high frequency support mode A is performed due to the special deviation result or the ceiling arrival. It may shift to the corresponding fourth normal game state. By entering the high frequency support mode A, the frequency of winning a prize in the second operating port 92 increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to enhance the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the special deviation result and the ceiling arrival are used together as an opportunity to shift to the fourth normal gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal game state and the ceiling reach is invalidated, or if the 4th normal game state is forcibly terminated due to the special deviation result, the player It is feared that some of the benefits that could have been originally enjoyed will disappear, and the satisfaction level of the players will be greatly reduced. In this regard, in the present embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the ceiling is reached at least until the number of times the game is executed in the fourth normal game state reaches the end reference number. The transition to the fourth normal gaming state will be delayed. As a result, the above concerns can be dispelled and the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

As described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state and the transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling, the behavior (switching mode) of the electric accessory 93 is the same. By aligning them, it is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being inferior to the behavior up to that point.

If the delay function is provided, it is assumed that if the benefit of reaching the ceiling is immediately terminated after a large delay, it will be a factor that impairs the player's willingness to play. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the number of end reference times related to the special deviation result <the second reference number of times related to reaching the ceiling, excessive delay is suppressed and the benefits after reaching the ceiling are obsolete. It is possible to suppress the impression that there is.

If the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal game state, the rhythm of the game can be adjusted by shifting from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state and then returning to the 4th normal game state. Accents can be added, which can contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game.

In the configuration of returning to the fourth normal game state via the first normal game state, the following inconveniences occur due to the variation in the operation period of the game turn operation of the game times executed during the first normal game state. obtain. That is, when the operation period is relatively short, the time for notifying the player of the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is insufficient, and when the operation period is relatively long, the transition to the fourth normal gaming state is performed. It makes it easier to give the player the impression of being unreasonably delayed. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, for the game times in the first normal game state in which the transition to the fourth normal game state is delayed, a predetermined operation period is set regardless of the number of reservations. By keeping the operating period constant, the above concerns can be resolved.

As shown in the present embodiment, when a big hit result is obtained in a situation where the transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is about to occur, the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling The transition to is disabled. Such a configuration is preferable in order to prevent the player from having an excessive relief function.

If the maximum number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the first game state, a special effect (stop display of the combination of "3" symbol, "1" symbol, and "4" symbol) is executed at that game time. As a result, it is promptly notified that the player will shift to the fourth normal gaming state. On the other hand, when the maximum number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the 4th normal game state, the above special effects ("3" symbol, "1" symbol, "4" symbol combination are used in the game. Stop display) is avoided. In this way, when the transition to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, the transition to the 4th normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation result is made by intentionally not performing the special effect. It is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the gaming state from decreasing before the end of the fourth normal gaming state.

<Modification example 1>
In the second embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the fourth normal game corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 is passed through the first normal game state. It was configured to shift to the state. That is, the fourth normal game state is continuous with one game turn corresponding to the first normal game state. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be changed as follows. That is, when the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, the high frequency support mode A2 is immediately entered after the end of the 4th normal gaming state without going through the 1st normal gaming state. It may be configured to shift to the corresponding fourth normal gaming state. That is, the configuration may be such that the fourth normal gaming state is continued without interruption. Even in this case, the high-frequency support mode A1 triggered by the special deviation is not forcibly terminated in the middle (the high-frequency support mode A1 can be expired), so that the player's satisfaction level is high. It does not decrease.

<Modification 2>
In the second embodiment described above, the background color of the display screen 95a is different between the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 and the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2. , Not limited to this. It is also possible to make the background color the same in both fourth normal game states.

<Modification example 3>
In the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1, a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal game state in the next game round is displayed. The display is started, but instead of this, it is possible to start the display of the message at the game times when the ceiling is reached. In addition, instead of or in addition to the configuration in which a message suggesting the continuation of the fourth normal gaming state is displayed from the game times reaching the ceiling or the next game times, the configuration does not suggest the continuation of the fourth normal gaming state. It is also possible. That is, it is also possible to make it unclear whether or not there is a transition to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling until the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation is completed.

<Modification example 4>
If the transition from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state is made while the electric accessory 93 is in the open state, the electric accessory 93 is opened after the initially set opening time of the electric accessory 93 has elapsed. The configuration may be such that the 93 is switched to the closed state, or the electric accessory 93 may be quickly switched to the closed state in order to immediately stop the opening.

<Modification 5>
In the second embodiment described above, when the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is shifted to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state. As the fluctuation display time of the design of the operation port display unit and the design of the design display device 95 in the first normal game state, the fluctuation display time of the design of the through gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode (10 to 10). The configuration is such that a time shorter than 20 sec) is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. For the operating port in the first normal game state when shifting from the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal game state. As the fluctuation display time of the design of the display unit and the design of the design display device 95, a time longer than the fluctuation display time (10 to 20 sec) of the design of the through-gate display unit DS set in the low frequency support mode is set. It is also possible to have a configuration like this.

<Modification 6>
In the second embodiment described above, when the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 is shifted to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the first normal gaming state. The configuration is such that the variable display time of the display unit for the operating port and the symbol of the symbol display device 95 in the first normal game state is set to "3 sec", which is the variable display time corresponding to the complete deviation, but the configuration is limited to this. It's not something. For example, when shifting from the 4th normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A1 to the 4th normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A2 via the 1st normal gaming state, the operation in the 1st normal gaming state is performed. It is also possible to set "30 to 40 sec", which is a variable display time corresponding to the reach display, as the variable display time of the design of the mouth display unit and the design of the design display device 95.

<Modification 7>
In the second embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the first time is once when the number of times the game is executed in the fourth normal game state becomes the end reference number of times. The configuration is such that the player shifts to the normal game state and then returns to the fourth normal game state. At this time, the number of game times executed during the first normal game state is set to one, but the number of times is not limited to this. The number of games in the first gaming state may be specified so as to be at least equal to or less than the upper limit of the number of holdings that can be stored (preferably the upper limit of the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92).

As shown in this modification, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal gaming state, the configuration is such that after shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the player returns to the fourth normal gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration in which the first normal game state is interposed, there is a possibility that the player may be given the impression that the enjoyment of the benefit is unreasonably delayed by repeating the game times in the first normal game state. It gets higher. In particular, it is assumed that such an impression becomes stronger when the number of special information stored by the intervention of the first normal game state becomes 0 and the continuous progress of the game times is interrupted. In this regard, by limiting the number of games executed in the intervening first normal game state to be less than the storage upper limit of the special information, the continuation of the game times is interrupted when returning to the fourth normal game state. Can be avoided and the above concerns can be preferably dispelled.

<Modification 8>
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without a big hit result, it is possible to execute a special effect indicating the transition to the fourth normal game state. When the maximum number of times has been reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of times the game has been executed during the fourth normal game state is greater than the predetermined number of times, the game has reached the maximum number of times. While the special effect is executed at each time, if the maximum number of times is reached during the fourth normal game state and the number of times the game is executed during the fourth normal game state is less than the above-mentioned predetermined number of times, the maximum number of times is reached. The special effect may be executed in the game times that are executed after the game times.

When the upper limit of the number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the fourth normal game state, which is triggered by the result of the special exception, the impression of the player may differ depending on the timing. For example, if the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, it may give the impression that the special detachment result was a waste. Therefore, as shown in this modification, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the number of times the game is executed during the fourth normal game state (the number of games executed so far) is set. The above concerns can be dispelled by making the timing of occurrence of the special effect, that is, the timing of notification of reaching the ceiling different accordingly.

<Third embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the game playability using the above-mentioned special deviation is different from the above-mentioned first embodiment and the second embodiment. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the difference in the basic configuration of the game board unit will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a front view of the game board unit.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board 80aA will be described in detail.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payment of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged immediately below the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. In that respect, it is the same as that of the first embodiment.

However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the first operating port 91A, the second operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. The game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Further, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 57.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is a first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a hold area Ra for the second operation port and a hold area Rb for the second operation port that stores each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the second operation port 92A. doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Then, when the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first operation port, the hold area for the first operation port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 can be a special omission, but in the present embodiment, the first operating port is configured. The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery based on the winning of the 91 and the second operating port 92 can be a special deviation. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 58, the pass / fail table for the first operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 58 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of six "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 58 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) that become big hits are "7" and "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. Then, all the random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the deviation result (usually the deviation result). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 59, the pass / fail table for the second operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are set.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 59 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of six "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 59 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing.

Further, in a situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and the winning / failing table for the high probability mode are referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that is a special deviation (that is, that is). , Special deviation information), all of which are "2", "4", "6", "12", "14" ... "596", for a total of 150 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "2", "4", "6", "12", "14" ... "596" correspond to the special deviation result. Then, all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the jackpot or the special deviation correspond to the deviation result (normal deviation result).

(Flow of the game)
Here, the flow of the game (game flow) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

The first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is a stage to stay when the game round based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is executed, and the special stage stays when the game round based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is executed. It's a stage.

Regarding the special stage, other normal game states corresponding to the high-frequency support mode, specifically, the third normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode B or the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode A. It is a stage that temporarily stays at the time of transition from the gaming state to the first normal gaming state, and the upper limit of the number of games to be executed matches the upper limit of the storage information of the holding information in the holding area Rb for the second operating port. There is. That is, immediately after the transition from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the stage moves to the special stage on condition that the hold information related to the second operation port 92A is stored. .. Then, if there is no big hit or special loss in this special stage, the special stage is moved to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal gaming state corresponds to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, even if the game ball is launched to the right route and the support is won, the winning of the second operating port 92A is substantially avoided. Then, since the game ball launched to the right route cannot win a prize in the first operating port 91A, it becomes difficult to receive a lottery based on the winning in the operating ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, for the game ball launched to the left route, the winning of the second operating port 92A is avoided, while the winning of the first operating port 91A may occur. For the above reasons, in the first normal game state, it is possible to proceed with the game so that it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the left route than to aim at the right route. If the game ball is launched to the right route during the first game state, a warning is given to urge the launch destination to return to the left route.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is obtained in the lottery during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route. During the second normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a 1/4 chance that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the second normal gaming state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. .. That is, even if a special deviation occurs during the second normal gaming state, the special deviation does not trigger the transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is won in the lottery during the first normal game state and the second normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. .. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route.

During the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a probability of about 1/4 that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the third normal gaming state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. .. That is, even if a special deviation occurs during the third normal gaming state, the special deviation does not trigger the transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

When the game progresses without becoming a big hit during the third normal game state and the number of executed game times (specifically, the game times related to the second operating port 92A) reaches the end reference number (20 times). , Shifts to the first normal game state. Specifically, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", the stage shifts to the main stage, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is other than "0", the stage shifts to the special stage. ..

In the special stage, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A will be executed for the number of pending times. If the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A results in a special loss, the game shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. During the fourth normal game state, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by firing the game ball to the right route. During the fourth normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a probability of about 1/4 that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the 4th normal game state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. ..

When the game progresses without becoming a big hit during the fourth normal game state and the number of executed game times (specifically, the game times related to the second operating port 92A) reaches the end reference number (20 times). , Shifts to the first normal game state. Specifically, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", the stage shifts to the main stage, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is other than "0", the stage shifts to the special stage. .. In this way, if the fourth normal game state and the special stage can be looped, the player can advance the game advantageously.

Here, in the case of transitioning from the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the advantage is greatly changed depending on the number of reservations related to the second operating port 92A. In the present embodiment, in the final game times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit D2 for the second operating port is set to the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state. By making it longer than the other game times in the above, a configuration is realized in which the hold related to the second operating port 92A can be easily stored up to the upper limit during the final game time.

(Variable display time table for operating port)
Specifically, as shown in FIG. 61A, the variation display time table for the second operating port referred to in the 20th game round in the third normal gaming state is variable display regardless of the number of reservations. It is configured so that "40 sec" is set as the time. On the contrary,
Regarding the variation display time table for the second operating port referred to in each of the 1st to 19th game times in the third normal game state, in any case, the variation display set from the 20th game time is set. It is configured to shorten the time. For example, as shown in FIG. 61B, in the case of non-reach display non-compliant deviation (special deviation or normal deviation), "12 to 14 sec" or "1 to 2 sec" is set according to the number of holds, and the reach display is displayed. In the case of out-of-correspondence (special out-of-order or normal out-of-order), "20 to 30 sec" is set. On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, as shown in FIG. 61 (c), "20 to 30 sec" is set regardless of the number of holdings.

In this way, in the 20th final game round, the variable display time is expanded as compared with the 1st to 19th game rounds, so that the number of reservations related to the second operating port 92A becomes the upper limit of storage. It is possible to reduce the chance of transitioning (demotion) from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state without reaching it.

The variable display time table for the second operating port, which is referred to during the first normal gaming state, is referred to as a variable display time table that is referred to in the case of special deviation and normal deviation, and in the case of a big hit. It is roughly divided into a variable display time table. In the variable display time table for special deviation and normal deviation referred to during the first normal gaming state, when the number of holdings is "0", "10sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of holdings is "1". In the case of "4", "0.5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the variable display time table for jackpots referred to during the first normal game state, "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time for any game number regardless of the number of holdings and the game result. There is.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the flow of the effect when shifting to the fourth normal gaming state will be described. FIG. 62 illustrates a case where the end reference number of times is reached without becoming a big hit during the third normal gaming state, and the remaining hold relating to the second operating port 92A includes a special deviation.

In the third normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is blue and nuts, and the number of remaining games in which the high frequency support mode is continued is displayed in the upper corner of the display screen 95a. There is. At the timing of tk1 when the 19th game round related to the second operating port 92A was started, the number of reservations decreased from "4" to "3", and the 20th game round (final game round) of tk2 was started. At the timing, the number of reservations has decreased from "3" to "2".

When the final game round is started, a moving image of the loop branching effect is displayed on the display screen 95a. At the beginning of this video, "Catch the Mission Fairy" is displayed, and then the fairy character and the girl character are displayed on the display screen. As described above, the variable display time of the final game times is longer than the variable display time of the 1st to 19th game times. As a result, winning a prize in the second operating port 92A during the final game round is likely to occur. In the example of FIG. 62, winning of the second operating port 92A occurs consecutively at the timing of tc3 and the timing of tc4, and the number of reservations related to the second operating port 92A is the upper limit of storage before the end of the final game round. Has reached.

The loop branching effect in the present embodiment is a series of effects executed over the final game times in the third normal game state and the game times executed during the special stage in the first normal game state, and is final. If the game times correspond to the jackpot, the game times executed during the special stage will be specially missed, or if the game times correspond to the jackpot, the production that succeeded in capturing the fairy will be executed, and the final game times will be specially missed. Alternatively, when all the game times executed during the special stage correspond to the normal deviation, the effect of failing to capture the fairy is executed.

In the example shown in FIG. 62, the effect of successfully capturing the fairy is executed at the timing of tc5 when the final display of the pattern of the display unit D2 for the second operating port is executed in the final game round in the third normal game state. After that, until the special stage is completed, the characters "STANDBY" are displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating the transition to the normal gaming state (fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode. During this time, the gaming state shifts from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state.

If the electric accessory 93A is in the open state at the time of transition from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the electric accessory 93A is forcibly switched to the closed state. 1 It is avoided that a prize is generated in the second operating port 92A after the transition to the normal gaming state.

At the timing of tk7, the game round corresponding to the special deviation is started, and at the timing of tk8, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation is confirmed and displayed. Then, at the timing of tk9, the state shifts from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, the background color of the display screen 95a is blue, and the number of loops in the high frequency support mode and the number of remaining games are displayed on the upper part of the display screen 95a.

After that, when the final game times in the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A are reached without becoming a big hit, the game shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Specifically, the stage shifts to the special stage on condition that the hold related to the second operating port 92A is stored. Even when transitioning from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the loop branching spans the final game times in the fourth normal game state and each game time executed in the special stage in the first normal game state. The production (for details, a video in which the chase of the fairy and the girl is partially omitted) will be executed.

According to the third embodiment described in detail above, when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the first normal game state, the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B is passed through the special game state. Move to. In the third normal game state, the electric accessory 93A is frequently switched to the open state, and the chances of winning a prize in the second operating port 92A are increased, so that the reduction of the number of balls held is suppressed. A limit is set for the number of times in the third normal game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the third normal game state reaches the first end reference number (20 times), the low frequency support mode is supported. It shifts to the first normal game state. This makes it difficult to win a prize in the second operating port 92A.

Here, the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, and after shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, The game round is executed based on the stored pending information. In the remaining game times related to the second operating port 92A, a special deviation result may occur. If a special out-of-game result is obtained in the remaining game times, the mode shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and high frequency support mode A without going through the special game state, and the high frequency switching mode is set. It will loop. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a big hit while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

As described above, when the state shifts from the third normal gaming state or the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state, the second is limited to the number of holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port. The game times related to the operating port 92A are executed. In the lottery based on winning the second operating port 92A, the probability of a special loss result (1/4) is higher than the probability of a big hit result (1/100), and the above high frequency support mode is used. It is possible to aim for a big hit while looping. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to improving the interest of the game without increasing the probability of a jackpot result.

If a special deviation result occurs during the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the result becomes invalid, while the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state shift to the first normal game state. If a special out-of-game result is obtained in the remaining game rounds related to the second operating port 92A at that time, the transition to the fourth normal game state or the fourth normal game state loops with the special out-of-game result as a trigger. According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the storage upper limit number of the reserved information related to the second operating port 92A. Therefore, when adjusting the degree of freedom by increasing or decreasing the number of end reference times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and to avoid the influence on the end reference. The degree of freedom in setting the number of times can be suitably improved.

The opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 93A in the high frequency support mode A is closer to the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 93A in the high frequency support mode B than the opening / closing mode of the electric accessory 93A in the low frequency support mode. .. In such a configuration, when the third normal game state → the first normal game state → the fourth normal game state is established, it is as if the player has the same game state before and after the first normal game state. It is preferable to promote such recognition. In particular, the end reference number of times (20 times) in the fourth normal game state and the end reference number of times (20 times) in the third normal game state are the same number of times. With such a configuration, the above recognition can be suitably promoted.

Immediately after shifting from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the remaining reserved game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed. Then, when a special deviation result is obtained in these game times, the state shifts from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state. Here, as shown in the present embodiment, in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, it is specified in advance whether or not the remaining reserved game times result in a special deviation result, and the result is determined. By performing the continuous effect based on the above, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the presence or absence of the occurrence of the loop described above.

The above-mentioned prior identification is performed in the final game times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state when shifting from the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. Will be executed. As described above, if the above specification is performed in the final game times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the number of hold information stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port becomes the upper limit of storage. The continuous effect is executed in the state where the continuous effect is reached, and the function of suggesting the continuation of the loop can be suitably exhibited by the continuous effect.

According to the configuration in which the continuous effect is started before the above-mentioned prior specification in the final game times in the third normal game state and the fourth normal game state, the restriction on the execution period of the continuous effect is relaxed, and the continuous effect is relaxed. Can be suitably suppressed from becoming obsolete.

<Modification example 1>
In the third embodiment described above, when a special deviation occurs in some gaming states (for example, a second normal gaming state, etc.), this is invalidated and treated as a normal deviation, but the present invention is limited to this. is not it. It is also possible to refer to the winning / failing table that does not include the special deviation in the game result, so that the special deviation lottery itself is not performed.

<Modification 2>
In the third embodiment described above, the end reference number of times (20 times) in the third game state and the end reference number of times (20 times) in the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation are made the same. It is not limited to the above, and the end reference number of times in the third game state and the end reference number of times in the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation may be different.

For example, a difference may be provided so that the end reference number of times (40 times) in the third game state becomes larger than the end reference number of times (20 times) in the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation. A difference may be provided so that the end reference number of times (20 times) in the game state is less than the end reference number of times (40 times) in the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation.

<Modification example 3>
In the third embodiment, the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A in the first normal game state is set to be "0.5 sec" regardless of the number of holdings and the game result. However, the configuration is not limited to this. The variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A in the first normal gaming state is also set according to the number of reservations and the game result in the same manner as the variation display time of the game times related to the first operating port 91A. May be good.

<Modification example 4>
In the third embodiment, by expanding the variation display time of the final game times in the third normal game state, the number of reservations related to the second operating port 92A at the time of transition to the first normal game state is less than the upper limit. However, instead of or in addition to this, the following configuration can be used. That is, when shifting from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state, the variation display time of the final game times in the 4th normal gaming state is expanded, so that the second operation is performed when shifting to the 1st normal gaming state. It is also possible to prevent the number of holds related to the mouth 92A from becoming less than the upper limit.

<Modification 5>
In the third embodiment, the loop branching effect is executed over the third normal game state and the first normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B, but the loop branching effect is frequently performed. It is also possible to configure the system to be executed over the third normal game state corresponding to the support mode B, the first normal game state, and the third normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. By gaining the effect execution time in this way, it is possible to enhance the loop branch effect while promptly shifting to the third normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A.

<Fourth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the number of games executed at the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) (when the ceiling is reached), the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is reached. It was configured to shift to. The configuration of the present embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment in that the ceiling is pseudo-variable. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the pseudo-variable function in the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment. First, with reference to FIG. 63, a distribution table for special deviation in the present embodiment will be described.

(Distribution table for special removal)
In the special deviation distribution table of the present embodiment, the special deviation result A, the special deviation result B, and the special deviation result C are set as the distribution destinations of the game results. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 23" corresponds to the special deviation result A, and "24 to 28" corresponds to the special deviation result B. , "29" corresponds to the special off result C.

Neither the special deviation result A to the special deviation result C is a trigger for switching the lottery mode, but functions as a trigger for switching the support mode.

Specifically, the special deviation result A is an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game times that resulted in the special deviation result A, that is, an opportunity to shift to the fourth normal gaming state. .. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (When shifting), it ends and switches to the low-frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal game state). In the present embodiment, "20 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

The special deviation result B is also an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game round resulting in the special deviation result B, that is, an opportunity to shift to the fourth normal gaming state. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (When shifting), it ends and switches to the low-frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal game state). In the present embodiment, "40 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

The special deviation result C also serves as an opportunity to switch the support mode to the high frequency support mode A after the end of the game round resulting in the special deviation result C, that is, to shift to the fourth normal gaming state. In this high-frequency support mode A, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the end reference number of times, or when a big hit result is obtained before the end reference number of times is reached (for details, go to the special game state). (When shifting), it ends and switches to the low-frequency support mode (shifts to the first normal game state). In the present embodiment, "260 times" is set as the end reference number of times.

Also in the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the ceiling = 300 times and the upper limit of the number of games in the third normal game state = 40 times. That is, both the end reference number set when the special deviation result A is obtained and the end reference number set when the special deviation result B is obtained are executed in the first normal gaming state by the time the ceiling is reached. Although it is less than the maximum number of games to be played, the maximum number of games to be set when the special deviation result C is obtained is the maximum number of games to be executed in the first normal game state by the time the ceiling is reached. It is the same number as the number of times.

The number of end reference times in the special deviation result C can be set to be larger than the maximum number of games executed in the first normal game state before reaching the ceiling.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special disengagement result C is obtained during the first normal game state, the support by the high frequency support mode A until reaching the ceiling is substantially confirmed, and the special disengagement result A and the special If the number of remaining games to reach the ceiling is less than the end reference number of the special loss results A and B when the result is B, the support by the high frequency support mode A to reach the ceiling is confirmed.

In the present embodiment, the behavior of the symbol display device 95 and the like differs depending on whether the end reference number of games exceeds the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling or not when a special deviation result occurs. ing. Specifically, as in the first embodiment, when a special deviation result is obtained, the player is notified (clarified) by stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result. Although it is configured to be obtained, if the number of end reference times exceeds the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling, the notification is not performed. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for achieving such behavior, that is, a first fluctuation start process executed as part of the periodic process by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. ..

(Process for starting the first fluctuation)
In the first fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S2301 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S2301, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and from the command, the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, the special deviation result information, the normal deviation result information, and reaching the ceiling. Identify various information related to the game result, such as the information of. Then, in step S2301, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot winning, information on the presence or absence of a special loss, and information on the type of special loss in the case of a special loss. Information, information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped when the jackpot is not won and the special is not out of order, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

In the following step S2302, various counters for specifying the number of games are updated. Specifically, the remaining number of games counter for specifying the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling provided in various counter areas 465 of the RAM 444 is updated (“1” is subtracted). The remaining number of times counter is configured to be set to "300" at the end of the special game state.

In the following step S2303, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times to be started this time is a jackpot result based on the information grasped in step S2301. If the game result this time is a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), the effect setting process for jackpot is executed in the following step S2304. The jackpot effect setting process includes a stop result determination process for determining the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode determination for determining the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol. It is roughly divided into processing (effect pattern determination processing).

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol , "3" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" Symbol, "6" symbol combination, "7" symbol, "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination, "8" symbol, "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination, "9" symbol, "9" symbol The combination of the "symbol" and the "9" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot.

As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for the jackpot, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the above is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If it is determined in step S2303 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S2305. In step S2305, based on the information grasped in step S2301, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times to be started this time is a special deviation result. If the result of this game is a special deviation result, an affirmative determination is made in step S2305 and the process proceeds to step S2306. In step S2306, the number-of-times comparison process is executed.

In the number-of-times comparison process, the remaining number-of-times counter described above is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the end reference number of times set in this special deviation is less than the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling. If the number of end reference times set in this special deviation is less than the number of times remaining until reaching the ceiling, an affirmative determination is made in step S2307 and the process proceeds to step S2308. In step S2308, the first special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special deviation, is executed.

The first special effect setting process includes a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination for special deviation to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variation display for determining a variation display mode of the symbol for special deviation. It is roughly classified into a mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process that constitutes the first special effect setting process, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation.

In the variable display mode determining process that constitutes the first special effect setting process, the variable display mode is determined so that the player is notified via the reach display that the special effect has occurred. Specifically, a variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and a normal reach display corresponding to the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command is obtained. Alternatively, the effect pattern of the super reach display is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

Here, the first special effect set by the first special effect setting process will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 65 (a).

In the game times corresponding to the first special effect, the reach display is shifted to the reach display at the timing when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of all the symbol strings stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. At a predetermined timing after shifting to the reach display, the symbol combination (combination of "1" symbol, "3" symbol, and "4" symbol) corresponding to the special deviation is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating switching to the high-frequency support mode A (for example, "Chance time rush" or the like) is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to blue.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 64, when a negative determination is made in step S2307, that is, when the number of end reference times set in this special deviation matches or increases the number of times remaining until reaching the ceiling. Goes to step S2309. In step S2309, the second special effect setting process, which is the effect setting process for special deviation, is executed.

The second special effect setting process includes a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination for special deviation to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variation display for determining a variation display mode of the symbol for special deviation. It is roughly classified into a mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process that constitutes the second special effect setting process, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area. The symbol combination determined by this stop result determination process includes the "CHANGE" symbol. That is, in the second special effect, the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on any of the effective lines.

In the variable display mode determining process that constitutes the second special effect setting process, the variable display mode is determined so that the player is notified via the reach display that the special effect has occurred. Specifically, a variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and a normal reach display corresponding to the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command is obtained. Alternatively, the effect pattern of the super reach display is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

Here, the second special effect set by the second special effect setting process will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 65 (b).

In the game times corresponding to the second special effect, the reach display shifts to the timing when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of all the symbol strings stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. At a predetermined timing after shifting to the reach display, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating switching to the high-frequency support mode A (for example, “relief activation” or the like) is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green.

Returning to the description of FIG. 64, if a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, if the current game round does not correspond to the special deviation result, the process proceeds to step S2310. In step S2310, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in this game round. When reaching the ceiling, an affirmative determination is made in step S2310, and the process proceeds to step S2311. In step S2311, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The details of the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling will be described later.

If a negative determination is made in step S2310, the effect setting process for complete disengagement is executed in step S2312. In the effect setting process for complete deviation, it is grasped whether or not reach will occur in this game round. When reach occurs, the effect setting process for generating reach is executed, and when reach does not occur, the effect setting process for non-reach is executed.

The effect setting process for generating reach includes a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination for reach-compatible complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode of the symbol for reach-compatible complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining.

In the stop result determination process for reach-corresponding complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for reach correspondence complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

The effect setting process for non-reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for non-reach complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the symbol for non-reach complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variation display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining a variation display mode.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so that it does not become any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. .. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for non-reach complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for non-reach non-correspondence storage stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time is acquired. And the effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312, the process proceeds to step S2313. In step S2313, a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S1903, S1905, S1907, and S1908 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 in order to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S1909, in the following step S1910, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in steps S2304, S2308, S2309, S2311, and S2312 to start the effect for game rounds.

Here, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling in step S2311 will be described. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is a normal setting process executed when the current game state is the first normal game state, and a normal game state other than the first normal game state (for example, the fourth). It consists of a special setting process that is executed when the game is in the normal game state.

The normal setting process constituting step S2311 includes a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination for reaching the ceiling to be stopped and displayed, an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode for the symbol for reaching the ceiling. It is roughly classified into the variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) to be determined.

In the stop result determination process in the normal setting process, the stop result in which the combination of symbols for reaching the ceiling is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area. In the present embodiment, a symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is defined as a symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling.

When it reaches the ceiling, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are supported. Determine the effect pattern of normal reach display or super reach display. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

Here, with reference to the schematic view of FIG. 65 (b), the effect executed in the game times in which the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state will be supplementarily described.

In the game times when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the reach display shifts to the timing when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable display of all the symbol rows stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. .. At a predetermined timing after shifting to the reach display, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a. After that, a message indicating switching to the high-frequency support mode A (for example, “relief activation” or the like) is displayed on the display screen 95a, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green.

That is, the effect when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state is the same as the second special effect set in step S2309, and the end reference number set when the special deviation is triggered is until the ceiling is reached. It is configured so that the effect mode and the symbol combination displayed when stopped are the same as when the number of remaining games is matched or exceeded. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, or if the end reference number set triggered by the special deviation matches or exceeds the number of remaining games until the ceiling is reached. The second special effect will be executed, and the player will not be able to identify whether the effect (effect mode or combination of symbols displayed to be stopped) is a special effect or a ceiling arrival. ing.

The special setting process constituting step S2311 includes a stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variation display mode determination process for determining the variation display mode of the symbol ( It is roughly divided into production pattern determination processing).

In this stop result determination process, the stop result in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the normal deviation is established is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In addition, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are supported. Determine the production pattern that does not support reach. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

That is, when the ceiling is reached during the normal game state other than the first normal game state (specifically, the fourth normal game state), the same effect as in the case of complete non-reach support is executed. This makes it difficult to identify the fact that the ceiling has been reached from the content of the production. In other words, if the player reaches the ceiling during the 4th normal game state, or if the player is completely out of the game (no big hit, special off, or reaching the ceiling), the effect corresponding to the complete off is achieved. It will be executed, and it is configured so that the player cannot identify whether the trigger is reaching the ceiling or completely off from the effect (the effect mode or the combination of symbols displayed to be stopped).

Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 (a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached after the end of the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation, and FIG. 66 (b) is the fourth timing chart triggered by the special deviation. It is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached during the normal game state.

In the example shown in FIG. 66 (a), the timing of td1 in the first normal gaming state is specially out of sync. This special deviation is the special deviation result A, and "20" times are set as the end reference number of times. The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is larger than the end reference number set this time. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 66A, the ceiling is not reached during the fourth normal game state in which the transition is triggered by the special deviation.

The first special effect (see FIG. 65 (a)) is executed in the game times in which the special deviation occurs, and it is clearly stated that the transition to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is triggered by the special deviation. Then, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is changed from white to blue with the transition to the fourth normal gaming state. Further, in the upper corner of the display screen 95a, a countdown display of the number of remaining games in the fourth normal game state is started, and the number of remaining games is clearly indicated.

At the timing of td2 when the number of game times executed during the fourth normal game state reaches the end reference number of times, the state shifts from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. In line with this, the background color of the display screen 95a has been changed from blue to white.

After that, the game progressed without becoming a big hit, and when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reached the upper limit (ceiling) at the timing of td3, the first normal game state to the fourth It has shifted to the normal game state. In the final game that reaches the ceiling, the above-mentioned second special effect (see FIG. 65 (b)) is executed, and it is clearly shown to the player that the game has reached the ceiling. The background color of the display screen 95a is changed to green in accordance with the transition of the timing of td3 to the fourth normal gaming state.

On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), the special deviation occurs at the timing of te1 during the first normal gaming state. This special deviation is the special deviation result B, and "40" times are set as the end reference number of times. The remaining number of times to reach the ceiling is larger than the end reference number set this time. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 66 (b), the ceiling can be reached during the fourth normal game state in which the transition is triggered by the special deviation. At the timing of te1, the second special effect is executed, and the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to green. However, on this display screen 95a, the countdown display of the number of remaining games is not executed, and the number of remaining games is not specified.

The number of game times executed after the end of the special game state at the timing of te2 in the fourth normal game state has reached the upper limit (ceiling). In this game round, the effect of normal deviation (complete deviation) that does not correspond to reach is executed, and the symbol combination corresponding to normal deviation (complete deviation) is stopped and displayed.

At the timing of te3 after that, the number of game times executed during the fourth normal game state has reached the end reference number of times, and the game state has shifted from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state. .. In the first game round that shifts to the first normal game state, the effect of normal deviation (complete deviation) that does not correspond to reach is executed, the symbol combination corresponding to complete deviation is stopped and displayed, and at the timing of te4 when the game round ends. It has quickly returned to the 4th normal gaming state. In this way, the background color on the display screen 95a remains green even during the continuous transition from the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state.

According to the fourth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a big hit result, high frequency support is provided. It shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to mode A. In the high-frequency support mode A, the winning of the second operating port 92 occurs frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if a special deviation result is obtained, the game may shift to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In this case, a special effect is executed. If the ceiling is reached during the 4th normal game state, which results in a special deviation result and the transition is triggered by the special deviation result, the special effect executed when the ceiling is reached during the 1st normal game state, and The same effect is performed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ceiling look as if it were variable. Then, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the above-mentioned mimicry effect can be more preferably exhibited by not executing the above-mentioned effect for reaching the ceiling and obscuring the arrival at the ceiling. .. If the set end reference number of times <the number of games to reach the ceiling is set when shifting to the fourth normal game state as a result of special deviation, an effect different from the above effect is executed. This is preferable in order to exert the above-mentioned mimicry effect.

In the case of high-frequency support mode A → low-frequency support mode → high-frequency support mode A, by continuing the display for suggesting a series of modes at least from the previous high-frequency support mode A to low-frequency support mode. , The above-mentioned mimicry effect can be more preferably exhibited.

<Modification example 1>
In the fourth embodiment, when the end reference number of times set in the case of special deviation matches the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling or is larger than the remaining number of times, the first normal gaming state The configuration is such that the same effect (second special effect) as when reaching the ceiling inside is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. Only when the number of end reference times set in the case of special deviation is greater than the remaining number of times to reach the ceiling, the same production as when reaching the ceiling during the first normal game state (second special production) May be configured to execute.

<Modification 2>
In the fourth embodiment, when the end reference number of times set in the case of special deviation matches the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling or is larger than the remaining number of times, the first normal gaming state The configuration is such that the same effect (second special effect) as when reaching the ceiling inside is executed, but it is not always necessary to completely standardize both effects. If the end reference number of times set in the case of special deviation matches the remaining number of times until reaching the ceiling, or if it is larger than the remaining number of times, if it becomes special deviation during the first normal game state It suffices if the effect to be executed and the effect to be executed when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state are executed so that the player recognizes that they are the same as the latter. ..

<Modification example 3>
In the fourth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the structure is not specified, but it is also possible to specify the ceiling arrival. For example, a message indicating the arrival at the ceiling may be displayed on the display screen 95a, or the BGM output from the speaker unit 29 may be changed to clearly indicate the arrival at the ceiling.

<Modification example 4>
In the fourth embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by a special deviation, the player returns to the fourth normal game state through the first normal game state. It is also possible to set the variable display time of the pattern of the operation port display unit in the first normal game state as the variable display time corresponding to the reach display. In this way, it is preferable to secure the variation display time of the game times in the first normal game state in order to execute the continuous effect (promotion effect) of the fourth normal game state in the game times.

<Modification 5>
In the fourth embodiment, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) at the end of the special game state, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game count counter may be reset at the time of transition to the special game state, or the game count counter may be reset during the special game state. It is also possible to configure the game count counter to be reset when the high frequency support mode ends.

<Modification 6>
When the special deviation result A is set, the end reference number (20 times) is less than the number of games executed from the end of the high frequency support mode B to the ceiling, and the special deviation result C is obtained. The end reference number of times (260 times) set in is specified to be larger than the number of games executed from the end of the high frequency support mode B to the arrival at the ceiling. That is, when the special deviation result A is obtained, whether or not the high frequency support mode A can be continued until the ceiling is reached depends on the timing, while when the special deviation result C is obtained, the high frequency support until the ceiling is reached is determined. The configuration is such that mode A can be continued. By changing this, the end reference number of times (20 times) set when the special deviation result A is obtained is less than the number of games (300 times) to reach the ceiling, and is set when the special deviation result C is obtained. The end reference number of times (for example, 310 times) may be specified to be larger than the number of games to reach the ceiling (300 times).

<Fifth Embodiment>
In the first embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the player shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. The structure is designed to curb excessive investment. In such a configuration, even if the player is rescued by shifting to the fourth normal game state, the game is delayed because it takes time to enjoy the benefits of the relief (such as throwing out a ball due to a big hit). The impression that you are doing can be strong. In the 4th normal game state, the 2nd operating port 92 is frequently won and the number of holds increases, which makes it easier to shorten the variable display time. However, this 4th normal game state corresponds to the low probability mode. Therefore, since the probability of winning a jackpot based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 does not change, it is assumed that it will be difficult to completely dispel the above-mentioned concerns.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special gaming state (the jackpot gaming state or the V jackpot gaming state described later in the present embodiment) reaches the upper limit (ceiling), One of the features is that the above-mentioned concerns are resolved by shifting to a chance zone (a special game state described later) in which the probability of winning a jackpot is substantially increased. Hereinafter, a specific configuration for exerting the function will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80B (game board 80aB) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. The arrangement of various game parts provided in the game area PE has been changed. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80B according to the present embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 67. FIG. 67 is a front view of the game board unit 80B.

(Game board unit 80B)
The game board 80aB is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83B, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83B, these game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payment of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player.

Further, in the game board 80aB, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability. An out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aB, and the game ball that has not entered the various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

The actuating port unit 82A has a first actuating port 91A and a second actuating port 92A arranged directly below the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. Have. Of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, the latter is provided with an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). When the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is set to the low frequency support mode, it is practically impossible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A, and by shifting to the high frequency support mode, the second operating port 92A is reached. Will be allowed to win.

The game board 80aB is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aB, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. In that respect, it is the same as that of the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83B and the through gate 84A. , The game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83B, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of 91A, the second operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83B, and the through gate 84A has been changed. The game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the variable winning device 83B is different from that of the variable winning device 83 shown in the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the specific configuration of the variable winning device 83B will be supplementarily described with reference to FIG. 68. FIG. 68 is a schematic view showing the internal structure of the variable winning device 83B.

(Variable winning device 83B)
Inside the variable winning device 83B, a ball passage 332B through which a game ball flowing into the entrance (large winning opening 331B) of the variable winning device 83B passes is formed. The ball passage 332B branches into the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage 335B at the intermediate position, and the flow destination of the game ball is directed to the first branch passage 334B side and the second branch passage 335B side at this branch portion. A switchable flow path switching member 336B is provided. The drive unit (specifically, the solenoid) for the flow path switching member 336B is connected to the main control device 162 and operates based on the drive signal from the main control device 162. The flow path switching member 336B stands by at a protruding position protruding into the ball passage 332B in a state where a drive signal is not input from the main control device 162 (non-excitation state), and is in a state where a drive signal is input (excitation state). ) Is configured to stand by at a retracted position where protrusion to the ball passage 332B is avoided.

In the state where the flow path switching member 336B is arranged at the protruding position, the inlet portion of the first branch passage 334B is blocked by the flow path switching member 336B. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the first branch passage 334B is avoided, and the game balls flow into the second branch passage 335B.

When the drive unit drive signal for the flow path switching member 336B is output from the main control device 162 and the drive unit is in the excited state, the flow path switching member 336B moves to the retracted position where the protrusion to the ball passage 332B is avoided. The entrance portion of the first branch passage 334B is opened. As a result, the inflow destination of the game ball is changed. In this state, the inflow of the game balls that have reached the branch portion into the second branch passage 335B is avoided, and the game balls flow into the first branch passage 334B. The movement of the flow path switching member 336B is predetermined by the result of a lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A.

An upstream side detection sensor 391d is arranged in a portion of the ball passage 332B that is upstream of the branch portion, and a portion that is downstream of the branch portion, specifically, the first branch passage 334B and the second branch passage. Downstream detection sensors 338B and 339B are arranged in the branch passage 335B. The upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338B and 339B are connected to the main control device 162, and the main control device 162 goes to the variable winning device 83B based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d. The presence or absence of a prize is specified, and if a prize is generated, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Further, the remaining state of the game ball is monitored based on the detection information (detection signal) from the upstream side detection sensor 391d and the downstream side detection sensors 338B and 339B.

In the main control device 162 shown in the present embodiment, it is specified that the ball has entered the first branch passage 334B by the detection information (detection signal) from the downstream detection sensor 338B attached to the first branch passage 334B. If this is the case, the support mode after the end of the special game state (detailed in the V jackpot game state described later) is switched to the high frequency support mode (detailed in the high frequency support mode B). In the present embodiment, the first branch passage 334B corresponds to the "advantageous entry portion" or "V", and the winning of the first branch passage 334B is also referred to as "V winning".

(Reserved ball storage area)
Next, in the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 69.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is a first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a hold area Ra for the second operation port and a hold area Rb for the second operation port that stores each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the second operation port 92A. doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Then, when the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first operation port, the hold area for the first operation port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment, the low probability mode in which the probability of winning a jackpot is relatively low as the lottery mode in which the lottery is performed based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 is relative to the probability of winning a jackpot. A high-probability mode is provided. In other words, the winning / failing table for the operating port to be referred to is switched according to the lottery mode. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the winning / failing lottery for the operating port is executed with reference to the same winning / failing table in any gaming state, which is the same as that of the first embodiment. Are different. Further, the configuration is different from that of the first embodiment in that the configuration is such that different winning / failing tables are referred to depending on the winning destination of the game ball. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 70A, in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot are "7" and "307". , "507", a total of three. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. And all the random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200.

As shown in FIG. 70 (b), in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the random number values (that is, winning information) for winning the jackpot are "7" and "307". , "507", a total of three. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. In addition, in this pass / fail table, a total of 60 pieces of "5", "15", "25", "35", "45" ... "575", "585", "595" correspond to special hits. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the big hit or the special hit correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200 and the special hit probability is 1/10.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A does not include the special deviation shown in the first embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A may be configured to be a special loss, or the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A may be a special loss. It may be configured so that it can be a special deviation in both the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

Next, the distribution table for each of the operating ports 91A and 92A will be described with reference to FIG. 71.

(Distribution table for operating port)
In the distribution table for the first operating port 91A, a total of 27 values of "0" to "26" among the values of the type counters C2 of "0" to "30" correspond to the 6R jackpot, and "27". ~ "29", a total of 3 pieces, correspond to the 10R jackpot. That is, when a big hit is won, about 90% of it becomes a 6R big hit, and the remaining 10% becomes a 10R big hit.

On the other hand, in the distribution table for the second operating port 92A, a total of 15 values of "0" to "14" among the values of the type counters C2 of "0" to "30" correspond to the 6R jackpot. A total of 15 pieces, "15" to "29", correspond to the 10R jackpot. That is, when the jackpot is won, the probability of winning the 6R jackpot and the 10R jackpot is 50%, respectively.

For the 6R jackpot and the 10R jackpot, there is a difference in the number of rounds in the open / close execution mode. The number of rounds in the former is "6", while the number of rounds in the latter is "10". In other words, if you win the 10R jackpot, you have a chance to increase the number of balls you have at once.

Further, in the case of a 6R jackpot and a 10R jackpot, a gaming state in which the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the jackpot gaming state (first special gaming state or second special gaming state). Move to. This high-frequency support mode B-compatible game state is continued until the number of game times executed after the end of the jackpot game state, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A reaches the end reference number, and the end reference number is reached. When is reached, the support by the high frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 6R jackpot, "6 times" is set as the end reference number, and in the case of a 10R jackpot, "100 times" is set as the end reference number.

If the above special hit is achieved in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the game shifts to the special winning gaming state, the variable winning device 83B is opened for a predetermined time, and the variable winning device 83B The flow path switching member 336B moves from the protruding position to the retracted position. As a result, a prize (V prize) to the advantageous ball portion 334B is allowed. Then, when a prize (V prize) is generated in the advantageous ball-entry portion 334B, a 5RV jackpot is obtained, and after the end of the special hit gaming state, the player shifts to the V jackpot gaming state (FIG. 72 (a)). reference).

After the end of the V jackpot game state, the game state shifts to the high frequency support mode B compatible game state. This high-frequency support mode B-compatible game state is continued until the number of game times executed after the end of the V jackpot game state, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A reaches the end reference number, and the end reference When the number of times is reached, the support by the high frequency support mode B ends. In the case of a 5RV jackpot, "6 times" is set as the above-mentioned end reference number of times.

Here, in the present embodiment, during the game state (first special game state or second special game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode B, the game times based on the winning of the second operating port 92A are the main. Even after the game progresses in this way, the end reference number of times is reached, and the game state shifts to the game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game times related to the second operating port 92A are continued by the remaining hold amount related to the second operating port 92A. It will be executed.

In the present embodiment, among the game states in which the game times are executed based on the winning of the operating port, the game states corresponding to the low frequency support mode and excluding the special game state described later are "normal". It is called "game state". Further, the special hit game state, the V jackpot game state, and the jackpot game state are referred to as "special game states".

In other words, in the case of a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot, the hit probability has been raised for a total of 10 times, which is the end reference number of times (6 times) + the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A (4 times). It becomes a stochastic state. During this time, the probability of a big hit or a special hit is about 65%. In addition, in the case of a 10R jackpot, a total of 10 times, which is the end reference number of times (100 times) + the upper limit of the storage number of the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A (4 times), is a high probability state in which the hit probability is raised. Become. During this period, the probability of becoming a big hit or a special hit is almost 100% (see FIG. 72 (b)).

In the present embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state shifts to the high frequency support mode A compatible game state (third special game state). In that respect, it has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. In the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the number of games executed after the end of the open / close execution mode, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A is the end reference number of times (time reduction number: 1 time in this embodiment). ), And when the end reference number of times is reached, the game state (normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode is entered.

In the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the player reaches the ceiling, the total number of times of the end reference number (1 time) + the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A (4 times) is hit. It becomes a high probability state (chance zone) where the probability is raised. During this period, the probability of winning a big hit or a special hit is about 40%, and the winning probability will be temporarily increased by reaching the ceiling.

In the present embodiment, "200 times" is set for the number of games to reach the ceiling, and when the game shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A by reaching the ceiling, The ceiling is reset when the game state ends (the game count counter is cleared to 0). That is, it is configured to shift to the above chance zone in a cycle of 200 games.

The high-frequency support mode in the present embodiment is also roughly divided into a high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the ceiling is reached and a high-frequency support mode B that shifts when a jackpot or V prize is won. The difference is provided so that the support by the electric accessory 93A is given preferential treatment over the high frequency support mode A. However, for the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, the end reference number is once, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A reaches the upper limit, it is not necessary to launch any more game balls. .. As a result, it is possible to prevent a large increase in investment in a situation where the relief function by reaching the ceiling is being exerted.

Next, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 73 and 74, the periodic processing (timer interrupt processing, normal processing) executed by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is mainly different from the first embodiment. explain.

(Timer interrupt processing)
As shown in FIG. 73, regarding the timer interrupt processing in the present embodiment, the V prize processing in step S2406 is added to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 20) shown in the first embodiment. ing. Although the details will be described later, the presence or absence of winning (V winning) in the advantageous winning portion 334B of the variable winning device 83B is monitored by this V winning process.

(Normal processing)
As shown in FIG. 74, in the normal processing, first, the external signal output processing is executed in step S2501. In the following step S2502, the variation type counter CS is updated, and in step S2503, the game times control process is executed. A part of the game times control process in step S2503 (process for switching the support mode) has been changed from the first embodiment. Details of the support mode switching process in this embodiment will be described later.

After that, the transition process to the special hit game state is executed in step S2504, the V distribution setting process is executed in step S2505, and the transition process to the jackpot game state is executed in step S2506. Details of each of the processes of steps S2504 to S2506 will be described later.

In the following step S2507, the through gate control process is executed, and in step S2508, the electric service support process is executed. Then, in step S2509, the game ball launch control process is executed. Since each of the processes of steps S2507 to S2509 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

In step S2510, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not one cycle (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly updated (steps S251 to S2512).

Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 75, a process for switching the support mode executed as a part of the game time control process in step S2503 will be described.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support modes A and B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2602. In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the game time this time is the game time related to the second operating port 92A. If a negative determination is made in step S2602, the process for switching the support mode is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2602, the process proceeds to step S2603.

In step S2603, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S2604, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S2604, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2604, the process proceeds to step S2605, and the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag or high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 435 is deleted. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode of the electric accessory 93A is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S2601, if a negative determination is made in step S2601, the process proceeds to step S2606. In step S2606, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter stored in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 has reached the upper limit (corresponding to 200 game times). If a negative determination is made in step S2606, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S2606, the process proceeds to step S2607.

In step S2607, "1" is set in the continuation number counter. Then, in the following step S2608, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the main switching process is terminated. That is, when the ceiling is reached, the support mode is quickly switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A without going through the special gaming state.

Next, the transition process to the special hit gaming state in step S2504 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 76 and 77.

(Transition process to special hit game state)
As shown in FIG. 76, in the process of shifting to the special hit game state, first, in step S2701, it is determined whether or not the big hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is being executed, is stored at the start of the jackpot game, and is erased when the jackpot game ends.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed (the jackpot game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2702, and it is determined whether or not the special hit game is being executed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special hit game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435. The special hit game flag is a flag indicating that the special hit game is being executed.

If it is determined that the special winning game is not being executed (the special winning game flag is not stored), the process proceeds to step S2703, and it is determined whether or not the special winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435. .. That is, it is determined whether or not the winning state is a special hit. The special hit flag is a flag stored in various flag storage areas 435 when a special win is obtained in the winning / losing lottery in the above-mentioned game time control process.

When it is determined that the special hit flag is stored, it is determined in step S2704 whether or not it is the end timing of the game round. If it is not the end timing of the game round, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated as it is. Further, even if an affirmative determination (determination that the big hit game is being executed) is made in step S2701 or a negative determination (determination that the special hit flag is not stored) is made in step S2703, this special hit game is also made. End the transition process to the state.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the game round, the start process of the special hit game is executed in step S2705. In the start process, the special winning game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435, and it is checked that the variable winning device 83B is in the closed state before the start of the special winning game. Further, in this start process, an opening period setting process for waiting without starting the opening of the variable winning device 83B at the start of the special winning game is executed. In the opening period setting process, values corresponding to the opening period are set in the opening timer counters provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. This set value (counter value) is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S2706, a process of setting "1" in the round counter RC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is executed to set the number of times the round game is executed in the special hit game.

In the following step S2707, an opening command is set. This set opening command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output processing in the normal processing (FIG. 74). The notification / effect control device 140 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed.

In the following step S2708, after executing the external signal setting process, the transition process to the special hit game state is completed. In the external signal setting process, the signal output state of the output terminal for the special hit signal provided on the external output terminal plate 213 is set to the special hit signal output state. As a result, when the output terminal for the special hit signal is connected to the management control device on the game hall side, the special hit signal is output to the management control device, and the pachinko machine 10 is special in the management control device. It is possible to grasp that a hit has occurred.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination (determination that the special hit game is being executed) is made in step S2702, the process proceeds to step S2709 to determine whether or not the waiting time for the opening has elapsed. If the waiting time for the opening has not elapsed, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated as it is.

If the waiting time for the opening has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2710, and a special hit opening / closing process for opening / closing the large winning opening 331B of the variable winning device 83B is executed. Here, the opening / closing process for special hits will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 77.

(Opening and closing processing for special hits)
In the special hit opening / closing process, first, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not the large winning opening 331B of the variable winning device 83B is being opened. Specifically, the determination is made based on the driving state of the driving unit (variable winning driving unit) for the shutter 333B of the variable winning device 83B. When the large winning opening 331B is not open, it is determined in step S2802 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0", and in step S2803, the value of the first timer counter TC1 of the RAM 404 is "0". It is determined whether or not it is.

If the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" or the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", the main opening / closing process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" and the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0", the process proceeds to step S2804, and the variable winning device 83B is opened for the shutter 333B. The drive unit of is in the drive state.

In the following step S2805, "5000" (corresponding to 10 sec) is set in the first timer counter TC1 as the opening time of the variable winning device 83B. Then, in step S2806, the processing for setting the maximum number of winnings to the variable winning device 83B in the special winning game is performed. Specifically, "10" is set in the first winning counter PC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404.

After that, in step S2807, the release command is set, and the opening / closing process for this special hit is completed. This set release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output process in the normal process (FIG. 74).

Returning to the explanation of step S2801, if it is determined in step S2801 that the large winning opening 331B is in the open state, the process proceeds to step S2808, and whether or not the value of the first timer counter TC1 is "0" is determined. judge. When the value of the first timer counter TC1 is not "0", it is determined in step S2809 whether or not the variable winning device 83B has been won. If no prize has been won, the opening / closing process for this special hit is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if a prize has been won, a prize command is set in step S2810. This winning command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 by the external output processing in the normal processing (FIG. 74). In the following step S2811, the value of the first winning counter PC1 is subtracted by "1". Then, in step S2812, it is determined whether or not the value of the first winning counter PC1 is "0", and if it is not "0", the opening / closing process for this special hit is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative judgment is made in step S2812 or step S2808, it means that the closing condition of the large winning opening 331B has been satisfied. In this case, in step S2813, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is set to the non-drive state in order to close the large winning opening 331B.

In the following step S2814, the value of the round counter RC1 is subtracted by "1", and the ending start process is executed in step S2815. In the start process, an ending waiting time for waiting without starting the next game round for the ending of the special hit game is set. Specifically, the ending standby time stored in advance in the ROM 403 is set in the ending timer counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The value of the timer counter for the ending is subtracted by "1" each time the timer interrupt process is executed.

Then, in step S2816, after setting the ending command, the main opening / closing process is terminated. This set ending command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output processing in the normal processing (FIG. 74).

Returning to the description of the transition process to the special hit game state of FIG. 76, after executing the special hit opening / closing process of step S2710, it is determined in step S2711 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is "0". do. Further, in step S2712, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the transition process to the special hit game state is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the end processing of the special hit game is executed in step S2713, and then the special hit game state is entered. Ends the migration process of. Here, the end processing of the special hit game in step S2713 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 78.

(End processing of special hit game)
In the end processing of the special hit game, first, in step S2901, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. This V winning flag is stored in the V winning process in step S2406 in the timer interrupt process of FIG. 73.

Here, the V winning process in step S2406 and the V distribution setting process in step S2505 in the normal process as a process related to V winning will be described. First, the V distribution setting process in step S307 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 79.

(V distribution setting process)
In the V distribution setting process, first, in step S3001, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the special winning game. When it is the start timing, “500” (corresponding to 0.1 sec) corresponding to 1 sec is set in the second timer counter TC2 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 in step S3002. The value (counter value) set in the second timer counter TC2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

In the following step S3003, "1" is set in the distribution number counter area HC provided in the various counter areas 434. The data value (counter value) stored in the distribution count counter area HC is for the MPU 402 to specify the number of operations of the flow path switching member 336B.

If a negative determination is made in step S3001, or after the process of step S3003 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3004. In step S3004, by grasping the drive state of the drive unit for the distribution member, whether or not the flow path switching member 336B is located at the evacuation position which is the distribution side (V winning side) to the advantageous ball entry unit 334B. Is determined. If the flow path switching member 336B is not located in the retracted position, that is, if it is located in the protruding position, the process proceeds to step S3005 to determine whether or not the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0". .. If the value of the third timer counter TC3 is not "0", the main distribution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the value of the third timer counter TC3 is "0", it is determined in step S3006 whether or not the value of the distribution number counter area HC is "0".

If a negative determination is made in step S3006, that is, if the value of the distribution count counter area HC is "1", the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the retracted position (V winning side) in step S3007. In the following step S3008, "4000" (corresponding to 8 sec) is set in the third timer counter TC3. After the execution of step S3008 or when a positive determination is made in step S3006, the main distribution setting process ends.

Returning to the description of step S3004, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3004, that is, when the flow path switching member 336B is located at the retracted position (V winning side), the third timer counter TC3 is set in step S3009. It is determined whether or not the value is "0". That is, it is determined whether or not the period for causing the flow path switching member 336B to stand by at the retracted position (V winning side) has elapsed. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3009, after the flow path switching member 336B is displaced to the protruding position in step S3010, a process of subtracting the value of the distribution number counter area HC by "1" is executed in step S3011. .. After the execution of step S3011 or when a negative determination is made in step S3009, the main distribution setting process ends.

Next, the V winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 80.

(V prize processing)
In the V winning process, first, in step S3101, it is determined whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, and whether or not V winning has occurred based on the detection state of the V winning detection sensor 338B provided in the variable winning device 83B (the detection sensor). Whether or not the game ball has passed through the detection area of 338B) is determined.

If it is determined that the V prize has occurred, it is determined in step S3103 whether or not the V prize is valid. The valid period is a predetermined period determined in advance, and for example, a period during which the special hit game is executed and a V-side distribution period of the flow path switching member 336B are set as the valid period. If it is determined that the period is not valid, the process proceeds to step S3104, an error command is set as a transmission target to the notification / effect control device 140, and then the V winning process is terminated. The set error command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 74), and the notification / effect control device 140 controls the display so that a predetermined error notification is executed. It controls the device 410, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the validity period is in effect, the process proceeds to step S3105, and the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. In the following step S3106, a V winning command is set. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification / effect control device 140 that a V winning has occurred, and the set V winning command is notified / produced by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 74). It is transmitted to the control device 140. In the notification / effect control device 140, when a V prize command is received, the symbol display device 95, the lamp unit 26, and the speaker unit 29 perform an effect of notifying the occurrence of the V prize or congratulating the V prize. The display control device 410 and the like are controlled so as to be performed.

After the execution of step S3106, if an affirmative determination is made in step S3101 or a negative determination is made in step S3102, the V winning process is terminated.

Returning to the description of the end processing of the special hit game of FIG. 78, if it is determined in step S2901 that the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the process proceeds to step S2902 and the various flags of the RAM 404. Set the V winning flag in the storage area 435. The V winning flag is a flag for the MPU 402 to know that the V jackpot game should be started.

In the following step S2903, a process of erasing the V winning flag, the special winning flag, and the special winning game flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 is executed. In the following step S2904, the V winning command is set, and then the end processing of the special winning game is ended. The V winning command is a command for notifying the notification / effect control device 140 that the V jackpot game is started and the type of the V jackpot game, and the set V winning command is a normal process (FIG. 74). It is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 by external output processing. The notification / effect control device 140 controls the display control device 410 and the like so that when the V winning command is received, the effect of notifying that the V jackpot game is started is executed by the symbol display device 95 and the like. ..

On the other hand, if a negative determination (determination that the V winning flag is not stored) is made in step S2901, the special hit flag and the special hit game flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are determined in step S2905. Is deleted, and then the end processing of this special hit game is ended.

Next, the process of shifting to the jackpot gaming state in step S2506 in the normal process (FIG. 74) will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 81. Of the various processes included in this transition process, the same processes as those included in the above-mentioned transition process to the special winning game state will be simplified as appropriate.

(Transition process to the jackpot game state)
In the process of shifting to the jackpot game state, first, in step S3201, it is determined whether or not the special hit game is being executed. If it is determined that the special hit game is being executed, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated, while if it is determined that the special hit game is not being executed, the process proceeds to step S3202 and the jackpot game is performed. Determine if it is running.

If it is determined that the jackpot game is not being executed, it is determined in step S3203 whether or not the V winning flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. That is, it is determined whether or not the V jackpot game should be started. If it is determined that the V winning flag is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3204, and it is determined whether or not various jackpot flags are stored in the various flag storage areas 435. That is, it is determined whether or not to start a normal jackpot game that is not a V jackpot game.

If it is determined that the various jackpot flags are not stored, the transition process to the main jackpot game state is terminated, while if it is determined that the various jackpot flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3205 and the game times. It is determined whether or not it is the end timing of. If it is determined that it is not the end timing of the game round, the process of shifting to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

If it is determined in step S3205 that it is the end timing of the game round, or if it is determined in step S3203 that the V winning flag is stored, the process proceeds to step S3206 to execute the jackpot game start process. In the start process, the jackpot game flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, and the opening period setting process is executed.

In the following step S3207, the round setting process is executed. Specifically, it is determined which of the 6R jackpot flag, the 10R jackpot flag, and the 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435. If it is determined that these flags are stored, the process proceeds to step S3208, and the round counter RC1 provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is set. Specifically, when the 6R jackpot flag is stored, "6" is set in the round counter RC1, and when the 10R jackpot flag is stored, "10" is set in the round counter RC1 and 5RV. When the jackpot flag is stored, "5" is set in the round counter RC1.

After the execution of step S3207, the opening command is set in step S3208, the external signal setting process is further executed in step S3209, and then the transition process to the main jackpot game state is completed.

If it is determined in step S3202 that the jackpot game is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3210 to determine whether or not the opening period has elapsed. If the opening period has not passed, the process of shifting to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the opening period has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3211 to execute a jackpot opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the jackpot 331B of the variable winning device 83B. In the jackpot opening / closing process, when the jackpot 331B of the variable winning device 83B is closed, the drive unit for the shutter 333B is set to the driving state on condition that the round counter RC1 is "1" or more. This opens the big winning opening 331B. If the large winning opening 331B is open, a predetermined time (30 sec) has passed since the opening of the large winning opening 331B, or a predetermined number (10) of game balls have been won. Is a condition, the driving of the driving unit for the shutter 333B is stopped, and the large winning opening 331B is closed.

After executing the jackpot opening / closing process in step S3211, it is determined in step S3212 whether or not the value of the round counter RC1 is “0”. Further, in step S3213, it is determined whether or not the waiting time for the ending has elapsed. If the value of the round counter RC1 is not "0" or the waiting time for the ending has not elapsed, the process of shifting to the main jackpot game state is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the round counter RC1 is "0" and the waiting time for the ending has elapsed, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game is executed in step S3214, and then the main jackpot game End the transition process to the state. Here, the transition process at the end of the jackpot game in step S3214 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

(Transition process at the end of the jackpot game)
In the transition process at the end of the jackpot game, first, in step S3301, the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3302, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 6R jackpot or a 5RV jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the 6R jackpot flag or the 5RV jackpot flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303, and "6" is set in the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434. As a result, the high-frequency support mode B is continued until the number of games executed after the jackpot game ends (specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A) reaches six.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S3302, that is, if the jackpot game this time is triggered by a 10R jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3304, and "100" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode B is continued until the number of games executed after the jackpot game ends (specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A) reaches 100 times.

After executing each process of steps S3303 and S3304, the process proceeds to step S3305. In step S3305, the game count counters in various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). After that, the process proceeds to step S3306, and the various flags for the jackpot game state stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are erased to end the transition process at the end of the jackpot.

(About the basic game flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

As described above, in the normal gaming state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, the player launches a game ball on the left route (so-called left-handed) and plays the game aiming at winning a prize in the first operating port 91A.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, a winning / failing lottery is executed based on the winning. If a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot is achieved by the hit / fail lottery, the variable winning device 83B shifts to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation operation of the game ball launching handle 41 and launches the game ball to the right route for the game. Will be done (so-called right-handed). After the end of the jackpot game state, the player shifts to the above-mentioned chance zone (hereinafter referred to as a special game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the special game state, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the first special game state in which the reference number of end of the game times related to the second operating port 92A is "6" and the electric accessory The support mode by 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the second special game state in which the end reference number of game times related to the second operating port 92A is "100" is included, and the big hit triggered by the 6R big hit. After the game state ends, the player shifts to the first special game state, and after the jackpot game state triggered by the 10R jackpot ends, the player shifts to the second special game state.

In the first special gaming state, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode B, so that a prize is easily generated in the second operating port 92A. Only the game ball flowing down the right route can win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, at the time of transition to the first special game state, a notification prompting the player to continue right-handed even after the end of the jackpot game is executed.

The first special game state and the second special game state will be continued until the number of times the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed reaches the above-mentioned end reference number (6 times or 100 times), which has already been described. As described above, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is given preferential treatment so that the probability of becoming a special win is higher than the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, including the special winning. In addition, the actual winning probability will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/10.

Further, in the special gaming state, while the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode, the second operating port 92A is held by holding the second operating port 92A acquired during the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state. The fourth special game state in which the game times related to the above are executed is included. If neither the jackpot nor the special hit is won in either the first special game state or the second special game state (when all the results are lost), the game shifts to the fourth special game state. ..

In the present embodiment, the second operating port 92A has a holding function in which the storage upper limit of the number of holdings is four. Therefore, if four hold information related to the second operating port 92A is stored at the end of the high frequency support mode B, the second operating port 92A is reached four times even after the end of the high frequency support mode B. It will be possible to receive a winning or losing lottery based on the winning prize. That is, even if the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode and the game is internally in the normal game state, the special game state is as long as the number of holds related to the second operating port 92A at the end of the high-frequency support mode B. Is extended (continued). By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special hit or a big hit is about 35% in the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 92A four times. The total continuation rate including the game times executed during the first special game state is about 65%, and the total continuation rate including the game times executed during the second special game state is almost 100%. Become.

When all four game times in the fourth special game state are out of the normal game and all the reserved information related to the second operation port 92A is exhausted, the game returns to the normal game state. That is, if the hold related to the second operating port 92A is used up without any special hit or big hit occurring, the player is demoted from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state. That is, the actual winning probability decreases from 1/10 to 1/200. In this case, the player returns the firing mode of the game ball to left-handed, and again aims at the jackpot based on the winning of the first operating port 91A.

On the other hand, when a special hit is made in any of the first special game state, the second special game state, and the fourth special game state, the game shifts to the special hit game state. In the special winning game state, the special winning game in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed is executed in the high-frequency winning mode described above. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the variable winning device 83B, when a special hit occurs, the player strikes right to play the game. Then, when a V prize is generated in the special hit game, after the end of the special hit game, the variable winning device 83B shifts to the V jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds (5 rounds).

By the way, when the special winning game is executed in the high frequency winning mode, the opening time of the variable winning device 83B and the period during which the V winning is allowed are longer than the firing cycle (0.6 sec) of the game ball, and go to the right route. As long as the game ball is continuously fired, it is possible to easily generate a V prize.

After the V jackpot game state is completed, the state shifts to the first special game state. Further, when a big hit occurs in any of the first special game state, the second special game state, and the fourth special game state, the game shifts to the big hit game state. After the jackpot game state ends, if the jackpot gaming state is triggered by a 6R jackpot, the game shifts to the first special gaming state, and if the jackpot gaming state is triggered by a 10R jackpot, the second special game is played. Move to the state. In this way, by repeating big hits and special hits during the special game state, the player has a chance to greatly increase the number of balls he has.

In the special game state shown in the present embodiment, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode A, and the end reference number of the game times related to the second operating port 92A becomes "1" times. The state is included. In the third special gaming state, the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode A, so that a prize is easily generated in the second operating port 92A. Only the game ball flowing down the right route can win a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, at the time of transition to the third special gaming state, a notification prompting the player to strike right is executed.

Here, the ceiling is reset by resetting the game count counter when the V jackpot game state or the jackpot game state ends. Then, in the first normal game state, when the executed game times reach the ceiling, the game shifts to the third special game state.

The third special gaming state is continued until the number of times the game is executed related to the second operating port 92A reaches the above-mentioned end reference number (1 time), but as described above, the second operating port 92A In the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is given preferential treatment so that the probability of winning a special win is higher, and the actual winning probability including the special winning is 1 /. It will increase significantly from 200 to 1/10.

If a special hit occurs during the third special game state, the game shifts to the special hit game state, and when a V prize is generated during this special hit game state, the game shifts to the V jackpot game state. Then, after the end of the V jackpot game state, the state shifts to the first special game state. If a big hit occurs during the third special gaming state, the game shifts to the jackpot gaming state, and after the jackpot gaming state ends, the game shifts to the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state.

On the other hand, if none of the game times in the third special game state is won in either the big hit or the special hit (when all the results are lost), the game shifts to the fourth special game state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the second operating port 92A has a holding function in which the storage upper limit of the number of holdings is four. Therefore, if four hold information related to the second operating port 92A is stored at the end of the high frequency support mode A, the second operating port 92A is reached four times even after the end of the high frequency support mode A. It will be possible to receive a winning or losing lottery based on the winning prize. That is, even if the support mode shifts to the low-frequency support mode and the game is internally in the normal game state, the special game state is as long as the number of holds related to the second operating port 92A at the end of the high-frequency support mode A. Is extended (continued). By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special hit or a big hit is about 35% in the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 92A four times. Then, the total continuation rate including the game times executed during the third special game state is about 40%.

When all four game times in the fourth special game state are lost and all the reserved information related to the second operating port 92A is exhausted, the normal game state is restored. That is, if the hold related to the second operating port 92A is used up without any special hit or big hit occurring, the player is demoted from the special gaming state to the normal gaming state. In this case, the player returns the firing mode of the game ball to left-handed, and again aims at the jackpot based on the winning of the first operating port 91A.

When the game ball is launched to the right route, the first operating port 91A is prevented from winning a prize. However, there is a possibility that the hold information related to the first operating port 91A acquired during the normal gaming state remains immediately after the transition to the special gaming state, and the holding information related to the second operating port 92A has not been acquired. There is. Although the hold information related to the second operating port 92A is preferentially digested over the holding information related to the first operating port 91A, the holding information related to the second operating port 92A has been acquired. If not, the game times related to the first operating port 91A can be executed in the special game state. Regarding the lottery related to the second operating port 92A, although the difference in advantage is provided so as to be more advantageous to the player than the lottery related to the first operating port 91A, the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed. It is feared that the termination of the high-frequency support mode without being performed or being executed inadequately will be a great disadvantage to the player. In this regard, in the present embodiment, as described above, the end reference number of times of the high frequency support mode is set for each operating port, and the game times related to the first operating port 91A are executed during the special gaming state. Even so, it prevents the high-frequency support mode from ending before the game rounds related to the second operating port 92A are executed.

In the present embodiment, in the chance zone (special game state), a special effect for the chance zone, which is executed over a plurality of game times, is executed. Here, a configuration that is a prerequisite for the special effect for the chance zone, specifically, a pre-confirmation process that is executed as a part of a winning process for the operating port (see step S2403 in FIG. 73) in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162. This will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 84.

(Preliminary confirmation process)
In the pre-confirmation process, first, the pass / fail confirmation process is performed with reference to the hit / fail determination table for the operating port in step S3401 and the value of the hit random number counter C1 acquired in step S2403. Specifically, it is determined whether the reserved information acquired this time corresponds to a big hit and a special hit.

If the jackpot is supported, an affirmative judgment is made in step S3402, the process proceeds to step S3403, information indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot is stored in the RAM 404, and a hold command scheduled to be transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 is used. Store information indicating that it is a big hit.

If a special hit is supported, a negative determination is made in step S3402 and an affirmative determination is made in step S3404, and the process proceeds to step S3405. In step S3405, the RAM 404 stores information indicating that it is a special hit, and the notification / effect control device 140 stores information indicating that it is a special hit in the hold command scheduled to be transmitted.

If it corresponds to the deviation, a negative determination is made in each of step S3402 and step S3404, and the prior confirmation process is terminated as it is.

In the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140, it is possible to grasp in advance that a big hit or a special hit will be obtained from the information included in the hold command received from the main control device 162.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the number of games executed after the special game state (specifically, the jackpot game state or the V jackpot game state) ends, the number of games executed reaches the upper limit (ceiling). 3 It will shift to the special game state. The third special game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode A, and the special effect for the chance zone can be obtained by acquiring the hold information related to the second operation port 92A during the third special game state. It becomes possible to execute from the 3 special game state to the 4th special game state.

The special effects for the chance zone are the opening part that encourages the player to launch the game ball toward the second operating port 92A, and the game times that are executed in the third special game state and the fourth special game state that shifts immediately afterwards. It is composed of three parts: a main part in which the content of the production is determined based on all the game results of the above, and an ending part that functions as a connection to the special game state after the winning / failing result is clearly indicated. The opening part starts at the timing when the game round that reaches the ceiling ends, shifts to the main part at the timing when the first game round in the third special game state starts, and the ending part at the timing when the game round ends. Move to. After that, the ending part ends at the timing when the fourth special gaming state ends and the normal gaming state shifts to.

In this embodiment, a device is devised to prevent the ending part from becoming excessively long while ensuring a sufficient execution time of the main part of the special effect for the chance zone. Specifically, for the game times related to the second operating port 92A, which is executed after the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the special variation display is used as a table for determining the variation display time. The time table is referenced. Specifically, the fluctuation display time table for determining the fluctuation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A, which is executed immediately after reaching the ceiling, is the fluctuation referred to when determining the fluctuation display time in other cases. It is provided separately from the display time table.

As shown in the schematic view of FIG. 85, “60 sec” is set as the variable display time in the game times (for example, the 201st game times) related to the second operating port 92A executed immediately after reaching the ceiling. In the four game times (for example, the 202nd to 205th game times) related to the second operating port 92A executed thereafter (the same number as the holding upper limit related to the second operating port 92A), the variable display time is "0. "5 sec" is set. That is, the variation display time of the game times related to the second operating port 92A executed immediately after reaching the ceiling is longer than the sum of the variation display times of the four game times executed thereafter. This is a device for securing the playback time of the moving image, reducing the amount of data for the special effect for the chance zone, avoiding the shortage of holding related to the second operating port 92A, and suppressing the extension of the ending part.

Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the flow of the game when entering the chance zone will be supplementarily described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing the flow of the game when entering the chance zone, and illustrates a case where a special hit is made in the chance zone.

(Flow of the game when entering the chance zone)
At the timing of tf1 during the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game number of games executed after the end of the special game state is the 199th game, and at the timing of tf2, the number of games after the end of the special game state is 200. The game round, which is the second time to reach the ceiling, has started. All of these game times correspond to the out-of-game results. In the game that reaches the ceiling, the symbol combinations (“1” symbol, “3” symbol, “4” symbol) corresponding to the ceiling arrival are stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a (on the effective line) of the symbol display device 95. It is clearly stated to the player that the player will move to the chance zone when the ceiling is reached.

The support mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode A at the timing of tf3 when the game round to reach the ceiling is completed, and the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is for the chance zone corresponding to the chance zone (third special game state). The opening part of the special production will start. Specifically, at the timing of tf3, the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", and the game in the chance zone is in a waiting state until a prize is generated in the second operating port 92A. .. In the above opening part, "BONUS confirmed if the fairy can be caught" is displayed on the display screen 95a as a message indicating the start of the chance zone, and the BGM is switched to the one corresponding to the chance zone. Then, at the timing of tf3, a message (right-handed notification) prompting the launch of the game ball toward the right route is started.

After that, at the timing of tf4 when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs, the special production for the chance zone shifts from the opening part to the main part. As a result, the fairy character and the girl character chasing the fairy character are displayed on the display screen 95a. In the present embodiment, the final display (result display) in the main part is determined after the transition to the main part and the elapse of a predetermined waiting time. That is, it is determined at a predetermined timing in the main part whether to display the result indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured or the result display indicating that the fairy has failed to be captured.

In the example shown in FIG. 86, the number of holds related to the second operating port 92A has reached the upper limit at the timing of tf5 in the main part, specifically, the timing before the predetermined timing, and four of these holds. Eye hold corresponds to a special hit. Therefore, at the end of the main part, a result display indicating that the fairy has been successfully captured is executed, and it is clearly indicated that the player has been hit. The right-handed notification described above ends at the timing of tf5 when the number of holds related to the second operating port 92A reaches the upper limit.

After that, at the timing of tf6 when the game round in the third special game state ends, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, and the special effect for the chance zone shifts to the ending part. When the electric accessory 93A is in the open state at the timing of tf6, it is forcibly switched to the closed state, and further winning of the second operating port 92A is avoided.

After the transition from the third special gaming state to the fourth special gaming state, the remaining hold relating to the second operating port 92A is promptly exhausted at the timing of tf6, the timing of tf7, the timing of tf8, and the timing of tf9. In the example shown in FIG. 86, the last game round related to the second operating port 92A corresponds to the special hit, and the game shifts to the special hit game state at the timing of tf10 when the game round ends. At the timing of tf10, the special effect for the chance zone (detailed ending part) ends, and the effect for the special hit game state is executed.

According to the fifth embodiment described in detail above, if the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a winning result, high frequency support is provided. It shifts to the third special game state corresponding to mode A. In the high frequency support mode A, it is possible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A, and in the judgment (lottery) based on the winning in the second operating port 92A, not only the big hit result but also the special winning result can be obtained. Therefore, the advantage (winning probability) in the determination is greatly increased. In other words, by reaching the ceiling, it will shift to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous gaming state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player shifts to the chance zone when reaching the ceiling, the player's willingness to play can be suitably stimulated. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

When the ball reaches the ceiling, a prize is generated in the second operating port 92A, which not only suppresses the decrease in the number of balls held, but also raises the probability of transition to the special gaming state (big hit gaming state or special hit gaming state). It becomes. In such a configuration, even if the stay period in the high frequency support mode A is shortened, the benefit can be suitably exhibited, so that the extension of the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably suppressed.

The number of games that reach the ceiling is reset when the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. Such a configuration is preferable in order to realize a configuration in which the ceiling is shallow, the benefits of the ceiling are reduced, and a weak ceiling function is exhibited in a short cycle. That is, it is preferable in suppressing the monotony of the game.

The number of games related to the end reference number of times is counted when the number of games related to the second operating port 92A is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from being not enjoyed well.

The probability of a special winning result in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is 1/10, and the maximum number of stored information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port and the above-mentioned end reference number of times. The sum of and is specified to be the same as the reciprocal of the above probability. In this way, if the upper limit of storage and the reference number of ends are specified, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

<Modification example 1>
In the fifth embodiment, the end reference number of the third special game state (6 times) that shifts when the ceiling is reached is compared with the end reference number (6 times) of the first special game state that shifts when the special hit is triggered. (1 time) is configured to be less, but it is not limited to this. It may be configured so that the number of end reference times of the third special game state, which shifts when the ceiling is reached, is larger than the end reference number of times of the first special game state, which shifts when the special hit is triggered. The number of termination reference times of the first special gaming state that shifts when a hit is triggered and the number of termination reference counts of the third special gaming state that shifts when reaching the ceiling may be the same.

<Modification 2>
In the fifth embodiment, the ceiling is reached as compared with the end reference number of times of the first special game state (6 times) and the end reference number of times of the second special game state (100 times), which are shifted by the big hit. The number of times the end reference number (1 time) of the third special game state to be transferred is smaller, but the present invention is not limited to this. Compared to the end reference number of the first special game state and the end reference number of the second special game state that shifts when the jackpot is triggered, the end reference number of the third special game state that shifts when the ceiling is reached will be larger. The number of end reference times of the first special game state, the number of end reference times of the second special game state, and the number of end reference times of the third special game state, which shifts when the ceiling is reached. And may be configured to be the same number.

<Modification example 3>
In the fifth embodiment described above, in the case of a special hit, the variable winning device 83B is opened in a high frequency winning mode and the V winning is substantially confirmed. However, the variable winning device 83B is used as a special winning. The first special hit is opened in the high frequency winning mode and the V winning is substantially confirmed, and the second special hit in which the variable winning device 83B is opened in the low frequency winning mode and the V winning is practically impossible is provided. You may.

<Modification example 4>
In the fifth embodiment, the winning probability of the jackpot in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port is 1/200 and the number of games to reach the ceiling is 200 times. In other words, the number of games that reach the ceiling matches the reciprocal of the winning probability. It is also possible to change this so that the number of games that reach the ceiling is an integer less than the reciprocal of the winning probability (for example, 50 times, 100 times, 150 times).

<Modification 5>
In the normal gaming state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the gaming progresses based on the winning of the first operating port 91A. In this case, the probability of a jackpot result is 1/200, and the number of games that reach the ceiling described above is defined to be the same as the reciprocal of the probability. It is also possible to change this and specify the number of games to reach the ceiling so that the number is less than the reciprocal of the probability. In this way, if the number of games that reach the ceiling is specified, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the probability of becoming a big hit or a special hit during the special gaming state (chance zone) that shifts when the ceiling is reached is about 40%, and the transition to the chance zone is triggered when the ceiling is reached. Approximately half of them are configured so that the chance zone can be completed without winning either a big hit or a special hit. In other words, by setting the ceiling low, the frequency of transition to the chance zone triggered by reaching the ceiling is increased, while by configuring the configuration to prevent the advantage in the chance zone from becoming excessively high, the monotony of the game is suppressed. It was configured to be. The present embodiment is different from the fifth embodiment in that the relief function of the player is strengthened by increasing the benefit when reaching the ceiling while raising the ceiling. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the fifth embodiment. First, a hit / fail table for the operating port will be described with reference to FIG. 87.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 87 (a), in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "307", There are a total of three "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. And all the random number values that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200.

As shown in FIG. 87 (b), in the winning / failing table referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "307", There are a total of three "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "307", and "507" correspond to the big hit. In addition, in this pass / fail table, a total of "3", "5", "13", "15", "23", "25" ... "583", "585", "593", "595" 120 pieces correspond to special hits. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the big hit or the special hit correspond to the deviation (normal deviation). As a result, the jackpot probability is 1/200 and the special hit probability is 1/5.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery result based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A does not include the special deviation shown in the first embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A may be configured to be a special loss, or the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A may be a special loss. It may be configured so that it can be a special deviation in both the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A and the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

In the case of 6R jackpot and 10R jackpot, the game state (first special game state or second special game state) in which the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (big hit game state) It is the same as the fifth embodiment in that it shifts to the gaming state). However, as shown in FIG. 88, in the case of a 6R jackpot, "1 time" is set as the end reference number, and in the case of a 10R jackpot, "3 times" is set as the end reference number. ..

In addition, when the special hit → special hit game state → V prize → 5RV jackpot is reached, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state (big hit game state). It is the same as the fifth embodiment in that it shifts to the (first special gaming state). However, in the case of a 5RV jackpot, "1 time" is set as the above-mentioned end reference number of times.

In other words, in the case of a 5RV jackpot or a 6R jackpot, the hit probability has been raised for a total of 5 times, which is the end reference number of times (1 time) + the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A (4 times). It becomes a stochastic state. During this time, the probability of a big hit or a special hit is about 67%. In addition, in the case of a 10R jackpot, a total of 7 times, which is the end reference number of times (3 times) + the upper limit of the storage number of the reserved number related to the second operating port 92A (4 times), is a high probability state in which the hit probability is raised. Become. During this time, the probability of becoming a big hit or a special hit is almost 80%.

Also in this embodiment, when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game state shifts to the high frequency support mode A compatible game state (third special game state). In that respect, it has the same configuration as that of the first embodiment. In this high-frequency support mode A-compatible game state, the number of games executed after the end of the open / close execution mode, specifically, the number of games related to the second operating port 92A is the end reference number of times (time reduction number: 100 times in this embodiment). ), And when the end reference number of times is reached, the game state (normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode is entered.

In the normal game state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the player reaches the ceiling, the total of 104 times, which is the end reference number (100 times) + the upper limit of the number of reserved numbers related to the second operating port 92A (4 times), is hit. It becomes a high probability state (chance zone) where the probability is raised. During this period, the probability of becoming a big hit or special hit is almost 100%, and the winning probability is raised by reaching the ceiling, so that the big hit or special hit in the chance zone becomes rich.

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of games to reach the ceiling is set to 600 times, and when the game shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A by reaching the ceiling, the game is concerned. The ceiling is reset when the state ends (the game count counter is cleared to 0). That is, it is configured to shift to the above chance zone in 600 game round cycles.

(About the basic game flow)
Next, the basic game flow of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

In the normal gaming state in which the support mode is the low frequency support mode, it is not possible to expect a prize in the second operating port 92A. Therefore, the player launches a game ball on the left route (so-called left-handed) and plays the game aiming at winning a prize in the first operating port 91A.

When a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A, a winning / failing lottery is executed based on the winning. If a 6R jackpot or a 10R jackpot is achieved by the hit / fail lottery, the variable winning device 83B shifts to a jackpot game state in which the variable winning device 83B is opened and closed over a plurality of rounds. Since only the game ball flowing down the right route can win the variable winning device 83B, the player increases the amount of rotation operation of the game ball launching handle 41 and launches the game ball to the right route for the game. Will be done (so-called right-handed). After the jackpot game state ends, the player shifts to the above chance zone (special game state), which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state.

In the special gaming state, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B, and the first special gaming state in which the reference number of end of the game times related to the second operating port 92A is "1" and the electric accessory The second special game state in which the support mode by 93A becomes the high frequency support mode B and the end reference number of the game times related to the second operating port 92A is "3", and the support mode by the electric accessory 93A are the high frequency support modes. The third special game state in which the end reference number of game times related to the second operation port 92A becomes A is "100", and the second operation port 92A acquired during the first special game state to the third special game state. The fourth special game state in which the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed by the hold related to the above is included.

After the jackpot game state triggered by the 6R jackpot ends, it shifts to the first special gaming state, and after the jackpot game state triggered by the 10R jackpot ends, it shifts to the second special gaming state, and the special hit triggers. After the V prize occurs during the special hit game state and the 5RV jackpot game state ends, the game shifts to the first special game state, and the number of games executed after the special game state ends is the upper limit (ceiling: 600). When it reaches (times), it shifts to the 3rd special game state, and it is executed without winning either the big hit or the special hit in the 1st special game state to the 3rd special game state (all results are lost). When the number of games reaches the above-mentioned end reference number, the system shifts to the fourth special game state.

The first special game state to the third special game state will be continued until the number of times the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed reaches the above-mentioned end reference number of times (1 time, 3 times, 100 times). , In the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is given preferential treatment so that the probability of becoming a special win is higher, and the lottery including the special winning is substantially. The winning probability will increase significantly from 1/200 to 1/5.

By the way, the probability (continuation rate) of winning a special hit or a big hit is about 60% in the winning / failing lottery related to the second operating port 92A four times. The total continuation rate including the game times executed during the first special game state is about 67%, and the total continuation rate including the game times executed during the second special game state is about 80%. The total continuation rate including the game times executed during the third special game state is almost 100%.

According to the sixth embodiment described in detail above, when the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a winning result, the frequency is high. It shifts to the third special game state corresponding to the support mode A. Here, even if the high-frequency support mode A is set, the following inconveniences may occur if the probability of a winning result remains low. In other words, even though the player has reached the ceiling, the period until the player can obtain the sufficient benefit (transition to the special gaming state) is extended, or high-frequency support is provided before the sufficient benefit is obtained. It is assumed that the chance zone including mode A ends (run-through occurs). This is not preferable because it causes a great decrease in the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, it is possible to win a prize in the second operating port 92A by changing from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, and the determination based on the winning in the second operating port 92A (lottery). ) Can be a special hit result as well as a big hit result. In other words, the winning probability (probability of transition to the special gaming state) is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. Then, the sum (for example, 104 times) of the upper limit number of stored information (for example, 4) and the end reference number of times (for example, 100 times) in the holding area Rb for the second operating port is equal to or more than the reciprocal of the probability of winning the result. Therefore, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is richly or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

If, for example, there is a limit to the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency support mode A when the player reaches the ceiling, there is a strong concern about running through. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the influence of the limitation on the number of games when reaching the ceiling can be relaxed. That is, even when the high-frequency support mode A with a limited number of times is adopted by reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

When shifting from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the result can be greatly increased. This is preferable in order to shorten the period of stay in the high-frequency support mode A and to suppress the extension of the period until the sufficient benefit is given, in order to exert the above-mentioned relief function when reaching the ceiling.

If a big hit result is obtained in the normal game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the game shifts to the first special game state or the second special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. In the configuration shown in this feature, the end reference number of high-frequency support mode B that shifts when the ceiling is reached is larger than the end reference number of high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the special hit result occurs. The transition to the special game state at the time of arrival is given preferential treatment. With such a configuration, the above-mentioned relief function can be suitably exerted.

In a configuration in which both the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency support mode B triggered by the winning result are executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the high-frequency support is supported. The benefits will be the same if the winning result is obtained during the mode. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the privilege when the winning result is obtained, but the benefit that can be expected when reaching the ceiling is also increased due to the influence, so the relief function by reaching the ceiling is excessively strong. There is concern that it will become. In particular, as described above, it is expected that the above concern will increase in the configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is concentrated or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is made larger than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result (1/200), the benefit expected from reaching the ceiling is increased and the ceiling is reached. The above concerns can be dispelled by reducing the chances of becoming.

<Modification example 1>
According to the sixth embodiment, in the third special game state in which the transition is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the end reference number of times is set so that the probability of a big hit or a special hit during the special game state is almost 100%. However, it is not limited to this. In the third special game state that shifts when the ceiling is reached, the end reference number of times may be set so that the probability of a big hit or a special hit during the special game state is 95% or more (preferably 99% or more). ..

<Modification 2>
In order to realize a configuration in which the next big hit will be rich by reaching the ceiling, the following configuration is also possible. That is, the game count counter is reset when the ceiling is reached, and the number of games that reach the ceiling and the number of end reference times in the third special game state that shifts when the ceiling is reached are the same, or the number of games that reach the ceiling is higher than the number of games that reach the ceiling. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of end reference times in the third special game state that shifts upon arrival is larger.

<Modification example 3>
When a special hit result is obtained in the third special game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which is triggered by reaching the ceiling, the second is compared with the case where the special hit result is obtained under other circumstances. The variation display time of the pattern on the operation port display unit D2 may be shortened. By shortening the fluctuation display time when a special hit result is obtained during the fourth special game state and shortening the time required to shift to the special game state, the player can promptly enjoy the expected benefits. Is possible.

<Modification example 4>
High-frequency support mode that shifts when the jackpot result or special hit result is triggered Compared to the special game state (first special game state or second special game state) that supports B, the high-frequency support mode that shifts when the ceiling is reached. The special gaming state corresponding to A (third special gaming state) may have a configuration in which the support by the electric accessory 93A is stronger (for example, the period of being in the open state is longer). With such a configuration, in the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of winning the second operating port 92A becomes high, and the number of reserved information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port increases. More. Therefore, the variation display time (operating period of the game rotation operation) of the pattern of the operation port display unit D2 in the game round after reaching the ceiling is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to enjoying the above benefits is extended. It can be suppressed suitably.

<7th embodiment>
One of the features of this embodiment is that a device is devised to suppress the monotony of the game when the player shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B as a 6R normal jackpot. I'm trying. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payment of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged immediately below the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route in which the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route detouring from the left side. In that respect, it is the same as that of the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the first operating port 91A, the second operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. The game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 91.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is a first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a hold area Ra for the second operation port and a hold area Rb for the second operation port that stores each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the second operation port 92A. doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Then, when the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first operation port, the hold area for the first operation port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, any of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 can be a special omission, but in the present embodiment, the first operating port is configured. The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that only one of the lottery based on the winning of the 91 and the second operating port 92 can be a special deviation. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 92, the pass / fail table for the first operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 92 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of six "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 92 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) that become big hits are "7" and "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 93, the pass / fail table for the second operating port includes a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). And are provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 93 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of six "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 93 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. Further, in a situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode and the winning / failing table for the high probability mode are referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, the value of the random number that is a special deviation (that is, that is). , Special outlier information), all of which are "5", "15", "25", "35" ... "585", "595", for a total of 60 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "5", "15", "25", "35" ... "585", "595" correspond to the special deviation result. Then, all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to either the jackpot or the special deviation correspond to the deviation result (specifically, the normal deviation result).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A does not result in a special loss, and the winning destination corresponding to the special loss is the electric accessory 93A. 2 It is limited to the operating port 92A.

As the distribution table, a distribution table for the first operating port (see FIG. 94 (a)) and a distribution table for the second operating port (see FIG. 94 (b)) are provided. .. Regarding the distribution table for the first operating port, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot A, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to. Regarding the distribution table for the second operating port, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 14" corresponds to 6R normal jackpot B, and "15 to 29" corresponds to 6R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to.

Here, various jackpots are compared with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 95. In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, the lottery mode shifts to the high probability mode and the support mode shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode B after the special game state ends. This second normal gaming state is continued until the next big hit.

When the 6R normal jackpot A or the 6R normal jackpot B is reached, the process shifts to the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the special gaming state ends. As described above, after the transition to the third normal game state, when the number of games executed during the third normal game state reaches the end reference number, the first low probability mode and low frequency support mode are supported. It shifts to the normal game state. That is, the number of times is limited in the third normal game state. In the present embodiment, the counting of the number of games in the third normal game state is limited so that the trigger is the game times executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

When the 6R normal jackpot A is reached, "10 times" is set as the end reference number, and when the 6R normal jackpot B is reached, "20 times" is set as the end reference number. And, as already explained, the storage upper limit of the number of reservations related to the second operating port 92A is "4". That is, when the 6R normal jackpot A is reached, the maximum number of game times related to the second operating port 92A is "10 times" + the holding upper limit "4 times", which is a total of 14 times. If this happens, the game times related to the second operating port 92A are configured to be executed a maximum of 24 times, that is, the maximum number of end reference times is "20 times" + the upper limit of holding is "4 times".

In the present embodiment, if a special deviation occurs during the high-frequency support mode with a limited number of times, the end reference number of times of the high-frequency support mode is overwritten (reset), and the high-frequency support mode is substantially extended. One of the features is that it is configured to be used. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 96, a process for exerting such a function, specifically, a process for switching the support mode will be described focusing on differences from the first embodiment.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3501, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3502. In step S3502, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S3502, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3502, the process proceeds to step S3503.

In step S3503, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game round is a special deviation. If a negative determination is made in step S3503, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3507, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3507, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3507, the process proceeds to step S3508, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 435 and the number of times. The restriction flag is cleared and the switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S3503, when an affirmative determination is made in step S3503, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. At this time, if the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404, the high-frequency support mode B flag is deleted. The number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is retained as it is. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A becomes the high frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3505, the continuation number counters of the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are overwritten (reset), and the switching process is completed. Specifically, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high frequency support mode is substantially extended.

Returning to the description of step S3501, if a negative determination is made in step S3501, the process proceeds to step S3509. In step S3509, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game round is a special deviation. If a negative determination is made in step S3509, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3509, the process proceeds to step S3510. In step S3510, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode A. In the next step S3511, the number-of-times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in step S3512, the continuation number counters of the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are set, and the switching process is completed. Specifically, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is continued until the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed 20 times.

(Flow of the game)
Here, the flow of the game (game flow) will be described with reference to FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a block diagram showing the relationship between each gaming state.

The first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is composed of a main stage and a special stage (mission stage). The main stage is a stage to stay when the game round based on the winning of the first operating port 91A is executed, and the special stage stays when the game round based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is executed. It's a stage.

More specifically about the special stage, when transitioning from the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B and the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A to the first normal gaming state. It is a stage of temporarily staying in, and the upper limit of the number of games to be executed matches the upper limit of the number of stored information in the holding area Rb for the second operating port. That is, immediately after the transition from the third normal game state or the fourth normal game state to the first normal game state, the stage moves to the special stage on condition that the hold information related to the second operation port 92A is stored. .. Then, if there is no big hit or special deviation in this special stage, that is, if all the hold related to the second operating port 92A ends in the normal deviation, the stage moves from the special stage to the main stage.

As described above, the first normal gaming state corresponds to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, even if the game ball is launched to the right route and the support is won, the winning of the second operating port 92A is substantially avoided. Then, since the game ball launched to the right route cannot win a prize in the first operating port 91A, it becomes difficult to receive a lottery based on the winning in the operating ports 91A and 92A. On the other hand, for the game ball launched to the left route, the winning of the second operating port 92A is avoided, while the winning of the first operating port 91A may occur. For the above reasons, it is possible to proceed with the game so that it is more advantageous for the player to aim at the left route than to aim at the right route. If the game ball is launched to the right route during the first game state, a warning is given to urge the launch destination to return to the left route.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot is obtained in the lottery during the first normal game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. The second normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route. During the second normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a 1/10 chance that the special deviation will occur, but the special deviation during the second normal gaming state will be invalid and will be treated as a normal deviation. .. That is, even if a special deviation occurs during the second normal gaming state, the special deviation does not trigger the transition to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

If a 6R normal jackpot is won in the lottery during the first normal game state and the second normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. .. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the investment (decrease in the number of balls held) by launching the game ball to the right route.

During the third normal game state, the game ball launched to the right route wins a prize in the second operating port 92A, and the game progresses centering on the game times related to the second operating port 92A. As described above, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, there is a probability of about 1/10 that the special deviation occurs. If a special deviation occurs during the third normal game state, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode B to the high frequency support mode A, and "20" times are set as the end reference number. That is, the transition from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state is performed.

If a 6R probability variation jackpot occurs during the fourth normal game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B through the special game state. On the other hand, if a special deviation occurs during the fourth normal game state, the end reference number of times is reset to "20" times, and the fourth normal game state is extended. If the fourth normal game state can be looped in this way, the player can proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease (investment) in the number of balls held.

During the 4th normal game state, the game progresses without becoming a big hit or a special loss, and the number of game times executed (specifically, the game times related to the 2nd operating port 92A) is the end reference number (20 times). When it reaches, it shifts to the first normal game state. Specifically, when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is "0", the stage shifts to the main stage, and when the number of holdings related to the second operating port 92A is other than "0", the stage shifts to the special stage. ..

In the special stage, the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A will be executed for the number of pending times. If the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A results in a special loss, the game shifts to the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A.

According to the seventh embodiment described in detail above, when a normal jackpot result is obtained in the first normal game state, the game shifts to the third normal game state through the special game state. The third normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode B, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the winning of the second operating port 92A. A limit is set for the number of times in the third normal game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the third normal game state reaches the end reference number (first end reference number), the low frequency support mode is supported. Shifts to the first normal game state of. This makes it difficult to enter the ball into the second operating port 92A. Here, in the lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A, a special deviation result may occur. If a special deviation result occurs in the third normal game state, the process shifts to the fourth normal game state without going through the special game state. The fourth normal game state corresponds to the high frequency support mode A, and the game times related to the second operating port 92A are executed in the same manner as the third normal game state, and in this state, the number of times the game times are executed is the end criterion. It will be continued until the number of times (the second end reference number of times) is reached. Here, when the transition from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state is made, the progress of the game times related to the second operating port 92A will continue. This makes it possible to aim for a big hit while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

If a special deviation result occurs during the fourth normal game state, the end reference number (second end reference number) is reset. That is, the fourth normal game state loops. In this loop, since the loop does not go through the special gaming state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

The second end reference number of times is defined to be the same as the first end reference number of times. Therefore, when the third normal game state is changed to the fourth normal game state, it is possible to prevent the player from being substantially damaged by the timing of the special deviation result (the game times that are the determination result). This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game by the loop function described above and to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

In the fourth normal game state, it is stipulated that the probability of a special deviation result (1/10) is higher than the probability of a jackpot result (1/100). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the above-mentioned loop function not being exerted well due to frequent jackpots and the like.

<Modification example 1>
In the seventh embodiment described above, if a special deviation occurs during the high-frequency support mode B with a limited number of times, the mode is switched to the high-frequency support mode A and the end reference number is reset. It is not limited to this. During the high frequency support mode B, the lottery for the special deviation may not be performed, or the special deviation may be invalidated (handled in the same manner as the normal deviation). That is, when the special deviation occurs during the high frequency support mode A, the high frequency support mode A is maintained and the end reference number of times is overwritten (reset), while the special deviation occurs during the high frequency support mode B. In this case, the high-frequency support mode B may be maintained and the end reference number of times may not be overwritten (reset). In such a configuration, when the player shifts to the third normal game state, the game is specially missed in the game times related to the remaining hold of the second operating port 92A, which is executed after the third normal game state ends. In that case, the game shifts to the fourth normal game state.

<Modification 2>
In the seventh embodiment, the end reference number (20 times) set when the special deviation occurs is higher than the end reference number (10 times) set when the 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) occurs. The number of times) was increased, but it is not limited to this. For example, the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot A (at the time of the first hit) is reached may be the same as the number of end reference times set when the special hit is lost. Further, the number of end reference times set when the special deviation occurs may be smaller than the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot A (first hit) is reached.

<Modification example 3>
In the seventh embodiment, the end reference number (20 times) set when the 6R normal jackpot B (at the time of consecutive villas) is reached, and the end reference number (20 times) set when the special deviation occurs. The number of times) is the same, but the number is not limited to this. For example, the number of end reference times set when the special deviation occurs may be larger than the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot B is obtained.

<Modification example 4>
In the seventh embodiment described above, the end reference number of times set in the case of a special deviation is set to be uniform (20 times), but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the number of termination reference times set according to the type of special deviation is different. For example, as special deviations, the first special deviation in which the set end reference number is the first end reference number (for example, "20 times") and the set end reference number are the second end reference times (for example, "40 times"). ”) May be provided with a second special deviation.

<Modification 5>
In the seventh embodiment, the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A does not result in a special loss, but the present invention is not limited to this. The lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A may also be configured to be a special omission.

<Modification 6>
When the normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the second operating port 92A, when the normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times related to the first operating port 91A, or when the game times related to the second operating port 92A are obtained. It may be specified that the number of termination reference times set is larger than that in the case of a special deviation result. With such a configuration, if a normal jackpot result is obtained during the loop described above, the advantage of the player is increased, and an accent can be generated in the game in the loop.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a part of the probability variation jackpot is used as an opportunity to shift to a normal game state (fifth normal game state described later) corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, and the game executed in this normal game state. One of the features is that the support mode by the electric accessory is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A when the number of times reaches the upper limit (ceiling). Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 98. FIG. 98 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payment of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged immediately below the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. In that respect, it is the same as that of the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the first operating port 91A, the second operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. The game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 99.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is a first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a hold area Ra for the second operation port and a hold area Rb for the second operation port that stores each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the second operation port 92A. doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Then, when the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first operation port, the hold area for the first operation port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a lottery based on winning a prize in the operating ports 91 and 92 may result in a special deviation. However, in the present embodiment, the operating ports 91 and the second operating port 92 are provided. The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that special deviations are omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on winning. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 100.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 100, as the pass / fail table for the operation port, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). It is provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 100 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of six "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 100 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operation port is divided into a distribution table for the first operation port and a distribution table for the second operation port. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 101 (a), in the distribution table for the first operating port, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game results. Special game result), 2R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 19" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result. "20-29 correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 101 (b), in the distribution table for the second operating port, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game results. Special game result) is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result.

Here, each jackpot will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 102.

When the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, the process shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state. As described in the first embodiment, after the transition to the third normal game state, the number of games executed during the third normal game state reaches the end reference number (specifically, "40 times"). If this is the case, the game shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of times is limited in the third normal game state. In the present embodiment, the counting of the number of games in the third normal game state is limited so that the trigger is the game times executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

In the case of a 6R normal jackpot, "300 times" is set as the ceiling (upper limit) described above at the end of the special game state. When the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode A, and the investment (reduction of the number of balls held) is suppressed. It will be.

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. As described in the first embodiment, the second normal gaming state will be continued until the next big hit.

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, "100 times" is set as the above-mentioned ceiling (upper limit) at the end of the special game state. However, even if the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A remains in the high frequency support mode B, that is, in the second normal game state. Become.

On the other hand, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special game state, the state shifts to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Further, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, "100 times" is set as the above-mentioned ceiling (upper limit) at the end of the special game state. When the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the ceiling, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode A, and the investment (reduction of the number of balls held) is suppressed. It will be.

In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the hurdle to the next jackpot will be lowered by switching to the high probability mode, but the game times are excessively increased in this game state (fifth normal game state). In some cases, the increased investment may reduce the player's willingness to play. In this respect, in the fifth normal game state, the occurrence of such inconvenience is suppressed by reaching the ceiling at an early stage and suppressing additional investment. In addition, by switching to the high frequency support mode A when reaching the ceiling, the game progresses mainly in the game times related to the second operating port 92A, and the game times related to the second operating port 92A become a big hit. In this case, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the satisfaction level of the player by configuring the configuration so that the 2R probability variation jackpot does not occur (a configuration in which a certain amount of ball can be expected). Hereinafter, with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 103 and 104, the first implementation of the process for exerting such a function, specifically, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode and the process for switching the support mode. The difference from the form will be mainly explained.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
As shown in FIG. 103, in the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode, first, in step S3601, it is determined whether or not the current open / close execution mode (special game state) is triggered by the 6R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602, and the high-frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode B flag set in this way, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode B is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric service support processing, and the through-gate display unit DS The variable display time table for the high frequency support mode B will be referred to as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the pattern.

In the following step S3603, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-probability mode flag set in this way, the winning / losing table for the high-probability mode will be referred to in the winning / losing lottery in the subsequent game rounds.

After that, in step S3604, "100 times" is set as the number of games that serves as a criterion for determining the ceiling. Then, in step S3605, the game count counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are reset (cleared to 0), and in step S3606, various flags for the open / close execution mode stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 ( (Big hit flag, etc.) is erased, and the output of the external signal corresponding to the open / close execution mode is stopped.

The value of the continuation number counter is subtracted by "1" each time the game is executed, and when the value of the continuation counter becomes "0", the high frequency support mode B ends. That is, the upper limit (the above-mentioned end reference number of times), which is the number of games that can be executed during the high frequency support mode B, is defined by the value of the continuation number counter.

Returning to the description of step S3601, if a negative determination is made in step S3601, that is, if the current jackpot is not a 6R probability variation jackpot, the process proceeds to step S3607. In step S3607, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot is a 2R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3607, the transition process ends after executing each of the processes of steps S3603 to S3606 described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3607, that is, if the current jackpot is a 6R normal jackpot, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 in step S3608, and high-frequency support is provided in step S3609. Set the mode B flag. After that, in step S3610, the continuation number counter is set to "40", and in the following step S3611, "300 times" is set as the number of games to be used as a criterion for determining the ceiling.

After that, in step S3605, the game count counter is reset, and in step S3606, various flags (big hit flag, etc.) for the open / close execution mode stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the open / close execution mode is set. Stop the output of the corresponding external signal.

Next, the process for switching the support mode will be described with reference to FIG. 104.

(Process for switching support mode)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S3701, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702. In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S3702, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3702, the process proceeds to step S3703.

In step S3703, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S3704, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S3704, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3704, the process proceeds to step S3705, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode A flag and the high-frequency support mode B flag) stored in the various flag storage areas 435 and the number of times. The restriction flag is cleared and the switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S3701, if a negative determination is made in step S3701, that is, if the low frequency support mode is in progress, the process proceeds to step S3706. In step S3706, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 has reached the upper limit, that is, the value set in step S3604 or step S3611. If a negative determination is made in step S3706, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3706, the process proceeds to step S3707.

In step S3707, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. Based on the high-frequency support mode A flag set in this way, the support lottery table for high-frequency support mode A is referred to in the support lottery in the subsequent electric service support processing, and the through-gate display unit DS The variable display time table for the high frequency support mode A will be referred to as the variable display time table for determining the variable display time of the pattern. In addition, the opening time when the electric accessory 93A is switched to the open state as a result of winning the support is the time corresponding to the high frequency support mode A.

In the following step S3708, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in step S3709, "400" is set in the continuation number counter, and the main switching process is completed. As a result, the transition will continue the high frequency support mode A until the number of games reaches "400 times" or until the jackpot is reached.

According to the eighth embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the fourth normal corresponding to the high frequency support mode A It shifts to the game state. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, regarding the upper limit of the number of times the ceiling can be reached, there are fewer cases where the probability variation jackpot result (specifically, the jackpot result corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode) is obtained, as compared with the case where the normal jackpot result is obtained. It is configured to be (shortened) to be. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. As a result, it is possible to suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game progresses without a big hit result even though the high probability mode is set, which is contrary to the player's expectation. The investment will be large. This is expected to be a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the upper limit number of times is lowered and the high frequency switching mode is shifted to the high frequency switching mode at an early timing to suppress investment. By doing so, the effect of diversifying the game (the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game) can be suitably exhibited.

If the above-mentioned relief function by reaching the ceiling acts excessively, the technical significance (diversification of the game) of providing the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode may decrease. Therefore, as shown in the present embodiment, by setting the upper limit number of times so as to be equal to or more than the reciprocal of the probability of a jackpot result in each game state, the diversification of games and the above-mentioned relief function are preferably coexisted. be able to.

As the number of stored information on hold increases, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port (operation period of the game rotation operation) becomes shorter. This is preferable in order to facilitate the progress of the game. However, on the premise of such a configuration, the following inconveniences may occur by applying the configuration related to the above relief function. That is, when the ceiling is reached in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, the game times in the normal game state become faster. An event may occur in which the benefit ends before the benefit of reaching the ceiling is fully experienced. It is feared that this will be a factor that greatly reduces the player's attention to the relief function. In this regard, as shown in the present embodiment, setting the end reference number of times to be larger than the upper limit number of times can contribute to solving the above concern.

The lottery based on the winning of the second operating port 92A is given preferential treatment to the player in favor of the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A. When the ceiling is reached in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode, not only the investment is suppressed, but also the above lottery is given preferential treatment, so that the player is doubled in the rescue function. If a fit occurs in a normal gaming state that supports a high probability mode and a low frequency support mode, expectations for reaching the ceiling will increase. This can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

The lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91A includes the lottery result that triggers the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode as the lottery result, and goes to the second operating port 92A. In the lottery based on the winning of the above, the lottery result that triggers the transition to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is not included as the lottery result. With such a configuration, the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode are supported normally while the relief function is being exerted by reaching the ceiling during the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. As a result of the lottery that triggers the transition to the game state, it is possible to avoid an event in which the benefits of the ceiling are substantially lost (wasteful pulling).

<Modification example 1>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is different depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to make the ceiling (upper limit) the same regardless of the type of jackpot.

<Modification 2>
As 2R probability variation jackpot (so-called latent probability), 2R probability variation jackpot A and 2R probability variation jackpot B are provided, and the ceiling (upper limit) when 2R probability variation jackpot A and the ceiling (upper limit) when 2R probability variation jackpot B is obtained. It is also possible to make the configuration different.

<Modification example 3>
In the eighth embodiment, the ceiling (upper limit) is set according to the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot), but this may be changed as follows. That is, the ceiling (upper limit) may be set according to the operating port that triggered the big hit. For example, when a big hit is made based on a prize in the first operating port 91A, the first ceiling is set as the ceiling (upper limit), and a big hit is made based on a winning in the second operating port 92A. A second ceiling may be set as the ceiling (upper limit). In this case, if the first ceiling is set lower than the second ceiling, it is possible to prevent the player's investment from becoming excessively large, and if the second ceiling is set lower than the first ceiling, The sharpness of the game can be suitably strengthened.

<Modification example 4>
In the eighth embodiment described above, when a probability variation jackpot (specifically, 2R probability variation jackpot) is obtained, the ceiling (upper limit) set is lower than when a normal jackpot (specifically, 6R normal jackpot) is obtained. However, it is not limited to this. In the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, the ceiling (upper limit) set may be higher than in the case of a 6R normal jackpot.

<Modification 5>
In the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode, the first end reference number is set as the end reference number in the low probability mode and the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, which shifts when the ceiling is reached, and the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode is supported. In the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A, which shifts in the game state when the ceiling is reached, the second end reference number is set as the end reference number, and the second end reference number is set as described above. It is also possible to specify that the number of times is less than the first end reference number. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the relief function from becoming a factor that incites gambling.

<Modification 6>
Similar to the first embodiment, the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A are arranged together on a predetermined flow path in the game area PE, and the holding area Ra for the first operating port and the second operating port are second. When the hold information is stored in both the operation port hold areas Rb, the hold information stored in the second operation port hold area Rb may be prioritized as the execution target of the game round.

According to the configuration shown in this modification, even when the player reaches the ceiling in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode and shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. , There is no need to change the launch destination of the game ball to enjoy the benefits of the relief function. Therefore, even if the rescue function is suddenly exerted without going through the special gaming state, it is possible to suppress the wasteful consumption of the game ball and preferably improve the satisfaction level with the rescue function. can.

<9th embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the game shifts to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode, the high probability mode is maintained until the next big hit (so-called probability change machine). On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first is that an upper limit is set for the number of games in which the high probability mode is maintained after the transition to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode (so-called ST machine). The embodiment and the configuration of the above are different.

When the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, it is assumed that the game will be played with the expectation that it will be a big hit at an early stage. In spite of the rising expectations for big hits, the progress of the game without becoming a big hit gives the player the impression that the investment is wastefully increased, and the game becomes It is feared that the player's willingness to play will decrease as he / she is willing to approach the above upper limit. It is assumed that such an event becomes more prominent in a gaming machine having a lower hit probability in the high probability mode. One of the features of the present embodiment is that the device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

The configuration of the game board unit in the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the holding function (holding ball storage area) related to the operating port is the same as that of the eighth embodiment. Therefore, the description thereof will be omitted. The configuration is the same as that of the eighth embodiment in that the game times related to the second operating port 92 are executed with priority over the game times related to the first operating port 91.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 100, as the pass / fail table for the operation port, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). It is provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 105 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of two, "7" and "307". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7" and "307" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 105 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the random number values (that is, winning information) that become big hits are "7" and "107". , "207", "307", "407", "507", for a total of six. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

(Distribution table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 106 (a), in the distribution table for the operating ports 91 and 92, the 10R probability variation jackpot A (high probability corresponding special game result) and the 10R probability variation jackpot B (high) are distributed to the game results. Probability correspondence special game result) is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot A, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot B.

When the 10R probability variation jackpot A is reached, the player shifts to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state. This high-probability mode ends when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (high-probability upper limit: 100 times), and the mode is switched to the low-probability mode.

When the 10R probability variation jackpot B is reached, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the special game state. This high-probability mode ends when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (high-probability upper limit: 100 times), and the mode is switched to the low-probability mode. Further, the high frequency support mode ends when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (high support upper limit: 50 times). In the present embodiment, when the high support upper limit is reached, the ceiling is reached as described above, and the high frequency support mode B is switched to the high frequency support mode A. An upper limit (50 times in this embodiment) is also set for the number of times the high-frequency support mode A is continued, and the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode when the high-probability mode ends.

Here, in the first embodiment, there is a difference so that the base (the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of shots of the game balls) is higher in the high frequency support mode B than in the high frequency support mode A. However, in the present embodiment, the difference is provided so that the high frequency support mode A has a higher base than the high frequency support mode B. Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 107, a specific configuration for generating such a difference will be described with a focus on differences from the first embodiment.

In the low-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the support in the support lottery is halved, and when the support is won, the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state is "1 time" and the opening time. Is specified to be "0.1 sec". Then, it is stipulated that the variation display time of the pattern (normal figure) in the through-gate display unit DS is "10 to 20 sec" and the final display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In the high-frequency support mode B, the probability of winning the support in the support lottery is 1 / 1.1, and the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state when the support is won is "1 time". Moreover, the opening time is specified to be "2 sec". Then, it is stipulated that the variation display time of the pattern (normal figure) in the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec" and the final display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In the high-frequency support mode A, the probability of winning the support in the support lottery is halved, and when the support is won, the number of times the electric accessory 93 is switched to the open state is "2 times" and is open. The time is specified to be "3 sec" and the interval time when switching to the open state is "0.2 sec". Then, it is stipulated that the variation display time of the pattern (normal figure) in the through-gate display unit DS is "0.5 sec" and the final display time of the pattern is "0.5 sec".

In general, the above-mentioned bases increase in the order of low frequency support mode <high frequency support mode B <high frequency support mode A, and in high frequency support mode B, the game is played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held compared to the low frequency support mode. It is possible to proceed, and in the high-frequency support mode A, it is possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held more than in the high-frequency support mode B.

Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 108, the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode executed as a part of the game state transition process of the normal process (see step S404 of FIG. 23) is the same as that of the first embodiment. The differences will be mainly explained.

(Transition processing at the end of open / close execution mode)
In the transition process at the end of the open / close execution mode (special game state), first, in step S3801, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode this time corresponds to the 10R probability variation jackpot. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3802. In step S3802, the high frequency support mode B flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93A is switched to the high frequency support mode B.

In the following step S3803, "50" is set in the high support continuation number counter provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The high support continuation counter is a counter for defining the number of continuations of the game times corresponding to the high frequency support mode, and is subtracted by "1" each time the game times are executed during the high frequency support mode. ..

After executing the setting process of step S3803, or when a negative determination is made in step S3801, the process proceeds to step S3804. In step S3804, the high probability mode flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the lottery mode of the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is switched to the high probability mode.

In the following step S3805, "100" is set in the high-accuracy continuation counter provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404. The high-probability continuation counter is a counter for defining the number of continuations of the game times corresponding to the high-probability mode, and is subtracted by "1" each time the game times are executed during the high-probability mode.

In step S3806, the game count counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are reset (cleared to 0). Then, in step S3807, the various flags for the special game state stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 are erased, and the main transition process is completed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode (for the process for switching the support mode in FIG. 39), which is executed as a part of the game time control process (step S403 in FIG. 23) of the normal process. Equivalent) will be explained.

(Processing for switching between lottery mode and support mode)
In the process for switching between the lottery mode and the support mode, first, in step S3901, it is determined whether or not the current lottery mode is the high probability mode. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902. In step S3902, the high-accuracy continuation number counters provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 are updated. Specifically, the value of the high-accuracy continuation counter is subtracted by "1".

In the following step S3903, it is determined whether or not the value of the high-accuracy continuation number counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904 to erase the high-probability mode flags stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the lottery mode of the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is switched from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

After executing the process of step S3904, or when a negative determination is made in any of steps S3901 and S3903, the process proceeds to step S3905. In step S3905, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A or the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3905, the process proceeds to step S3906. In step S3906, the update process of the high support continuation number counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 is executed. Specifically, the value of the high support continuation counter is subtracted by "1".

In the following step S3907, it is determined whether or not the value of the high support continuation number counter is "0". If an affirmative determination is made in step S3907, the process proceeds to step S3908 to erase the high-frequency support mode flag A or high-frequency support mode B flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is switched from the high frequency support modes A and B to the low frequency support mode.

After executing the process of step S3908, or when a negative determination is made in any of steps S3905 and S3907, the process proceeds to step S3909. In step S3909, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 has reached the upper limit (“50” in the present embodiment). If a negative determination is made in step S3909, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S3909, the process proceeds to step S3910. In step S3910, the high-frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. As a result, the support mode by the electric accessory 93 is switched to the high frequency support mode A. After that, the process proceeds to step S3911, and “50” is set in the high support continuation number counter provided in the various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404 to end the main switching process.

(Change in ball holding as the game progresses)
Next, with reference to FIG. 110, the change in the holding ball with the progress of the game will be supplementarily described. FIG. 110A is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained, and FIG. 110B is a timing chart exemplifying the flow of the game when the 10R probability variation jackpot B is obtained.

In the example shown in FIG. 110A, the game shifts to the special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot A at the timing of tg1. At the timing of tg2 when this special game state ends, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. After that, the high probability mode is maintained until the number of executed games reaches 100.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. At the timing of tg3 when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches 50, the support mode is switched from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode A. As a result, the progress of the game is accelerated, and the reduction of the number of balls held is suppressed to be almost zero. That is, after the end of the special gaming state, the player will be in an advantageous state, and if the game times progress without becoming a big hit, the player will be promoted to a further advantageous state.

Then, at the timing of tg4 in which the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is switched to the low probability mode. As a result, the jackpot probability returns from 1/100 to 1/300.

In the example shown in FIG. 110 (b), the state shifts to the special gaming state corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot B at the timing of th1. At the timing of th2 when this special game state ends, the lottery mode is switched to the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability increases from 1/300 to 1/100. After that, the high probability mode is maintained until the number of executed games reaches 100.

Immediately after the special game state ends, the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode B. At the timing of th3 when the number of games executed after the end of the special game state reaches 50, the support mode is switched from the high frequency support mode B to the high frequency support mode A. As a result, the progress of the game is further accelerated, and the reduction of the number of balls held is suppressed to be almost zero. That is, after the end of the special gaming state, the player will be in an advantageous state, and if the game times progress without becoming a big hit, the player will be promoted to a further advantageous state.

Then, at the timing of th4 when the number of game times executed after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the support mode is switched to the low frequency support mode and the lottery mode is switched to the low probability mode.

In the present embodiment, after shifting to the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B, the support mode has a high frequency when the number of times the game is executed reaches 50 times without a big hit result. Support mode A is set. As a result, the frequency of winning the second operating port 92 increases. After that, when the number of games played after the end of the special game state reaches 100, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode, and the support mode becomes the low frequency support mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

In a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) in which an upper limit is set for the number of times a game is executed in a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode, the probability that a jackpot result will be obtained decreases as the number of times the game is executed approaches the upper limit. , The player's expectation can be greatly reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in the present embodiment, the high frequency support mode A is set when the ceiling is reached, so that the frequency of winning the second operating port 92 is higher than before, and the investment is suppressed. ..

Further, the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 are collectively arranged in a predetermined flow path in the game area PE as in the first embodiment, while the gaming times related to the second operating port 92. Is configured to be executed with priority over the game times related to the first operating port 91. By shifting from the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A when reaching the ceiling, the game times related to the second operating port 92 can be increased. More opportunities to be executed. As a result, the player's advantage is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling, and the degree of attention to the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably improved.

In the high frequency support mode A, the average number of hold information stored in the hold ball storage area (hold area Rb for the second operation port) when the game ball is continuously launched toward the operation port 92. Is changed to "3.5", and when the game ball is continuously launched toward the operating port 92 in the high frequency support mode B, the holding ball storage area (holding area Rb for the second operating port) The average number of pending information stored in is changed to "2.5". When the number of reserved information stored in the second operating port holding area Rb is "3", the variation display time of the pattern on the operating port display unit D2 is shorter than in the case of "2". According to such a configuration, the game can be played by shifting from the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B to the normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. It is possible to change the speed of progress. Thereby, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed more preferably.

<Modification example 1>
In the ninth embodiment, the high-frequency support mode A that switches after the end of the special gaming state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A ends in accordance with the switching to the low-probability mode of the lottery mode (low-frequency support mode). However, the configuration is not limited to this.

The configuration may be such that the high-frequency support mode A is switched to the low-frequency support mode before switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode. That is, the special game state → the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) → the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A (the sixth normal game state) → high The configuration may be such that the normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the low frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) is shifted to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (first normal game state).

Further, the configuration may be such that after switching from the high-probability mode to the low-probability mode, the high-frequency support mode A is switched to the low-frequency support mode. That is, special game state → normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and low frequency support mode (fifth normal game state) → normal game state corresponding to high probability mode and high frequency support mode A (sixth normal game state) → low The configuration may be such that the normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and the high frequency support mode A (fourth normal game state) is shifted to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (first normal game state).

<Modification 2>
As the 10R probability variation jackpot A shown in the ninth embodiment, the 10R probability variation jackpot A1 and the 10R probability variation jackpot A2 are provided, and the ceiling set when the 10R probability variation jackpot A1 is set is 50 times, and the 10R probability variation jackpot A2. It is also possible to set the ceiling to 20 times when it becomes. With such a configuration, when the 10R probability variation jackpot A is obtained, the promotion timing (the timing of the tg3) can be changed depending on the type, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

<Modification example 3>
As the 10R probability variation jackpot B shown in the ninth embodiment, the 10R probability variation jackpot B1 and the 10R probability variation jackpot B2 are provided, and the ceiling set when the 10R probability variation jackpot B1 is reached is set 50 times and in the high frequency support mode B. It is also possible to set the number of continuations to 50, set the ceiling to be 20 times when the 10R probability variation jackpot B2 is reached, and set the number of continuations of the high frequency support mode B to 20 times. With such a configuration, when the 10R probability variation jackpot B is obtained, the promotion timing (the th3 timing) can be changed depending on the type, and diversification of the game can be suitably realized.

<Modification example 4>
In the ninth embodiment, the number of games (50) that can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A. (Times) and the number of games (50 times) that can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A are the same, but it is not limited to this. No.

10R Probability change The number of games that can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state triggered by the jackpot A is high probability mode and supports high frequency support mode A. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) is larger than the number of games that can be played.

In addition, the number of games that can stay in the normal game state (fifth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the normal game state corresponding to A (sixth normal game state) is less than the number of games that can be played.

<Modification 5>
In the ninth embodiment, the number of games that can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot B (second normal game state). The configuration is such that the number of games (50 times) that can stay in the normal game state (sixth normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A matches (50 times), but is limited to this. is not it.

10R Probability change The number of games that can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state triggered by the jackpot B is high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the corresponding normal game state (sixth normal game state) is larger than the number of games that can be played.

In addition, the number of games that can stay in the normal game state (second normal game state) corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot A is high probability mode and high frequency support. It is also possible to configure the game so that the number of games that can be stayed in the normal game state corresponding to the mode A (sixth normal game state) is less than the number of games that can be played.

<Modification 6>
In the ninth embodiment described above, a difference is provided so that the base of the high-frequency support mode A is higher than that of the high-frequency support mode B, but this is changed and the frequency is higher than that of the high-frequency support mode A. A difference may be provided so that the support mode B has a higher base.

<Modification 7>
When shifting from the high-frequency support modes A and B to the high-frequency support mode A, it is optional whether or not to go through the low-frequency support mode (game times corresponding to the low-frequency support mode).

<Modification 8>
In the ninth embodiment, when the 10R probability variation jackpot result A is obtained, it is high when 50 game times are executed in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode. It shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the probability mode and high frequency support mode A, and when the number of executions of the game times after the end of the special game state reaches 100 times, it shifts to the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and low frequency support mode. It was configured to be migrated. That is, it is stipulated that the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode is the same as the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. .. This has been changed so that the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and low frequency support mode is larger than the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. Alternatively, the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode may be less than the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. May be specified in.

In addition, when the 10R probability variation jackpot result B is obtained, the high probability mode and high frequency support are triggered by the fact that 50 game times are executed in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B. It is configured to shift to the normal gaming state corresponding to the mode A, and to shift to the normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches 100 times. That is, it is stipulated that the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B and the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A are the same number. bottom. This has been changed so that the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode B is larger than the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and high frequency support mode A. It may be specified, and the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B is less than the number of games staying in the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. It may be specified so as to be.

<Modification example 9>
In the ninth embodiment, when the number of games executed after the end of the special game state triggered by the 10R probability variation jackpot result reaches 100, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode and the support mode becomes the low frequency. It is configured to be in support mode, but is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to configure the high-frequency support mode A to continue even after the transition to the low-probability mode. According to the configuration shown in this modification, after the end of the special game state, the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B → the normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A → the low probability mode and the high The transition is made in the order of the normal game state corresponding to the frequency support mode A → the normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from rapidly decreasing when the high-probability mode is changed to the low-probability mode.

<10th Embodiment>
In the first embodiment described above, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation result, the fourth normal game state is set. The value of the continuation counter that defines the number of remaining games is set (overwritten) to "400", and the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode is triggered by the special deviation result. 4 A configuration that promptly shifts from the normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling without triggering another gaming state such as the first normal gaming state, that is, the fourth normal gaming state is promptly extended. It was configured.

One of the features of this embodiment is that the behavior when the player reaches the ceiling during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A triggered by the special deviation result is devised. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

As shown in the schematic diagram of FIG. 111 (a), in the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 becomes blue, and the height shifts when the ceiling is reached. In the frequency support mode A, the background color of the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is differentiated so as to be green. Therefore, by checking the background color of the display screen 95a, the player can easily identify whether the current high-frequency support mode A is triggered by the special disconnection result or the arrival at the ceiling. In the following explanation, the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when the special deviation occurs is referred to as "high-frequency support mode A1", and the high-frequency support mode A that shifts when reaching the ceiling is appropriately distinguished as "high-frequency support mode A2". .. By the way, the support modes of the high-frequency support modes A1 and A2 are common, and the base (the ratio of the number of game balls to be paid out to the number of game balls fired) is configured so that there is no difference between the two. Then, it is the same as the first embodiment.

Next, the flow of the start notification of the high frequency support mode A will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic views of FIGS. 111 (b) to 111 (c).

In the game times in which the game shifts to the high frequency support mode A1 due to the special deviation, as shown in FIG. 111 (b), the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation in the game times is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the display screen 95a. ). Specifically, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines after the reach display. Then, the background color of the display screen 95a is changed from white to blue at the start of the next game round, and the remaining number of games of the high frequency support mode A1 is displayed in the corner of the display screen 95a.

On the other hand, in the game round that shifts to the high frequency support mode A2 when the ceiling is reached, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling reach in the game round is displayed on the display screen 95a. Stop display (confirmed display) may be displayed. Specifically, when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, the symbol combination including the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on any of the effective lines via the reach display. On the other hand, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A, the symbol combination corresponding to the complete disconnection is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without the reach display. At this time, the background color of the display screen 95a is also maintained in blue.

In the game times when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set as in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in the game times when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, the variable display time that does not correspond to the reach display is set with reference to the variable display time table shown in FIG. 27 (a2). ..

Here, with reference to the timing chart of FIG. 112, the flow of the game when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation result will be supplementarily described.

At the timing of ti1, the game times corresponding to the normal deviation result are started, and at the timing of ti2, the game times corresponding to the special deviation result are started. At the timing of ti3 when the game round corresponding to the special deviation result is completed, the mode shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A1. In accordance with this, "40" is set in the continuation number counter.

After that, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1" and the value of the game counter is added by "1" each time the game is advanced (see, for example, the timing of ti4). At the timing of ti5 during the fourth normal game state corresponding to the special deviation result, the game round to reach the ceiling is started. That is, in the example shown in FIG. 112, the ceiling is reached while the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the special deviation result is continuing, that is, before the value of the continuation number counter becomes “0”. This game round corresponds to the out-of-normal result that does not support reach display, and the number of holdings related to the operating ports 91 and 92 has also been moving near the upper limit due to the benefit of the high frequency support mode. For this reason, the variation display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port and the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device are about 3 to 5 seconds due to the influence of the time shortening function, and the game times that reach the ceiling proceed quickly. There is.

In the game times when the ceiling is reached, the "CHANGE" symbol is stopped and displayed on the display screen 95a at the timing of the confirmation display, so that the player is clearly informed that the ceiling has been reached. Then, at the timing of ti6 when the game round ends, the value of the continuation number counter is overwritten with "400", and another game is changed from the 4th normal game state corresponding to the special deviation result to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the ceiling arrival. It is migrating without going through the state. Along with this, the background color of the display screen 95a has been changed from blue to green.

Here, during the high-frequency support mode A, the electric accessory 93 is frequently switched to the open state. The electric accessory 93 is in the open state at the timing of ti6 when the game round that reaches the ceiling ends, but the electric accessory 93 is in the open state until the opening time set at the time of switching to the open state elapses. It will be maintained as it is, and the opening time will not be forcibly shortened. That is, even when the trigger of the fourth normal gaming state is switched from the special disconnection result to reaching the ceiling as described above, the behavior of the electric accessory 93 is not disturbed. The winning support in the fourth normal game state will end when the value of the continuation number counter becomes "0" or when the big hit result is obtained before that.

<Modification example 1>
In the tenth embodiment, when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by the special disengagement result, the symbol combination (“CHANGE” symbol) indicating the ceiling arrival at the game time of reaching the ceiling is used. A configuration that clearly indicates that the ceiling has been reached by stopping and displaying the combination of symbols including) and a configuration that clearly indicates that the ceiling has been reached by changing the background color of the display screen 95a from the next game that reaches the ceiling. However, it is not limited to this. The specific configuration that clearly indicates the arrival at the ceiling is arbitrary, and one of the above two configurations can be omitted. That is, in the game times in which the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state, it is possible to omit the function of clearly indicating the ceiling arrival by the symbol combination. It is also possible to unify the background color of the display screen 95a between the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation result and the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling.

<Modification 2>
In the tenth embodiment, the ceiling is reached rather than the end reference number of times (“20” times or “40” times) set when shifting to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation result. 4 The number of times is less than the end reference number (“400” times) set when shifting to the normal game state, but the number is not limited to this. The number of end reference times set when shifting to the 4th normal game state triggered by the special deviation result is greater than the number of end reference times set when shifting to the 4th normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling. Alternatively, the number of end reference times set when shifting to the fourth normal game state triggered by the special deviation result and the number of end reference times set when shifting to the fourth normal game state triggered by reaching the ceiling are set. The number may be the same.

<Modification example 3>
If the electric accessory 93 is in the open state at the timing when the ceiling is reached during the fourth normal game state triggered by the special disconnection result, the electric accessory 93 is forcibly switched to the closed state. It can also be configured.

<11th Embodiment>
If a special deviation result occurs during the high frequency support mode, the special deviation result becomes invalid and the benefit cannot be enjoyed, which gives the player the impression that the special deviation result was a so-called wasteful deduction. It becomes a factor to give. This is not preferable because it causes a decrease in the player's willingness to play. In particular, if such an event occurs just before the end of the high frequency support mode and it catches the player's eyes, the above concern becomes greater. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the device will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment.

The patterns that are stopped and displayed (confirmed) on the operating port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 (main display unit D) are individually displayed for each lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92. It is provided. That is, when the lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R normal jackpot result-corresponding pattern is stopped and displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2, and the operating ports 91 and 92 are displayed. If the lottery result based on the winning is the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the pattern corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2, and the lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92. When is the special disconnection result A, the pattern corresponding to the special disconnection result A is stopped and displayed on the operating port display units D1 and D2, and the lottery result based on the winning of the operating ports 91 and 92 is the special deviation result B. In the case, the pattern corresponding to the special disconnection result B is stopped and displayed on the actuation port display units D1 and D2, and when the lottery result based on the winning of the operation port 91 and 92 is the normal deviation result, the operation port display unit. D1 and D2 are configured so that the pattern corresponding to the normal deviation result is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 113 (a)).

As described in detail above, the operation port display units D1 and D2 of the main display unit 99 have a configuration in which the symbol combination for which the stop display is displayed does not differ depending on the gaming state. On the other hand, among the symbol combinations that are stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a), the symbol combinations corresponding to the special deviation results are configured to differ depending on the game state.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 113 (b) and 113 (c), when a special deviation result occurs during the normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device On 95 (display screen 95a), the symbol combinations of "3" symbol, "1" symbol, and "4" symbol, which are the symbol combinations corresponding to the special deviation result, are stopped and displayed, while the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (display screen 95a). If a special deviation result occurs during the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state), the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is provided with a symbol combination other than the above symbol combination, specifically, the normal deviation result is supported. The symbol combination of is stopped and displayed.

Next, the variable display time table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be supplementarily described with reference to FIGS. 114 to 115. FIG. 114 is a schematic view showing a variation display time table corresponding to a normal deviation result, and FIG. 115 is a schematic view showing a variation display time table corresponding to a special deviation result.

The variable display time table corresponding to the normal deviation result is the same as that of the first embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 114 (a1) illustrates the variation display time in the case of complete deviation in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7,8,9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the first normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 114 (a2) illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the fourth normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7,8,9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec". That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the first normal gaming state.

FIG. 114 (a3) illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 114 (a4) illustrates the variation display time when the player is completely out of the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal gaming state. In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

By the way, in any of the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state, in the game times in which the reach display (out-of-reach) corresponding to the out-of-order result occurs, the variable display time is irrespective of the number of stored information. Is set to any of "20 to 30 sec". This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result (see FIG. 28), and in the case of the jackpot result, a relatively long time in the range. If it is easy to set and the result is off, it is easy to set a relatively short time in the range. That is, the difference is provided so that the reach display having a long variable display time has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach display having a short variable display time.

Also in the present embodiment, the variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set in the game times when the game reaches the ceiling.

Next, the variable display time table corresponding to the special deviation result will be described. FIG. 115 (a1) illustrates the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the first normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. In the case of a special deviation in the first normal game state, any one of "20 to 30 sec" is set as the variable display time regardless of the number of stored information on hold. This variable display time is in the same range as the variable display time set in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result.

FIG. 115 (a2) illustrates the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the fourth normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0" or "1", either "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the stored pending information When the number is "2", any of "7,8,9 sec" is set as the variable display time, and when the number of stored information on hold is "3" to "8", it is set. Any of "3, 4, 5 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the fourth normal gaming state is the same as in the case of the normal deviation (see FIG. 114 (a2)). In the fourth normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

FIG. 115 (a3) illustrates the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the second normal gaming state is the same as in the case of the normal deviation (see FIG. 114 (a3)). In the second normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "0.5 sec".

FIG. 115 (a4) illustrates the variation display time in the case of a special deviation in the third normal gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. For example, when the number of stored pending information is "0", any of "12, 13, 14 sec" is set as the variable display time, and the number of stored pending information is "1". If it is "8", one of "1, 2 sec" is set as the variable display time. That is, the setting mode of the variable display time in the third normal gaming state is the same as in the case of the normal deviation (see FIG. 114 (a4)). In the third normal game state, the final display time of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the final display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are configured to be "1 sec".

In the game times when the ceiling is reached during the first normal game state, a variable display time (specifically, 20 to 30 sec) corresponding to the reach display is set as in the game times corresponding to the jackpot result. On the other hand, in the game times in which the ceiling is reached during the second normal game state to the fourth normal game state, the reach is reached with reference to the variable display time tables shown in FIGS. 114 (a2) and 115 (a2). A variable display time that does not correspond to the display is set.

Next, with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 116, the variation display mode of the symbol in each game round will be described.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the game times in which the normal deviation result (complete deviation result) that does not support reach display is performed, the variation display of each symbol sequence that is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a). Is started at the start of the game round. After that, without shifting to the reach display, the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row is stopped in this order, and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal out-of-order result that does not correspond to the reach display is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). This variation display mode is the same in the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the game times that result in a special deviation in the normal game state (first normal game state) corresponding to the low frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is stopped and displayed. The variable display of each symbol sequence is started at the start of the game round. After that, it stops in the order of the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row and shifts to the reach display. After the transition to the reach display, the symbol combinations (“3” symbol, “1” symbol, and “4” symbol combination) corresponding to the special deviation result are stopped and displayed (confirmed display) so that the middle symbol row is displayed. It will be stopped. By this combination of symbols, it is clearly shown to the player that the result is a special deviation.

As shown in FIG. 116 (c), in the game times that result in a special deviation in the normal game state (second normal game state to fourth normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a). The variation display of each symbol sequence stopped and displayed in) is started at the start of the game round. After that, without shifting to the reach display, the upper symbol row → the lower symbol row → the middle symbol row is stopped in this order, and the symbol combination corresponding to the normal out-of-order result that does not correspond to the reach display is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). That is, it is difficult to specify from the symbol combination whether or not this game is a special result.

According to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, even if the game progresses without a big hit result, the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A is reached due to a special off result or reaching the ceiling. Can be migrated. By shifting to the fourth normal gaming state, the frequency of winning the second operating port 92A increases, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to enhance the soundness of the game. However, if a special deviation result occurs in a normal game state corresponding to a high frequency support mode such as the fourth normal skill state, the special deviation result becomes invalid and is treated in the same manner as the normal deviation result. This is preferable in suppressing the increase in gambling, but when the player grasps that the special result has occurred, it gives the player the impression that he or she has wasted luck. It is feared that it will become. This can be a factor that reduces the motivation to play. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in the present embodiment, when a special deviation result occurs during the first normal gaming state, a symbol combination that clearly indicates the special deviation result on the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 is provided. While the stop display is displayed, if a special out-of-order result occurs during the 4th normal game state (the same applies to the 2nd normal game state and the 3rd normal game state), the symbol combination is the same as in the case of the normal out-of-game result. Is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, even if a special deviation result occurs during the fourth normal game state (the same applies to the second normal game state and the third normal game state), it can be made inconspicuous. .. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the satisfaction level of the player. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, if a special deviation result occurs during the first normal game state, the variable display time becomes the variable display time corresponding to the reach display, and during the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode such as the fourth normal game state. If the result is a special deviation, the variable display time will be the variable display time that does not support reach display. As described above, even if a special deviation result occurs during the high frequency support mode, the above effect can be more preferably exhibited by advancing the game times inconspicuously. In particular, if a special deviation result occurs during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode such as the 4th normal skill state, the normal deviation occurs during the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode such as the 4th normal skill state. The variable display time table similar to the case where the result (reach display is not supported) is referred to, and the variable display time is set in a common manner. As a result, the game times that result in the special deviation can be confused with the game times that result in the normal deviation, and the above effect can be suitably enhanced.

<Modification example 1>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, a symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop display (confirmed display) when the special deviation result A is obtained, and a stop display on the symbol display device 95 when the special deviation result B is obtained. The combination of symbols to be displayed (confirmed display) has been unified, but it is not limited to this. A symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop and display when the special deviation result A is obtained (a symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result A) and a symbol combination that causes the symbol display device 95 to stop and display when the special deviation result B is obtained. (Special symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result B) may be different.

Further, when the symbol combination for the special deviation result A and the symbol combination for the special deviation result B are individually provided so that the type of the special deviation result can be identified from the symbol combination, the special has a relatively high advantage. When the deviation result B is obtained, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result B (normal symbol combination corresponding to the deviation result) is stopped and displayed to make it unclear that it is the special deviation result B. When the special deviation result A having a relatively low advantage is obtained, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result A may be stopped and displayed to clearly indicate that the special deviation result A is obtained. Further, when the special deviation result B having a relatively high advantage is obtained, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result B is stopped and displayed to clearly indicate that the special deviation result B is obtained, while the relative advantage is obtained. When the special deviation result A is low, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result A (the symbol combination corresponding to the normal deviation result) is stopped and displayed to make it unclear that it is the special deviation result A. It may be configured to be used.

<Modification 2>
In the eleventh embodiment described above, if a special deviation result occurs during the normal gaming state (second normal gaming state to fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol display device 95 is normally displaced. The symbol combination corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this. If a special deviation result occurs during the normal game state (3rd normal game state to 4th normal game state) corresponding to the high frequency support mode, the symbol combination corresponding to the normal deviation result is stopped and displayed on the symbol display device 95. On the other hand, the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode B-compatible normal game state (fourth normal game state), which is a game state that is more advantageous than the high-frequency support mode A-compatible normal game state that shifts when the special deviation result is triggered. If a special deviation result is obtained inside, the symbol display device 95 may be configured to stop and display the combination of the "3" symbol, the "1" symbol, and the "4" symbol corresponding to the special deviation result. Is.

<Modification example 3>
If the special deviation result is made unclear each time, the difference between the probability of the special deviation result grasped by the player and the probability of the actual special deviation result becomes large. It is feared that this may be a factor that gives the player a negative impression such as "incompatibility with the gaming machine" or "poor flow". In view of such an event, a configuration that determines whether or not to stop and display the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result on the symbol display device 95 according to the remaining number of times in the fourth normal game state, specifically, the remaining number of games. When is more than a predetermined number of times, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is stopped and displayed, and when it is less than the predetermined number of times, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result is not stopped and displayed.

<Modification example 4>
Before the hold information stored in the hold ball storage area 432 is subject to the hit / fail judgment, it is configured to first specify whether or not the hold information corresponds to the special deviation result, and the hold information is determined according to the result. It is also possible to execute the advance notice effect (so-called look-ahead effect). In the configuration shown in the present embodiment, there is a high possibility that the player will feel uncomfortable due to the occurrence of the advance notice effect during the normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. Therefore, in the normal gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode, it is desirable to regulate at least one of the above-mentioned destination identification and the advance notice effect so as to refrain from the advance notice effect.

<12th Embodiment>
In the configuration in which the upper limit (end reference number of times) is provided in the fourth normal game state that shifts when the ceiling is reached as shown in the first embodiment, the jackpot result during the fourth normal game state. There is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without becoming. In a configuration in which the value of the game count counter that affects the ceiling function is reset (cleared to 0) only when a big hit occurs, that is, in a configuration in which the ceiling is not reset when the above event (hereinafter, also referred to as running through) occurs, the following Since the ceiling will not be reset until it becomes a big hit, there is a possibility that investment will increase significantly after the above run-through. Here, the game machine is generally connected to a data display device provided in the game hall, and the number of games after the big hit is displayed on the data display device, and the manager of the game hall displays this data. It can be determined whether or not the ceiling has not been reached by referring to the device. However, in the game hall, the power of the game machine and the data display device is turned off after the end of business hours, and the power is turned on on the morning of the business day. Since the number of games is reset (cleared to 0) by such a power supply operation (OFF → ON), it is difficult to determine whether the ceiling has not been reached after the power supply operation. It is assumed that the difficulty in grasping the state of the gaming machine in this way is a factor that reduces the convenience of the administrator. One of the features of this embodiment is that it is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration in the present embodiment will be described with a focus on the differences from the first embodiment. First, the support mode switching process in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 117.

(Support mode switching process)
In the support mode switching process, first, in step S9001, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode B. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9001, the process proceeds to step S9002. In step S9002, it is determined whether or not the number of times limit flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If a negative determination is made in step S9002, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9002, the process proceeds to step S9003. In step S9003, the continuation number counter of various counter areas 434 is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9004, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S9004, the main switching process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative judgment is made in step S9004, the process proceeds to step S9005, and the high-frequency support mode flag (specifically, the high-frequency support mode B flag) and the number-of-times limit flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 are deleted. This switching process ends. By clearing the high-frequency support mode flag, the support mode is switched from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S9001, if a negative determination is made in step S9001, the process proceeds to step S9006. In step S9006, it is determined whether or not the current support mode is the high frequency support mode A. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9006, the process proceeds to step S9007. In step S9007, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S9007, the process proceeds to step S9008. In step S9008, the continuation number counter is updated. Specifically, the value of the continuation count counter is decremented by "1". In the following step S9009, it is determined whether or not the value of the continuation number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1609, the main switching process is terminated as it is.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9009, the process proceeds to step S9015. In step S9015, it is determined whether or not the high-frequency support mode A this time is the high-frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling. If a negative determination is made in step S9015, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared in step S9005, and the switching process ends. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S9015, the process proceeds to step S9016. In step S9016, the special notification preparation flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, in step S9005, the high-frequency support mode flag (high-frequency support mode A flag) and the number-of-times limit flag are cleared, and the switching process is terminated. That is, when the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches the upper limit, the mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode.

Returning to the description of step S9006, if a negative determination is made in step S9006, that is, if the current support mode is the low frequency support mode, the process proceeds to step S9010. In step S9010, it is determined whether or not the value of the game count counter has reached the upper limit. If a negative determination is made in step S9010, the process proceeds to step S9011. In step S9011, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If it does not correspond to the special deviation, a negative determination is made in step S9011, and the main switching process is terminated. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9011 (when the special deviation is supported) or when an affirmative determination is made in step S9010 (when the ceiling is reached), the process proceeds to step S9012. In step S9012, the high frequency support mode A flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. Then, in the following step S9013, the number-of-times limit flag is set in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. After that, the process proceeds to step S9014, the continuation count counter setting process is executed, and then the switching process is terminated.

In the continuation count counter setting process, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (when the ceiling is reached) in the current game round, "400" is set in the continuation counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is continued until it becomes a big hit during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 400 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation A, "20" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A will continue until it becomes a big hit during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 20 times. If the result of this game is a special deviation B, "40" is set in the continuation number counter. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is continued until it becomes a big hit during the high-frequency support mode A or the number of games executed during the high-frequency support mode A reaches 40 times.

Returning to the explanation of step S9007, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit during the high frequency support mode A (when the ceiling is reached), "400" is set (overwritten) in the continuation counter in step S9014. ), And the process for switching is completed. As a result, the high-frequency support mode A is extended so that the number of game times executed during the high-frequency support mode A becomes 400. In other words, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode A triggered by a special deviation, the number of games in which the high-frequency support mode A is continued is reset (overwritten), and other normal game states, etc. are changed. The upper limit of the fourth normal game state will be raised without going through.

Next, the main process executed by the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 118. As shown in the first embodiment, the main process is a process that is started when the power is turned on, and after the main process is executed, the process proceeds to the normal process (see FIG. 23).

(Main processing)
In the main process, first, in step S9101, the start-up process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, it waits for about 500 msec to wait for the control board (payout control device 242 or the like) on the slave side to be in an operable state.

In the following step S9102, it is determined whether or not 1 sec, which is the permission prohibition period, has elapsed since the start-up process of step S9101. If 1 sec has not elapsed, the process of step S9102 is executed again. This time is measured by counting the number of processes in step S9102. For example, if the time required from the negative determination in step S9102 to the execution of the process of step S9102 again is 0.1 msec, the count value becomes 10,000 times, so that after the start-up process of step S9101 is performed. It is determined that 1 sec has passed since. The specific configuration of the time measurement is arbitrary, and for example, the time may be measured using a real-time clock. If it is determined in step S9102 that 1 sec has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S9103.

In step S9103, access to the RAM 404 is permitted. After that, in step S9104, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 166 provided in the power supply / firing control device 243 is ON, and in the following step S9105, whether or not the power failure flag is stored in the power failure flag storage area of the RAM 404. Is determined. Further, in step S9106, the RAM determination value is calculated, and in the subsequent step S9107, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, that is, the validity of the stored data is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 404. It is also possible to determine the validity of the stored data based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 404 are correctly stored.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the reset switch 166. If the reset switch 166 is pressed (if it is ON), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109. Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is not set or when an abnormality of the stored data is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process proceeds to steps S9108 to S9109 in the same manner. In step S9108, the used area of RAM 404 is cleared to 0, and in step S9109, the initialization process of RAM 404 is executed. In the process of step S9108, the values of the game count counter and the continuation count counter provided in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0). If the special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas, the special notification preparation flag is deleted.

On the other hand, when the reset switch 166 is not pressed, the power failure flag storage area is stored in step S9115, provided that the power failure flag is stored and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Clear the power failure flag stored in.

After executing the process of step S9115 or step S9109, the process proceeds to step S9110. In step S9111, it is determined whether or not the special notification preparation flag is stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404. If the special notification preparation flag is not stored, the initial command setting process is executed in step S9111 to output the initial command to the payout control device 242. After that, interrupt permission is set in step S9111, and the process proceeds to normal processing. The MPU of the payout control device 242 recognizes that communication with the main control device 162 is normally performed by inputting an initial command from the main control device 162.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9111, the process proceeds to step S9113. In step S9113, the special notification start process is executed. In the following step S2514, the special notification preparation flag stored in the various flag storage areas 435 of the RAM 404 is deleted. After that, each process of step S2511 and step S2512 is executed to shift to the normal process. In the special notification start processing in step S9113, the special notification start command is set. This special notification start command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 (see FIG. 23) of the normal process. The notification / effect control device 140 starts special notification based on receiving this special notification start command.

Here, the special notification process executed by the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 119 (a). The special notification process is a process executed as a part of the periodic process in the MPU 442.

(Special notification processing)
In the special notification process, first, in step S9201, it is determined whether or not the special notification is being executed. If a negative determination is made in step S9201, it is determined in step S9202 whether or not the special notification start command has been received from the main controller 162. If a negative determination is made in step S9202, the special notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9202, the process proceeds to step S9203 to execute the special notification start process, and then the special notification process ends. In the special notification start process of step S9203, as shown in FIG. 119 (b) → FIG. 119 (c), the annular illumination portion 26 of the front door frame 14 is fully lit. The hall manager of the game hall can easily identify whether or not the game machine is in the state after running through the ceiling from the presence or absence of light emission of the annular illumination unit 26.

Returning to the description of step S9201, when an affirmative determination is made in step S9201, that is, when the special notification is being executed, the processing for canceling the special notification is executed in steps S9204 to S9206. Here, first, the special notification control process executed as a part of the normal process (see FIG. 23) by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 120.

(Special notification control processing)
In the special notification control process, first, in step S9301, it is determined whether or not the reset switch 166 is ON. If a negative determination is made in step S9301, the special notification control process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9301, the special notification release process is executed in step S9302. In the special notification cancellation process, a special notification cancellation command is set. This special notification release command is transmitted to the notification / effect control device 140 in step S401 (see FIG. 23) of the normal process. In the following step S9302, the game count counters in the various counter areas 434 are reset (cleared to 0) to end the special notification control process.

Returning to the description of the special notification process of FIG. 119 (a), in step S9204, it is determined whether or not the special notification release command is received from the main control device 162. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9204, the special notification release process is executed in step S9205. In the special notification release process, as shown in FIG. 119 (c) → FIG. 119 (b), the above-mentioned annular illumination unit 26 is turned off.

If a negative determination is made in step S9204, the process proceeds to step S9206 to determine whether or not the effect button 35 provided on the front door frame 14 has been operated (whether or not it has been turned ON). If a negative determination is made in step S9206, the special notification process is terminated as it is. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9206, the special notification release process of step S9205 is executed, and then the special notification process is terminated.

As described in detail above, when the reset switch 166 is operated (when it is turned on) while the special notification is being executed, the game count counter is reset (cleared to 0) and the special notification is performed. Is released. On the other hand, when the effect button 35 is operated (when it is turned on) while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is sent without resetting (clearing 0) the game count counter. It will only be released.

When the game is executed without canceling the special notification, the light emitting effect in the annular illumination unit 26 is preferentially executed as the game progresses. However, when the progress of the game is stopped, the light emitting mode in the annular illumination unit 26 returns to the mode corresponding to the special notification (all lighting). Further, when the operation-corresponding effect is executed while the game is in progress, the effect button 35 may be operated by the player, but the effect button 35 is given priority in the light emitting effect accompanying the progress of the game. Even if is operated, the special notification is not canceled and the suspended state is maintained.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without a big hit result, the fourth normal game corresponding to the high frequency support mode (high frequency support mode A) Move to the state. In the fourth normal game state, the winnings to the operating ports 91 and 92 occur frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, the end reference number of times (400 times) is provided for the fourth normal game state shifted by reaching the ceiling, and even when the ceiling is reached, a big hit result is obtained during the fourth normal game state. There is a possibility that the fourth normal game state will end without any notice (running through the ceiling). This is preferable in order to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from becoming excessive and causing excessive gambling. However, after running through the ceiling, the number of times the game is executed, which is stored by the game number counter, remains unreset, and the ceiling cannot be reached again. Here, if the power switch is turned from OFF to ON without operating the reset switch 166 in the state after running through the ceiling, a special notification is executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not it is in the state after running through the ceiling. It is preferable to support grasping the state after running through the ceiling by turning on the power in this way in order to improve the convenience of the administrator.

When any of the effect button 35 and the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is canceled. On the other hand, when the reset switch 166 is operated while the special notification is being executed, the number of times the game is executed, which is stored by the game number counter, is reset. According to such a configuration, the manager of the game hall can easily select the correspondence to the game machine on which the special notification is executed according to the business form of the game hall and the like. That is, it is possible to select whether to cancel only the above-mentioned special notification and leave it in the state of running through the ceiling, or to reset the ceiling. With such a configuration, the above effect can be more preferably exhibited.

The effect button 35 as the "first operating means" is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the reset switch 166 as the "second operating means" is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine. With such an arrangement, it is possible to preferably avoid the inconvenience that the number of executions is reset by the player while improving the convenience of the administrator.

<Modification example 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the operating means for canceling the special notification (effect button 35) is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine (specifically, the front door frame 14), and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling. (Reset switch 166) is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine (specifically, the main control device 162), but the present invention is not limited to this. Both the operating means for canceling the special notification and the operating means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling may be arranged on the back side of the gaming machine.

The operation means for canceling the special notification and resetting the ceiling are arranged at a position where the player cannot operate, for example, a position where the front door frame 14 and the inner frame 13 can be opened so that the pachinko machine can be accessed from the front. If it is, it is sufficient, and it is not always necessary to dispose of it in the main control device 162.

<Modification 2>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 has a configuration as a function as an operation means for the operation-compatible effect and a function as an operation means for canceling the special notification, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. An operation means for canceling the special notification may be provided separately from the effect button 35.

<Modification example 3>
If the game is executed under the condition that the special notification is continued without being released, the annular illumination unit 26 may be regulated so that the light emitting effect accompanying the progress of the game is not executed. It is possible.

<Modification example 4>
As a special notification, a first special notification using the annular illumination unit 26 and a second special notification using the symbol display device 95 (for example, a counter display indicating the number of remaining games until reaching the ceiling, and the counter is "when running through the ceiling". A configuration in which a specific value such as "9999" or "0000" is fixed) is executed in parallel, and when the effect button 35 or the reset switch 166 is operated during the execution of the special notification, the first It is also possible to have a configuration in which the second special notification is continued while the special notification is canceled.

<Modification 5>
In the twelfth embodiment, when the effect button 35 is operated during the execution of the special notification, the special notification is canceled, but the present invention is not limited to this. By operating the effect button 35, it is possible to switch the mode of the special notification from a mode in which the discriminating power is relatively high (a mode in which the discriminating power is easily conspicuous) to a mode in which the discriminating power is relatively low (a mode in which the discriminating power is inconspicuous). In such a configuration, even if the device for executing the special notification is changed from the annular illumination unit 26 to another device (for example, the symbol display device 95 or the lamp unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine). good.

<Modification 6>
In the twelfth embodiment, the special notification is executed by fully lighting the annular illumination portion 26 of the front door frame 14, but the specific mode of the special notification is arbitrary. At least it is sufficient if it is possible to distinguish between a gaming machine that is executing special notification and a gaming machine that is not executing special notification. For example, special notification is executed by setting the annular illumination unit 26 to a special light emitting mode. It may be configured to be used. Further, it is also possible to configure the display screen 95a of the symbol display device 95 to execute the special notification, or to execute the special notification by the sound output from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 7>
In the game hall, the work time is shortened by turning the power on / off for each island facility, instead of turning the power on / off individually for each game machine. Therefore, when the power is turned off → the power is turned on (restarted) while the special notification is being executed, the following effects can be expected by configuring the configuration in which the special notification is canceled. That is, if the operation of the effect button 35 and the reset switch 166 is not indispensable for canceling the special notification, it is not necessary to individually perform the release operation for each gaming machine, which contributes to the improvement of work efficiency. can.

In addition, if a ball enters the ball entry part such as the operating ports 91, 92 or the game is started while the special notification is being executed, the special notification is temporarily regulated. It is also possible to configure it so that it can be released or released.

<Modification 8>
In the twelfth embodiment, the effect button 35 is connected to the notification / effect control device 140, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to connect the effect button 35 to the main control device 162.

<13th Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the behavior when reaching the ceiling and the jackpot overlap is characteristic. Hereinafter, the characteristic configuration of the present embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the first embodiment.

(Game board unit)
In the first embodiment, the game board unit 80 (game board 80a) is a symmetrical gauge (see FIG. 6), but in the present embodiment, the game board unit 80A (game board 80aA) is a left-right asymmetric gauge. It is supposed to be. Hereinafter, the game board unit 80A will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 121. FIG. 121 is a front view of the game board unit 80A.

The game board 80aA is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-back direction). A general winning opening 81, an operating opening unit 82A, a variable winning device 83A, a through gate 84A, and the like are arranged in each opening. When game balls flow into the general winning opening 81, the operating port unit 82A, and the variable winning device 83A, the game balls are detected by a detection sensor (not shown) provided corresponding to each entry portion, and the detection result is used. Based on this, a predetermined number of prize balls (payment of game balls) and other benefits are given to the player. In addition, an out port 86 is provided at the lowermost portion of the game board 80aA, and a game ball that has not entered various entry portions or the like is discharged from the game area PE through the out port 86.

Further, in the game board 80aA, a large number of game nails 87 are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the flow path of the game ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. .. The flow path of the game ball is differentiated by various configurations of the game nail 87, the windmill, and the like, and is adjusted so that the above-mentioned general winning opening 81 and the like are won with an appropriate probability.

The actuating port unit 82A is provided by the first actuating port 91A and the second actuating port 92A arranged immediately below the first actuating port 91A, similarly to the actuating port unit 82 shown in the first embodiment. In particular, the second operating port 92A is provided with an electric accessory 93A as an opening / closing type ball entry assisting device (ball entry assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means).

The game board 80aA is provided with a center frame 96A so as to surround the display screen 95aA of the symbol display device 95A. The center frame 96A protrudes from the front surface of the game board 80aA, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE by the center frame 96A is roughly divided into a route that bypasses the center frame 96A from the right side and a route that detours from the left side. In that respect, it is the same as that of the first embodiment. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball launched to the left route can win the first operating port 91A and the second operating port 92A, but cannot win the variable winning device 83A and the through gate 84A. Therefore, the game ball launched to the right route can win the second operating port 92A, the through gate 84A, and the variable winning device 83A, while the first operating port 91A cannot be won. The arrangement of the first operating port 91A, the second operating port 92A, the variable winning device 83A, and the through gate 84A has been changed. The game ball launched to the left route may be configured so that the second operating port 92A cannot be won.

By switching the launch destination of the game ball between the right route and the left route according to the game state, the game can be advanced advantageously. By encouraging such technical intervention, the monotonousness of the game is suppressed.

(Reserved ball storage area)
Here, in the present embodiment, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A is different from that of the first embodiment. Hereinafter, the configuration related to the storage of the reserved information in the present embodiment will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 122.

The reserved ball storage area 432A shown in the present embodiment is a first operating port that stores the values of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the first operating port 91A. It has a hold area Ra for the second operation port and a hold area Rb for the second operation port that stores each value of the winning random number counter C1, the type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 when a prize is generated in the second operation port 92A. doing.

The holding area Ra for the first operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the first operating port 91A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second area → Each numerical information is stored in chronological order from the third area to the fourth area. Further, the holding area Rb for the second operating port is composed of the first area to the fourth area, and when the winning of the second operating port 92A occurs a plurality of times in succession, the first area → the second. Each numerical information (holding information) is stored in chronological order in the order of area → third area → fourth area.

In the present embodiment, when the holding information is stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port, the holding information stored in the holding area Rb for the second operating port (specifically, the first area). Is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Then, when the hold information is not stored in the hold area Rb for the second operation port and the hold information is stored in the hold area Ra for the first operation port, the hold area for the first operation port is stored. The hold information stored in Ra (specifically, the first area) is moved to the execution area AE.

In the first embodiment described above, a lottery based on winning a prize in the operating ports 91 and 92 may result in a special deviation. However, in the present embodiment, the operating ports 91 and the second operating port 92 are provided. The configuration differs from that of the first embodiment in that special deviations are omitted (excluded) from the lottery results based on winning. Hereinafter, the pass / fail table for the operating port in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 123.

(Win / fail table for operating port)
As shown in FIG. 123, as the pass / fail table for the operation port, there are a pass / fail table for the low probability mode (low probability pass / fail information group) and a pass / fail table for the high probability mode (high probability pass / fail information group). It is provided.

In the situation where the winning / failing table for the low probability mode (FIG. 123 (a)) is referred to in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the value of the random number that becomes a big hit (that is, the winning information) is There are a total of six "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507". That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "107", "207", "307", "407", and "507" correspond to the jackpot results. On the other hand, in the situation where the winning / failing table for the high probability mode (FIG. 123 (b)) is referred to in the lottery, the value of the random number that becomes the big hit (that is, the winning information) is "7", "37". , "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597", for a total of 30 pieces. That is, among the values of the hit random number counter C1 of "0 to 599", "7", "37", "57", "77", "97", "107" ... "597" correspond to the big hit result. ing. And all the values of random numbers that do not correspond to the jackpot correspond to the out-of-order results (specifically, the out-of-order results). That is, in the lottery based on the winning of the operating ports 91A and 92A, the configuration does not become the "special deviation" shown in the first embodiment.

The distribution table for the operation port is divided into a distribution table for the first operation port and a distribution table for the second operation port. Here, the contents of the distribution table will be described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 124.

As shown in FIG. 124 (a), in the distribution table for the first operating port, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game results. Special game result), 2R probability variation jackpot result (high probability corresponding game result) are set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 19" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result. "20-29 correspond to the 2R probability variation jackpot result.

As shown in FIG. 124 (b), in the distribution table for the second operating port, the 6R normal jackpot result (low probability correspondence special game result) and the 6R probability variation jackpot result (high probability correspondence) are distributed to the game result. Special game result) is set. Specifically, among the values of the type counter C2 of "0 to 29", "0 to 9" corresponds to the 6R normal jackpot result, and "10 to 29" corresponds to the 6R probability variation jackpot result.

Here, each jackpot will be supplementarily described with reference to the schematic diagram of FIG. 125.

When the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained, the process shifts to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B after the end of the special game state. As described in the first embodiment, after the transition to the third normal game state, the number of games executed during the third normal game state reaches the end reference number (specifically, "40 times"). If this is the case, the game shifts to the first normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. That is, the number of times is limited in the third normal game state. In the present embodiment, the counting of the number of games in the third normal game state is limited so that the trigger is the game times executed based on the winning of the second operating port 92A.

In the case of a 6R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special game state, the game shifts to the second normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B. As described in the first embodiment, the second normal gaming state will be continued until the next big hit. On the other hand, in the case of a 2R probability variation jackpot, after the end of the special game state, the state shifts to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

Here, with reference to FIG. 126, a supplementary explanation will be given to the flow of the game when the ceiling arrival and the jackpot overlap.

In the example shown in FIG. 126 (a), the game progresses without a big hit result in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game number executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit ( It has reached the ceiling). The 6R normal jackpot result is obtained in the game times (400th game times) that reach the ceiling, and the system shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. It has shifted to the special game state without any problems. After the end of the special gaming state, the process shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in FIG. 126 (b), the game progresses without a big hit result in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game number executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit ( It has reached the ceiling). The 6R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the game times (400th game times) that reach the ceiling, and the system shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. It has shifted to the special game state without any problems. After the end of the special gaming state, the process shifts to the second normal gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode B.

In the example shown in FIG. 126 (c), the game progresses without a big hit result in the first normal game corresponding to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the game number executed after the end of the special game state is the upper limit ( It has reached the ceiling). The 2R probability variation jackpot result is obtained in the game times (400th game times) that reach the ceiling, and the system shifts to the 4th normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode A when the ceiling is reached. It has shifted to the special game state without any problems. After the end of the special game state, the state shifts to the fifth normal game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency support mode.

As described in detail above, when any of the ceiling arrival, the 6R normal jackpot result, the 6R probability variation jackpot result, and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the benefit of reaching the ceiling is not given to the player. In such a configuration, it is feared that the player's satisfaction will be greatly reduced because the benefits are drowned out even though the ceiling is reached. In this embodiment, a device is devised in consideration of such circumstances. Here, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 127 (a), the first variation start process executed as a part of the variation display control process (see FIG. 41) in the MPU 442 of the notification / effect control device 140 will be described. The first variation start process is a process for starting a game turn effect based on receiving a change start command from the main control device 162, and changes in a symbol such as a reach display as a game turn effect. Set the display mode.

(First fluctuation start processing)
In the first fluctuation start processing, first, the fluctuation start command received this time in step S9401 is read, and the information on the presence / absence of reach occurrence and the information on the fluctuation display time are specified from the command. Further, as described above, when the fluctuation start command is transmitted from the main control device 162, the type command is also transmitted. In step S9401, the type command received together with the fluctuation start command received this time is read, and from the command, the probability variation jackpot result information, the normal jackpot result information, the special deviation result information, the normal deviation result information, and reaching the ceiling. Identify various information related to the game result, such as the information of. Then, in step S9401, from the above-specified information, information on whether or not a jackpot has been won, information on the presence or absence of a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot winning, information on the presence or absence of a special loss, and information on the type of special loss in the case of a special loss. Information, information on whether or not reach has occurred, information on whether or not the ceiling has been reached, information on fluctuation display time, etc. are grasped when the jackpot is not won and the special is not out of order, and the grasped information is stored in the register of MPU442.

In the following step S9402, based on the information grasped in step S9401, it is determined whether or not the game result of the game times started this time is the game result corresponding to the jackpot result. When the current game result is a jackpot result (6R probability variation jackpot result or 6R normal jackpot result), it is determined in the following step S9411 whether or not the current game number reaches the ceiling. If a negative determination is made in step S9411, a jackpot effect setting process is executed in the following step S9403. The jackpot effect setting process includes a stop result determination process for determining the jackpot symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode determination for determining the variable display mode of the jackpot symbol. It is roughly divided into processing (effect pattern determination processing).

In the stop result determination process for the jackpot, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol , "3" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol, "5" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" Symbol, "6" symbol combination, "7" symbol, "7" symbol, "7" symbol combination, "8" symbol, "8" symbol, "8" symbol combination, "9" symbol, "9" symbol The combination of the symbol and the symbol "9" is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot (see, for example, FIG. 45 (a)).

As already explained, when a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for the jackpot, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time and the game result in the type command are obtained. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the above is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S9411, that is, if the current game round is a game round that reaches the ceiling and corresponds to the jackpot result, the process proceeds to step S9412. In step S9412, the effect setting process at the time of duplication is executed. The details of this overlapping effect setting process will be described later.

If it is determined in step S9402 that the result is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S9404. In step S9404, it is determined whether or not the ceiling is reached in this game round. When reaching the ceiling, an affirmative determination is made in step S9404, and the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the effect setting process for reaching the ceiling is executed. The effect setting process for reaching the ceiling includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for reaching the ceiling to be stopped and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the symbol for reaching the ceiling. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for reaching the ceiling, the stop result in which the combination of the symbols for reaching the ceiling is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of the main game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)).

When it reaches the ceiling, the result is notified via the reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for reaching the ceiling, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S9404, the process proceeds to step S9406. In step S9406, it is determined whether or not the game times this time correspond to the special deviation. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9407. In step S9407, the effect setting process for special deviation is executed. The effect setting process for special deviation includes the stop result determination process for determining the special deviation symbol combination to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the variation for determining the variation display mode of the special deviation symbol. It is roughly classified into a display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process).

In the stop result determination process for special deviation, the stop result in which the combination of symbols corresponding to special deviation is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the present embodiment, the combination of the "1" symbol, the "3" symbol, and the "4" symbol is defined as the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation as in the case of reaching the ceiling (see FIG. 45 (b)). ).

In the case of a special deviation, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process for special deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM 443 is acquired, and the game in the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the result is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S9406, the process proceeds to step S9408 to execute the effect setting process for complete disengagement. In the effect setting process for complete deviation, it is grasped whether or not reach will occur in this game round. When reach occurs, the effect setting process for generating reach is executed, and when reach does not occur, the effect setting process for non-reach is executed.

The effect setting process for generating reach includes a stop result determination process for determining a symbol combination for reach-compatible complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and an effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and a variable display mode of the symbol for reach-compatible complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variable display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining.

In the stop result determination process for reach-corresponding complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so as not to be any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for reach correspondence complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

The effect setting process for non-reach generation includes the stop result determination process for determining the symbol combination for non-reach complete disconnection to be stopped and displayed and the effective line for stopping and displaying the symbol combination, and the symbol for non-reach complete disconnection. It is roughly classified into a variation display mode determination process (effect pattern determination process) for determining a variation display mode.

In the stop result determination process for non-reach complete disconnection, the stop symbol is determined so that it does not become any of the symbol combination corresponding to the jackpot result, the symbol combination corresponding to the special deviation result, and the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival. .. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the variation display mode determination process for non-reach complete deviation, the variation display pattern table for non-reach non-correspondence storage stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time of the variation start command received this time is acquired. And the effect pattern corresponding to the game result in the type command is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

After executing any of the processes of steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412, the process proceeds to step S9409. In step S9409, a process of outputting commands including stop result and effect pattern information determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412 to the display control device 410 as stop result commands and pattern commands is executed. The MPU 472 of the display control device 410 controls the display of the symbol display device 95 in order to execute the effect in the current game round, based on the received stop result command and pattern command.

After executing the process of step S9409, in the following step S9410, after executing the process of starting the effect for the game round, the process for starting the variation is ended. Specifically, the drive control of the speaker unit 29 and the lamp unit 26 is started based on the effect pattern determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and S9412 to start the effect for the game round.

Here, the overlap setting process in step S9412 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 127 (b). In the overlapping time setting process, in step S9501, it is determined whether or not the current jackpot result is either the 2R probability variation jackpot result or the 6R normal jackpot result. If an affirmative determination is made in step S9501, the normal setting process is executed in step S9502. The normal setting process is the same as the effect setting process for the jackpot shown in step S9403.

That is, in the stop result determination process that constitutes the normal setting process, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area.

In the case of 6R normal jackpot result, "2" symbol, "2" symbol, "2" symbol combination, "4" symbol, "4" symbol, "4" symbol combination, "6" symbol, "6" symbol Any one of the "6" symbol, the "6" symbol combination, the "8" symbol, the "8" symbol, and the "8" symbol combination is set as a symbol combination for which the stop display (confirmed display) is performed.

In the case of 2R probability variation jackpot result, "1" symbol, "1" symbol, "1" symbol combination, "3" symbol, "3" symbol, "3" symbol combination, "5" symbol, "5" symbol Any one of the "5" symbol, the "5" symbol combination, the "9" symbol, the "9" symbol, and the "9" symbol combination is set as a symbol combination for which the stop display (confirmed display) is performed.

When a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process that constitutes the normal setting process, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

If a negative determination is made in step S9501, that is, if the current jackpot result is a 6R probability variation jackpot result, the special setting process is executed in step S9503. The special setting process is also composed of a stop result determination process and a variation display mode determination process as in the normal setting process of step S9502.

In the stop result determination process that constitutes the special setting process, the stop result in which the same combination of symbols is established on one effective line L1 to L5 is determined as the stop result of this game. Specifically, each effective line L1 to L5 and address information are stored in the final stop line table stored in the various table areas of the ROM 443, and the final stop line determined in the above process is provided in the RAM 444. The final stop line is stored as address information in the address storage area. In addition, the determined stop result information is stored in the stop result address storage area. Then, a symbol combination of "7" symbol, "7" symbol, and "7" symbol is set as a symbol combination to be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) on the final stop line stored in the stop result address storage area.

When a big hit result is obtained, the result is notified via a reach display. In the variation display mode determination process that constitutes the special setting process, the variation display pattern table for reach display stored in various table areas of ROM443 is acquired, and the variation display time and type command of the variation start command received this time are acquired. The effect pattern of the normal reach display or the super reach display corresponding to the game result in is determined. In addition, a process of storing the address information of the determined variable display mode in the pattern address storage area of the RAM 444 is executed.

In the following description, the variable display mode of the symbol determined in step S9503 is referred to as a special variable display mode, and the variable display mode of the symbol determined in steps S9403, S9405, S9407, S9408, and step S9502 ( Distinguish from normal variable display mode).

(Comparison of variable display mode)
Here, referring to FIG. 128, the variation display mode (normal variation display mode) when the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, and the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. The difference from the variable display mode (special variable display mode) of the case will be described. FIG. 128 (a) is a timing chart illustrating the flow of the game when the ceiling arrival and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, and FIG. 128 (b) shows the game flow when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. It is a timing chart exemplifying.

In the game round in which the ceiling arrival and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, as illustrated in FIG. 128 (a), the fluctuation display of the pattern on the operation port display unit is displayed at the timing of tj1 when the game round starts. The variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is started. At the timing of tj2 when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach display is shifted, and at the timing of tj3, the symbol corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the display unit for the operation port, and the symbol display device 95 The symbol combination corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display). As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the 2R probability variation jackpot result has been obtained. In this variable display mode, the game shifts to the special gaming state without clearly indicating that the ceiling has been reached.

The game flow when the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result overlap is basically the same as in FIG. 128 (a), and the symbol combination that is finally stopped and displayed (confirmed display) is the 6R normal jackpot. Since the difference is that the symbol combination corresponds to the result, the description thereof will be omitted.

In the game round in which the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, as illustrated in FIG. 128 (b), the fluctuation display of the pattern on the operation port display unit is displayed at the timing of tk1 when the game round starts. The variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a) is started. At the timing of tk2 when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the reach display is shifted, and at the timing of tk3, the symbol combination corresponding to the arrival at the ceiling is stopped displayed (temporarily stopped displayed) on the symbol display device 95. As a result, it is clearly shown to the player that the ceiling has been reached. However, at the timing of this tk3, the variable display of the pattern on the display unit for the operating port is still ongoing. At the timing of tk4, in which a time having the same length as the finalized display time has elapsed from the timing of tk3, the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95 is restarted. From the timing of tk1 to the timing of tk4 constitutes the first half part in the special variation display mode, and in view of the fact that it is clearly stated that the ceiling has been reached in this first half part, the first half part is "for specifying ceiling arrival". It can be said that it is a "part".

At the timing of tk5 after the latter half part in the special variation display mode is started at the timing of tk4, the symbol corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed on the operation port display unit, and the symbol display device 95 is displayed. The symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped display (confirmed display). The execution time of the latter half part is shorter than that of the first half part, and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without going through the reach display. From the timing of tk4 to the timing of tk5 constitutes the latter half part in the special variation display mode, and in view of the fact that it is clearly stated that the 6R probability variation jackpot result was obtained in this latter half part, the latter half part is "6R probability variation". It can be said that it is a part for clarifying the jackpot result.

In addition, when either the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result or the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the fluctuation display time of the pattern on the display unit for the operation port overlaps, and the operation port when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. The variable display time table is set so that the length is basically the same as the variable display time of the pattern on the display unit. As described above, by making the first half part corresponding to the reach display relatively long and shortening the second half part not supporting the reach display, the variation display is repeated twice when the special variation display mode is executed. The feeling of strangeness is reduced.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without a big hit result, the game shifts to the fourth normal game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode A. In the fourth normal game state, the operating ports 91A and 92A are frequently won, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it becomes conspicuous that the benefits cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a jackpot result is obtained in the game times reaching the ceiling (when overlapping), the determination result is the 6R probability variation jackpot result, the 2R probability variation jackpot result, or the 6R. Normally, different display effects are executed depending on whether the result is a big hit. Specifically, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result (the jackpot result that triggers the transition to the high-frequency support mode for long continuation) is obtained in the game times when the maximum number of times is reached, an effect is executed to clearly indicate that the maximum number of times has been reached. , 2R probability variation jackpot result (big hit result that triggers the transition to the low frequency support mode) or 6R normal jackpot result (big hit result that triggers the transition to the high frequency support mode of short continuation) in the game times when the maximum number of times is reached If this happens, an effect that does not clearly indicate that the maximum number of times has been reached is executed. With such a configuration, when the 6R probability variation jackpot result is obtained and the special game state → high frequency support mode is set, the player can be made to imagine that it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. When the 2R probability variation jackpot result results in a special game state → low frequency switching mode, the player can be made to imagine that the benefit is not occurring in the first place by not explicitly indicating the ceiling arrival, and the 6R probability variation jackpot As a result, when shifting to the high-frequency support mode, which is much shorter than when reaching the ceiling, it is possible to make the player imagine that the benefits are not occurring in the first place by hiding the arrival at the ceiling. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

<Modification example 1>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the 6R normal jackpot result that triggers the transition to the third normal game state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency support mode B overlaps with the ceiling arrival, the normal setting process is executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this. When the 6R normal jackpot result overlaps with the ceiling arrival, the special setting process can be executed. That is, in the game in which the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result overlap, the first half part in which the symbol combination corresponding to the ceiling arrival is stopped and displayed (temporarily stopped display) and the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result are stopped and displayed ( It is also possible to have a configuration in which the variation display of the symbol is executed in the special variation display mode composed of the latter half part to be confirmed (confirmed display).

<Modification 2>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the number of end reference times set when the ceiling is reached is larger than the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot result is obtained. It is not limited to. It is possible to make the number of end reference times set when the 6R normal jackpot result is the same as the number of end reference times set when the ceiling is reached, or it is set when the ceiling is reached. The number of end reference times set when a 6R normal jackpot result is obtained may be larger than the number of end reference times. By combining these configurations with the configurations shown in the first modification, a practically preferable configuration can be realized.

<Modification example 3>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the latter half part (the part that clearly shows the jackpot result) is shorter than the first half part (the part that clearly shows the arrival at the ceiling) in the special variation display mode, but the present invention is limited to this. It's not something. The first half part and the second half part may be configured to have the same length, or the second half part may be configured to be longer than the first half part.

Further, in the latter half part, the symbol combination (“7” symbol, “7” symbol, “7” symbol symbol combination) corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) without going through the reach display. However, in the latter half part as well, the symbol combination corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result may be stopped and displayed (confirmed display) via the reach display as in the first half part.

<Modification example 4>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the variable display time table referred to when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, and the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. The variable display time table referred to in is the same. That is, when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, and when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the variation display time (design) of the pattern on the operation port display unit The variable display time of the symbol on the display device 95) is configured to be common. This may be changed as follows. That is, the variation display time table referred to when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, and the variation display time referred to when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap. A table is provided separately, and when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps, and when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the pattern on the operation port display unit is displayed. The variation display time (the variation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 95) may be different. For example, when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the pattern variation display time on the operation port display unit overlaps when one of the ceiling arrival and the 6R normal jackpot result and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlap. (The fluctuation display time of the symbol in the symbol display device 95) may be long. For example, in the configuration in which the reach display is executed in each of the first half part and the second half part as shown in the above modification 3, when one of the ceiling arrival, the 6R normal jackpot result, and the 2R probability variation jackpot result overlaps. Rather than the case where the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the variation display time of the pattern on the operation port display unit (the variation display time of the symbol on the symbol display device 95) is set to be longer. Has technical significance.

<Modification 5>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the symbol combination indicating the ceiling arrival and the symbol combination indicating the 6R probability variation jackpot result are stopped and displayed respectively. , The structure clearly indicates the arrival at the ceiling and the result of the 6R probability variation jackpot, but at least the specific configuration for indicating the arrival at the ceiling is arbitrary. For example, in a game in which the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, a moving image or a still image (cut-in image of a character or the like) for indicating the ceiling arrival is displayed on the symbol display device 95 (display screen 95a). Alternatively, it is possible to output a sound effect indicating reaching the ceiling or BGM from the speaker unit 29.

<Modification 6>
In the thirteenth embodiment, when the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the ceiling arrival is clearly indicated in the first half part and the 6R probability variation jackpot result is clearly indicated in the second half part. That is, the configuration is specified in the order of reaching the ceiling → 6R probability variation jackpot result, but the configuration is not limited to this. When the ceiling arrival and the 6R probability variation jackpot result overlap, the 6R probability variation jackpot result is specified in the first half part and the ceiling arrival is specified in the second half part, that is, the 6R probability variation jackpot result → ceiling arrival is specified in this order. It is also possible to configure it.

<Modification 7>
In the thirteenth embodiment, the second normal game state that shifts when the 6R probability variation jackpot result is obtained is configured to be continued until the next jackpot result, but the present invention is not limited to this. .. As for the second normal game state, the number of times may be limited as in the third normal game state. For example, when the result of the 6R probability variation jackpot is changed to the second normal gaming state, the number of executions of the game times executed without the jackpot result after the end of the special gaming state becomes the predetermined end reference number. It may be configured to shift to the first normal gaming state. The predetermined number of end reference times may be the same as, for example, the number of end reference times set by reaching the ceiling, or may be larger than the end reference number of times.

<Other embodiments>
The content is not limited to the description of each of the above-described embodiments, and may be implemented as follows, for example. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above-described embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above-described embodiments. Further, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above embodiments. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effect to be exerted) of each configuration to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of embodiments, or may be partially or wholly applied in combination.

(1) In each of the above embodiments, the variable display time table referred to in the first normal game state and the variable display time table referred to in the fourth normal game state are shared, but the first normal game The variable display time table referred to in the state and the variable display time table referred to in the fourth normal gaming state may be provided separately. That is, the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the first normal gaming state may be different from the range and breakdown of the variable display time set in the fourth normal gaming state.

(2) In each of the above embodiments, if the electric accessory 93 is in the open state when switching from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 93 is forcibly switched to the closed state. As a result, it is configured to avoid further winning of the second operating port 92. In order to avoid winning a prize in the second operating port 92 after switching to the low frequency support mode, for example, when switching from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode, the game times that trigger the switching (when the end reference number is reached) It is also possible to switch from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode before the end of the game. Specifically, it is configured to switch from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at a predetermined timing during the variable display in the game times when the end reference number of times is reached, or it is confirmed by the game times when the end reference number of times is reached. It is also possible to switch from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode at the timing when the display is started.

(3) In the configuration in which the lottery based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second operating port 92 results in a special loss, the probability of becoming a special loss based on the winning of the first operating port 91 and the second It is also possible to make a difference from the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the operating port. For example, the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the first operating port 91 may be lower than the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the second operating port 91, or the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the first operating port 91 may be lower. The probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning may be higher than the probability of becoming a special deviation based on the winning of the second operating port.

(4) If the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by the special disconnection, the gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the special disconnection is reached based on the arrival of the end reference number (for example). The configuration is such that the game state shifts from the fourth normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the low frequency support mode (for example, the first normal game state), and then shifts to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode. It is optional whether or not to intervene the game state corresponding to the support mode. For example, if the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special disconnection, the gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency support mode triggered by the special disconnection is reached based on the number of termination reference times (for example, the first). It is also possible to shift from the 4 normal game state) to the game state corresponding to the high frequency support mode (for example, the 4th normal game state) when the ceiling is reached. That is, when the ceiling is reached during the high-frequency support mode triggered by a special deviation, a gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency support mode (for example, the first normal gaming state) is intervened when the end reference number of times is reached. It is also possible to have a configuration in which the gaming state corresponding to the high frequency support mode is continued without any problem.

(5) If a special deviation occurs in a game that reaches the ceiling, the configuration may shift to the high-frequency support mode when the ceiling is reached (a configuration that prioritizes the arrival at the ceiling), or the special deviation may be an opportunity. The configuration may be such that the mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode (a configuration in which special outliers are prioritized).

(6) In each of the above embodiments, the game count counter is updated regardless of which of the game times related to the first operating port 91 and the game times related to the second operating port 92 is executed. It is not limited to this. It is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated when the game times related to the first operating port 91 are executed, while not being updated when the game times related to the second operating port 92 are executed. .. Further, it is also possible to configure the game count counter to be updated when the game times related to the second operating port 92 are executed, but not updated when the game times related to the first operating port 91 are executed. Is.

(7) In each of the above embodiments, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), the game count is counted by the game count counter after the high frequency support mode A triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. Is started, but it is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the game count counter reaches the upper limit (ceiling), it is possible to start counting the game times by the game count counter from the next game round after reaching the ceiling.

(8) In each of the above embodiments, the value of the game count counter is updated (subtracted by "1") at the start of the game round, but the update timing of the value of the game count counter is arbitrary. For example, the game count counter may be updated (subtracted by "1") at the timing when the confirmation display is executed or when the game round ends.

(9) In each of the above embodiments, the base (award for the number of shots of game balls) is set so that the number of balls held is slightly reduced regardless of which of the high frequency support mode A and the high frequency support mode B is supported. The ratio of the number of balls) was set, but it is not limited to this. It is also possible to set the base so that the number of balls held is slightly increased for at least one of the support modes.

(10) The location of the variable winning device 83 in the game area PE is arbitrary. For example, when a left route that detours the variable display unit 85 arranged in the center of the game board 80a from the left side and a right route that detours from the right side are provided as the flow path of the game ball in the game area PE. , The variable winning device 83 may be arranged on one route and restricted so that the game ball fired on the other route cannot reach the variable winning device 83.

(11) In each of the above embodiments, the variation display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the symbol on the symbol display device 95 are based on the winning / failing lottery (determination process) performed in the main control device 162. The configuration is such that the variable display is started, but the present invention is not limited to this. Prior to the winning / failing lottery (determination process) in the main control device 162, it is also possible to start the variable display of the symbol on the operation port display units D1 and D2 and the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display device 95.

(12) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, for example, pachinko machines in which the electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of the special device, or a game in a specific area of the special device. The present invention can also be applied to pachinko machines that generate a right when a ball enters and become a big hit, pachinko machines equipped with other accessories, arrange ball machines, and game machines such as sparrow balls.

In addition, a non-ballistic gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels having a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction is provided, the reels are started to rotate by inserting medals and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. As a result, the present invention also applies to a slot machine that gives a player a privilege such as paying out a medal when a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on an effective line that can be visually recognized from a display window after the reel is stopped. Can be applied.

Further, the gaming machine body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a take-in device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are taken in by the take-in device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, which starts the rotation of the reel.

<About the invention group extracted from each of the above embodiments>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing the effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-described embodiment are appropriately shown in parentheses or the like, but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations shown in the parentheses or the like.

<Characteristic A group>
The following feature A group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Features A1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is set to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
When the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the determination by the determination means, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special gaming state.
When the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the determination by the determination means, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having and.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the game flow when changing the switching control mode to a higher one can be diversified. It can contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher-level one, the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on the presence or absence. For example, by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, it is possible to suppress excessive investment before shifting to the special game state (suppress the decrease in game motivation). , The sharpness of the game can be strengthened by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained. In particular, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information that is not the trigger for mass ejection (the trigger for transition to the special game state), the game is promptly changed to the third switching mode. It is possible to improve the satisfaction of the person.

It is also possible to use the "first judgment information" shown in this feature as the "winning information" and the "second judgment information" as the "special non-winning information".

Feature A2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is set to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
A second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, and
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state in the case of a special out-of-order result), the game flow when changing the switching control mode to a higher one can be diversified. It can contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher-level one, the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on the presence or absence. For example, by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information, it is possible to suppress excessive investment before shifting to the special game state (suppress the decrease in game motivation). , The sharpness of the game can be strengthened by giving preferential treatment to the switching control mode when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained. In particular, when the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information that is not the trigger for mass ejection (the trigger for transition to the special gaming state), the configuration is such that the player promptly switches to the third gaming state (third switching mode). Thereby, the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

It is also possible to use the "first judgment information" shown in this feature as the "winning information" and the "second judgment information" as the "special non-winning information".

Feature A3. As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
In both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained by the determination by the determination means is configured to be the same.
The first gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode and the low probability mode.
The gaming machine according to feature A2, wherein the third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode and the low probability mode.

If the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the first gaming state, the process shifts to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state. At this time, although the low probability mode is inherited as the determination mode, the switching control mode is changed from the first switching mode to the third switching mode. As a result, it becomes possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing investment, and a certain kind of player relief function is exhibited. When such a relief function is exerted, the special gaming state is not passed through as described above, so that the time required for the function to be exerted can be shortened as much as possible, so that the game is unnecessarily delayed. It is possible to make it difficult to give the player the impression as if it were.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A3, wherein the transition required period by the second transition means is configured to be shorter than the transition required period by the first transition means. ..

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is promptly changed to the third switching mode, and the benefit of the above-mentioned relief function is enjoyed. The time lag until it is possible can be reduced. This is preferable in order to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play, aiming for a determination result (transition to a special gaming state) corresponding to the first determination information.

Feature A5. The variable mechanism control means receives the variable mechanism when the variable mechanism is won by a lottery (support lottery) based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion (for example, a through gate 84) provided in the game area. It is configured to switch to the state,
The second switching mode is configured so that the winning probability in the lottery is changed to be higher than that of the first switching mode.
The third switching mode is configured so that the winning probability in the lottery is the same as that in the first switching mode, but the required period from winning in the lottery to the acceptance state is shortened. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature A1 to the feature A4.

As shown in this feature, when the first switching mode → the second switching mode is changed, the winning probability in the lottery based on the passage of the passing portion is changed, and when the first switching mode → the third switching mode is changed, the corresponding The time required from winning to the acceptance state is shortened without changing the winning probability. If the configuration is such that the second switching mode and the third switching mode are differentiated by using different parameters in this way, the technical idea shown in the feature A1 or the like can be suitably realized.

Feature A6. The second switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the third switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.

According to the feature A6, in the second switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, that is, the game balls, as compared with the third switching mode. The value obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots of the game balls (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes higher, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. That is, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained and the mode shifts to the second switching mode via the special gaming state, there is a chance to acquire a large number of balls. On the other hand, in the third switching mode, the above-mentioned base is given preferential treatment over the first switching mode, but the degree of the base is suppressed to be lower than that of the second switching mode, so that the relief function becomes excessive. Can be suppressed. With such a configuration, the sharpness of the game can be enhanced by using a plurality of switching modes together.

Feature A7. The third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A5.

According to the feature A7, in the third switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired, that is, the game balls, as compared with the second switching mode. The value obtained by dividing the number of payouts by the number of shots of the game balls (hereinafter referred to as the base) becomes higher, and it becomes possible to proceed with the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. In other words, if the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information and the player shifts to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state, a large number of balls cannot be expected at that time, but the decrease in the number of balls held is greatly suppressed. You can ask for an opportunity to acquire a large number of balls that have a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. With such a configuration, the soundness of the game can be suitably improved.

Feature A8. When the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode reaches the end reference number of times (for example, 40 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the first switching mode The gaming machine according to any one of the features A1 to A7, which is configured to shift to the corresponding predetermined gaming state.

By setting an upper limit (end reference number of times) for the number of games in a predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode, it is possible to return from the third switching mode to the first switching mode, and the third switching mode is set. It is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in tension in the subsequent game.

Feature A9. As the determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability,
In both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained by the determination by the determination means is configured to be the same.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and
A second gaming state (for example, a third normal gaming state) corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode, and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
The first transition means is configured to shift to the second gaming state through the special gaming state when a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. And
The second transition means shifts to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. It is configured to be
A third transition to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the end reference number of times (for example, 40 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. Means (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 at the time of time saving digestion) and
When the number of times the game is executed in the third game state reaches the end reference number of times (for example, 40 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the fourth transition to the first game state is performed. Described in any one of the features A1 to A8, which comprises means (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 at the time of time saving digestion). Game machine.

According to this feature, an upper limit (end reference number of times) is set for the number of games in the third game state, and when the upper limit is reached, demotion (return) from the third game state to the first game state may occur. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress a decrease in the tension of the game after the transition to the third game state.

Further, the end reference number of times is set in each of the second game state and the third game state. It is possible to contribute to the diversification of games by providing a transition route to a limited advantageous state in which an upper limit is set on the number of games, via / not via the special game state. In such a configuration, the base in the third switching mode may be configured so that the difference from the base in the second switching mode is smaller than the difference from the base in the first switching mode. preferable.

Feature A10. The number of end reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, is less than the number of end reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, which comprises means for setting.

As shown in this feature, setting the end reference number of times in the third gaming state to be less than the end reference number of times in the second gaming state raises the frequency of transition to the third gaming state and increases the frequency of transition to the third gaming state. This is advantageous for increasing the frequency of migration. This is preferable in suppressing the monotony of the game.

Feature A11. The end reference number of times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means, is set to be the same as the end reference number of times, which is the reference for shifting to the first gaming state by the third transition means. The gaming machine according to feature A9, characterized in that it has means for playing pachinko and pachinko machines.

As shown in this feature, if the end reference number of times in the third game state and the end reference number of times in the second game state are aligned, the transition to one game state (second game state, third game state) is made. You can make it look as if there are multiple routes. This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game and to avoid it as a factor that causes confusion for the player.

Feature A12. In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the fifth game state is shifted to the third gaming state. Migration method and
When the fifth game state is used to shift to the third game state, the number of times the game is executed in the third game state does not become a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the end reference number (for example, 400 times). ), A sixth transition means (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 at the time of time saving digestion) is provided.
The number of termination reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the sixth transition means, is set to be larger than the number of termination reference times, which is the reference for shifting to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means. The gaming machine according to any one of feature A9 to feature A11, which is characterized in that it has a configuration to be set.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the first game state, and the number of times the game is executed during the first game state is the upper limit number (ceiling). In that case, the game shifts to the third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode. In this way, excessive investment can be suppressed by relieving the player in the third gaming state as a judgment result or reaching the ceiling that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state as the opportunity to shift to the third gaming state. Can contribute. In particular, the number of end reference times set when reaching the ceiling is relatively large, and the number of end reference times set when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is relatively small, thereby diversifying the game. And the enhancement of the relief function can be preferably realized.

Feature A13. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is set to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
A second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, and
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state, and
In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the state shifts to the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means to make it.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (big hit result). When the special game state) is reached or when the number of times the game is executed reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached) during the first game state, the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state. By doing so, it is possible to diversify the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher one, and to contribute to suppressing the monotony of the game. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher-level one, the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. The frequency with which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state differs depending on whether it reaches the ceiling. As a result, further diversification of games will be realized. In particular, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of excessive investment by relieving the player in the third gaming state as a determination result that does not correspond to the transition to the special gaming state or reaching the ceiling when the transition to the third gaming state occurs.

It is also possible to use the "first judgment information" shown in this feature as the "winning information" and the "second judgment information" as the "special non-winning information".

Feature A14. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is set to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state (for example, the first normal gaming state) corresponding to the first switching mode and
A second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state) and
A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, a means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, and
In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the state shifts to the third gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a means to make it.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result (big hit result) corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained, the switching control mode is changed via the special game state, and the game times are executed during the first game state. If the switching control mode is changed without going through the special game state when the number of times reaches the upper limit (ceiling reached), the flow of the game when changing the switching control mode to a higher one It can be diversified and contribute to the suppression of monotonous games. Further, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the switching control mode is switched to a higher one, the variable mechanism is accepted depending on whether the trigger is the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information or the ceiling is reached. The frequency of the state will be different. As a result, further diversification of games will be realized. In particular, it is possible to contribute to the suppression of excessive investment by relieving the player in the third gaming state by using the opportunity to shift to the third gaming state as reaching the ceiling.

It is also possible to use the "first judgment information" shown in this feature as the "winning information" and the "second judgment information" as the "special non-winning information".

The technical ideas shown in the above features A1 to A12 may be applied to the features A13 to A14.

<Characteristic B group>
The following feature B group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the ball-entry part and the non-acceptance state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Feature B1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, a first transition means (main control device) for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state. In 162 MPU 402, the function of shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state triggered by the jackpot result) and
A second transition means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state. (A function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a special deviation result).
After shifting to the second type gaming state by the second transition means, the number of times the game is executed during the second type gaming state is the end reference number (for example, 40) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. 3rd transition means for transitioning to the 1st type gaming state (function of shifting from the 4th normal gaming state to the 1st normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 with the time saving digestion as an opportunity) When,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. It is provided with a fourth transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
The fourth transfer means is at least the second type when the number of executions of the game times after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit number during the second type gaming state transferred by the second transition means. A gaming machine characterized in that the transition to the type 2 gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times is delayed until the number of times the game is executed in the gaming state reaches the end reference number.

According to the feature B1, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the end of the special game state When the upper limit of the number of games is reached (ceiling is reached), the game may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. By entering the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to enhance the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the ceiling arrival are used together as an opportunity to shift to the second type gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, the ceiling arrival is invalidated, or the second type game state is forcibly terminated with the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information. It is feared that some of the benefits that the player should have originally enjoyed will disappear, and the satisfaction level of the player will be greatly reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the type 2 game state, the ceiling is reached at least until the number of times the game is executed in the type 2 game state reaches the end reference number. The transition to the second-class gaming state will be delayed. As a result, the above concerns can be dispelled and the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and a ball entering a ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92 or a variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. A gaming machine equipped with (payout device 224), which acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry section. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and acquisition information storage means (main control device) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. The reserved ball storage area 432) in the RAM 404 of 162) and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The determination is made by the determination means (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the determination means prior to the determination by the determination means or by the determination means. Based on this, the game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. The predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) are controlled so that the game rotation operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game time control means (a function of executing a game time control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and as the predetermined determination information, the first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and the second determination Information (a group of random numbers corresponding to the special deviation result) is provided, the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means ends. A special game state transition means (mainly) for shifting the game state to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). The function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the control device 162), the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the entering state of the game ball rather than the accepted state. The variable ball-entry unit (variable winning device 83) as the ball-entry unit, which can be switched to the non-acceptance state (closed state), which is difficult to receive, and the variable ball-entry unit when the special gaming state is entered. A control means for the variable ball entry unit that switches between the state and the non-acceptance state (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the acceptance state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball entry unit. ) And a variable mechanism (electric accessory 93) that can switch to a non-accepted state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state, and a control means for the variable mechanism (main control) that controls the variable mechanism. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with a function for executing electric service support processing), and as a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means, a type 1 switching mode (low frequency support mode) is provided. ) And the second type switching mode (high frequency support mode) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first type switching mode. When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode, the predetermined game corresponding to the second type switching mode is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means for transitioning to the state (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger) and the first transition means. When shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the type 1 switching mode, the number of times the game is executed in the predetermined gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and is set to the end reference number (for example, 40 times). A second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first type switching mode (from the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the time saving digestion in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 to the first normal gaming state). The second function when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information. It is provided with a third transition means (a function of shifting from the first normal game state to the fourth normal game state when reaching the ceiling in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the type switching mode. The third transition means is used as a game rotation during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second type switching mode in which the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is used as an opportunity. When the number of times of execution reaches the upper limit, at least until the number of times of execution of the game in the predetermined game state reaches the end reference number, the predetermined number of times corresponding to the second type switching mode is triggered. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured to delay the transition to the gaming state. It is also possible to say.

Feature B2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state). ) And a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means (main control device 162) shifts to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. The function of shifting from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state in the MPU 402 triggered by the jackpot result) and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the second transition means (mainly) for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state. In the MPU 402 of the control device 162, the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by the special deviation result) and
In the third gaming state transferred by the second transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the end reference number of times (for example, 40 times). In the case of, a third transition means (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for shortening the time) and the third transition means for shifting to the first gaming state.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. It is provided with a fourth transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
The fourth transition means is at least in the third gaming state when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means. A gaming machine characterized in that the transition to the third gaming state is delayed when the maximum number of times is reached until the number of times the game is executed reaches the end reference number.

According to the feature B2, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the end of the special game state When the upper limit of the number of games is reached (ceiling is reached), the game may shift to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode. By entering the third switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to enhance the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the ceiling arrival are used together as an opportunity to shift to the third gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the ceiling arrival is invalidated, or if the third game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is forcibly terminated. , It is feared that some of the benefits that the player should have originally enjoyed will disappear, and the satisfaction level of the player will be greatly reduced. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, the ceiling is reached at least until the number of times the game is executed in the third game state reaches the end reference number. The transition to the third gaming state will be delayed. As a result, the above concerns can be dispelled and the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

Feature B3. The switching mode of the variable mechanism when the fourth transition means shifts to the third gaming state is the same as the switching mode of the variable mechanism when the second transition means shifts to the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature B2, which is characterized in that it is configured as described above.

As shown in feature B2, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state and the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling is performed, the switching modes of the variable mechanisms are arranged so as to be the same. It is possible to prevent the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being inferior to the previous behavior.

Feature B4. The end reference number of times is the first end reference number of times.
In the third gaming state shifted by the fourth transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example, 400). When the number of times is reached, the fifth transition means (the function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) is performed. Prepare,
The gaming machine according to feature B2 or feature B3, wherein the first end reference number of times is defined to be less than the second end reference number of times.

When the delay function shown in the feature B2 is provided, it is assumed that if the benefit of reaching the ceiling is immediately terminated after a large delay, it will be a factor that impairs the player's willingness to play. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the first end reference number <the second end reference number, excessive delay is suppressed and the impression that the benefit after reaching the ceiling is obsolete is suppressed. be able to.

Feature B5. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. After the transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of times the game has been executed reaches the end reference number, the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B4, which is characterized by having a configuration.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game is configured by shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returning to the third gaming state. It is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game.

Feature B6. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. After the transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the number of times the game has been executed reaches the end reference number, the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times is performed. It is composed and
The number of games executed during the first gaming state shifted by the third transition means under the situation where the transition to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is delayed is determined by the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B4, which is defined to be less than the upper limit of storage of memorable special information.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game is configured by shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returning to the third gaming state. It is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration in which the first game state is interposed, there is a high possibility that the player is given the impression that the enjoyment of the benefit is unreasonably delayed by repeating the game times in the first game state. .. In particular, it is assumed that such an impression becomes stronger when the number of special information stored by the intervention of the first game state becomes 0 and the continuous progress of the game times is interrupted. In this regard, by limiting the number of games executed in the intervening first game state to be less than the upper limit of the storage of special information, it is possible to prevent the continuation of game times from being interrupted when returning to the third game state. However, the above concerns can be preferably dispelled.

Feature B7. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. After the transition to the first gaming state by the third transition means triggered by the execution number of game times becoming the end reference number, and after the execution of one game number in the first gaming state, the said The gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B4, which is configured to shift to the third gaming state when the upper limit of the number of times is reached.

As shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third gaming state, the game is configured by shifting from the third gaming state to the first gaming state and then returning to the third gaming state. It is possible to add an accent to the rhythm of the game and contribute to suppressing the monotonization of the game. Further, in the configuration in which the first game state is interposed, there is a high possibility that the player is given the impression that the enjoyment of the benefit is unreasonably delayed by repeating the game times in the first game state. .. In this regard, if the configuration is such that the player returns to the third game state after one game, the above concerns can be preferably dispelled.

Feature B8. The feature is that the notification means for notifying the transition to the third gaming state during the first gaming state in which the transition to the third gaming state is delayed by the fourth transition means is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of B5 and B7.

The configuration that secures an opportunity to notify the transition to the third gaming state during the first gaming state encourages attention to each game during the third gaming state before the transition to the first gaming state. Preferred above.

Feature B9. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game rotation operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
The operation period setting means stores the game times executed during the first gaming state in which the transition to the third gaming state is delayed by the fourth transition means in the acquired information storage means. The gaming machine according to feature B8, which is configured to set a predetermined operation period regardless of the number of special information.

As shown in feature B5 and the like, in the configuration of returning to the third game state via the first game state, the operation period of the game turn operation of the game times executed during the first game state varies. The following inconveniences may occur. That is, when the operation period is relatively short, the time for notifying the player of the transition to the third gaming state is insufficient, and when the operation period is relatively long, the transition to the third gaming state is unreasonable. It makes it easier to give the player the impression that it is delayed. Therefore, as shown in this feature, for the game times during the first game state in which the transition to the third game state is delayed, a predetermined number is determined regardless of the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. As a configuration for setting the operation period, the above concern can be solved by keeping the operation period constant.

Feature B10. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the fourth transition means is in the third gaming state. The description in any one of the features B2 to B4, wherein the player shifts to the third game state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times without going through another game state after the end. Gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if the configuration is such that the third game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the third game state triggered by reaching the ceiling are seamlessly connected, the two benefits are 1 It can be put together and the impact can be strengthened.

Feature B11. During the third gaming state shifted by the second transition means, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state becomes the upper limit number, and the transition to the third gaming state by the fourth transition means is delayed. If the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first determination information during the process, the transition to the fourth transition means triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times is invalidated. The gaming machine according to any one of feature B2 to feature B10, which is characterized by being configured.

As shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained in the situation where the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival at the ceiling is about to occur, the third judgment result triggered by the arrival at the ceiling It is preferable to configure the game so that the transition to the game state is invalid in order to prevent the player from becoming excessive in the rescue function.

Feature B12. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the transition to the third game state occurs. Equipped with special effect execution means that can execute special effects that indicate that
When the upper limit number of times is reached during the first gaming state, the special effect executing means executes the special effect in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, while shifting by the second transition means. Any of the features B2 and B11 characterized in that the special effect is not executed in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached during the third game state. The gaming machine described in one.

When the maximum number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the first game state, it is promptly notified that the game shifts to the third game state by executing a special effect at that game time. On the other hand, when the maximum number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the third game state, the special effect is avoided in that game time. In this way, when the transition to the third gaming state triggered by reaching the ceiling is delayed, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is used as an opportunity by intentionally not performing the special effect. It is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the shifted third gaming state from decreasing before the end of the gaming state.

Feature B13. When the upper limit number of times is reached during the third game state shifted by the second shift means, it is a game number executed after the game number of reaching the upper limit number of times, and the fourth shift. Feature B2 to feature B11 characterized in that the means is provided with means for notifying the transition to the third gaming state in the gaming round before the transition to the third gaming state triggered by the arrival of the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine described in any one of.

As shown in this feature, when the maximum number of times is reached (ceiling reached) during the third game state, the third game state is entered when the ceiling is reached in the game times executed after the ceiling is reached. In the game times before the transition, the player is notified of the transition to the third gaming state (reaching the ceiling). With such a configuration, it is possible to promote the expectation that the third gaming state is substantially extended by reaching the ceiling even in the gaming times other than the gaming times that can reach the ceiling.

Feature B14. When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the transition to the third game state occurs. Equipped with special effect execution means that can execute special effects that indicate that
When the special effect executing means reaches the upper limit number of times during the third game state and the number of times the game times are executed during the third game state is larger than the predetermined number of times, the game reaches the upper limit number of times. While the special effect is executed in each round, if the maximum number of times is reached during the third gaming state and the number of times the game is executed in the third gaming state is less than the predetermined number of times, the upper limit is reached. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature B2 to the feature B11, characterized in that the special effect is executed in the game times executed after the game times.

When the upper limit number of times is reached (reached the ceiling) during the third gaming state, which is triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the impression of the player may differ depending on the timing. For example, when the ceiling is reached immediately after the transition, there is a possibility that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information may give an impression as if it was a waste. Therefore, as shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the third game state, it is special according to the number of times the game is executed during the third game state (the number of games executed so far). The above concerns can be dispelled by making the timing of occurrence of the effect, that is, the timing of notification of reaching the ceiling different.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature B3 to feature B14 may be applied to feature B1.

Incidentally, each technical idea shown in the above-mentioned feature A group may be applied to the feature B1 to the feature B14.

<Characteristic C group>
The following feature C group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Feature C1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the low-frequency switching mode. High-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, a first transition means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state. The function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the second normal gaming state or the third normal gaming state with the jackpot result in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
In the type 2 gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the type 2 gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number of times. When the number of times is (for example, 20 times), the second transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state (from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the time saving digestion). Function to migrate) and
When the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the third transition to the second type gaming state is performed without going through the special gaming state. Means (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a special deviation result),
In the type 2 gaming state transferred by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the type 2 gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number of times. When the number of times is (for example, 20 times), the fourth transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state (in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, the fourth normal gaming state is changed to the first normal gaming state with the time saving digestion as an opportunity. A gaming machine characterized by having a function to transfer).

According to the feature C1, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the process shifts to the second type gaming state through the special gaming state. The second type game state corresponds to the high frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. There is a limit on the number of times in the type 2 game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the type 2 game state reaches the first end reference number, the type 1 game corresponding to the low frequency switching mode is provided. Move to the state. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information acquired based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second type gaming state to the first type gaming state, those information are stored. The game round is executed based on the special information provided. In the remaining game times related to the second start ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be obtained. If the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times, the special game state is promptly shifted to the second type game state without going through, and the high frequency switching mode loops. Become. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature C2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode (low frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the second starting ball entry portion are longer than the first switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set so that it is easy to enter the ball.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state). ) And a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, a first transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. (Function to shift from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state) in the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state shifted by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number (for example). (20 times), a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion). )When,
A third transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a third transition means). In the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special deviation result) and
In the third gaming state shifted by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example, (20 times), a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion). ) And a gaming machine.

According to the feature C2, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the process shifts to the second gaming state through the special gaming state. The second gaming state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. A limit is set for the number of times in the second game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game shifts to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. do. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information acquired based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, they are stored. The game is executed based on the special information provided. In the remaining game times related to the second start ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be obtained. When the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times, the special game state is shifted to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through, and the high frequency switching mode loops. Will be done. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature C3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the starting ball entry portion, a first starting ball entry portion (first operating port 91) arranged in the first flow path (left route) in the game area and a second flow path (right route) in the game area. ), And has a second starting ball entry portion (second operating port 92).
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in both the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. , The determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode (low frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the second starting ball entry portion are longer than the first switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set so that it is easy to enter the ball.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a second / third normal gaming state). ) And a third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, a first transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. (Function to shift from the first normal game state to the second normal game state or the third normal game state) in the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state shifted by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number (for example). (20 times), a second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion). )When,
A third transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state (a third transition means). In the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state triggered by a special deviation result) and
In the third gaming state shifted by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example, (20 times), a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion). ) And a gaming machine.

According to the feature C3, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the process shifts to the second gaming state through the special gaming state. The second game state corresponds to the second switching mode, and by firing the game ball to the second route, the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section is increased and the decrease of the number of balls held is suppressed. A limit is set for the number of times in the second game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game shifts to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. do. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, the special information acquired based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is stored by the second storage means, and after the transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state, they are stored. The game is executed based on the special information provided. In the remaining game times related to the second start ball entry portion, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be obtained. When the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times, the special game state is shifted to the third game state corresponding to the third switching mode without going through, and the high frequency switching mode loops. Will be done. With this loop, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature C4. The determination based on the entry of the ball into the second starting ball entry portion has a configuration in which the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is more likely to be obtained than the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. The gaming machine according to feature C2 or feature C3.

As described above, when the state shifts from the second gaming state or the third gaming state to the first gaming state, the game related to the second starting ball entry portion is limited to the number of special information stored in the second storage means. Times are executed. In these game times, the probability that the judgment result corresponds to the second judgment information is higher than the probability that the judgment result corresponds to the first judgment information, and the judgment result does not correspond to the first judgment information. It is also possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while looping the high-frequency switching mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the interest of the game without increasing the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.

Feature C5. If the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second determination information during the second gaming state and the third gaming state, the determination result is invalid. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C2 to the feature C4.

According to the feature C5, if the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second / third game state, the judgment result is invalid, while the first game from the second / third game state is invalidated. When the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained in the remaining game times related to the second start ball entry portion when the state is changed, the state is changed to the third game state with the judgment result as an opportunity. According to such a configuration, the presence or absence of the loop depends on the maximum number of stored special information related to the second starting ball entry portion. Therefore, when adjusting the advantage by increasing or decreasing the end reference number in the second / third game state, it is possible to avoid affecting the loop probability and set the end reference number freely. The degree can be suitably improved.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is configured so that "during the second gaming state and the third gaming state, it is avoided that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the determination by the determination means. It is also possible to say that the gaming machine according to any one of the feature C2 to the feature C4. "

Feature C6. The gaming machine according to any one of feature C2 to feature C5, wherein the second end reference number of times is defined to be the same number as the first end reference number of times.

The configuration shown in this feature recognizes that when the second gaming state → the first gaming state → the third gaming state is established, the gaming states before and after the first gaming state are sandwiched by the player as if they were the same. It is preferable to promote.

Feature C7. The switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature C2 to the feature C6.

The configuration shown in this feature recognizes that when the second gaming state → the first gaming state → the third gaming state is established, the gaming states before and after the first gaming state are sandwiched by the player as if they were the same. It is preferable to promote.

The "switching mode" shown in this feature is composed of three elements: a period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the switch is made to the open state, and an interval period between the open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the above" means that there are more matching or similar elements among the three elements than in the "first switching mode".

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "feature G2 to feature G4, wherein the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode matches the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode. The gaming machine described in any one of the above. ”

Feature C8. Before the special information stored in the second storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information, and
In the second gaming state and the third gaming state, special information to be determined after the transition to the first gaming state with the transition from the second gaming state and the third gaming state to the first gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature C2 to feature C6, which comprises a special effect executing means for executing a special effect based on a specific result by the above-mentioned specific means.

Immediately after shifting from the second gaming state or the third gaming state to the first gaming state, the remaining reserved game times related to the second starting ball entry portion are executed. Then, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in these game times, the transition from the first game state to the third game state is performed. Here, as shown in this feature, in the second / third game state, it is specified in advance whether the remaining reserved game times will be the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, and special based on the result. By performing the effect, it is possible to improve the degree of attention to the presence or absence of the occurrence of the loop described above.

Feature C9. When the second gaming state and the third gaming state shift to the first gaming state, the prior identification means has a configuration in which the identification is performed in the final gaming times in the second gaming state and the third gaming state. The gaming machine according to feature C8, which is characterized in that it is.

If the above specification is performed in the final game round in the second / third game state, the special effect is executed in a state where the number of special information stored in the second storage means has reached the upper limit of storage. Therefore, the function of suggesting the continuation of the loop can be suitably exhibited by the special effect.

Feature C10. The gaming machine according to feature C9, which is configured to start the special effect before being specified by the prior identification means at the final gaming round.

According to the feature C10, by starting the special effect prior to the identification by the prior identification means, the restriction on the execution period of the special effect can be relaxed, and the obsolescence of the special effect can be suitably suppressed.

In addition, each technical idea shown in feature C4 to feature C10 may be applied to feature C1.

Incidentally, each technical idea shown in the above-mentioned features A to B may be applied to features C1 to C10.

<Feature D group>
The following feature D group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the ball-entry part and the non-acceptance state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Feature D1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is set to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) that is set to be
When the result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first A first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger of a special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode that has been transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. MPU402 (function to shift from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state) and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A third transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) and a third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.
When the first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the special effect executing means for executing the special effect suggesting the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. ,
With
The special effect executing means is configured to determine the effect mode of the special effect depending on whether or not the upper limit number of times is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination. A gaming machine featuring.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. Transition. In the second switching mode, the ball enters the second starting ball entry section frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the game may shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In this case, a special effect is executed. The mode of the special effect is determined according to whether or not the ceiling is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination. According to such a configuration, for example, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the ceiling arrival is suggested, and conversely, the second switching mode-corresponding transition to the predetermined gaming state is triggered. It is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the judgment result corresponds to the judgment information or whether the result reaches the ceiling, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

Feature D2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is set to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) that is set to be
When the result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the first A first transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the two switching modes (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger of a special deviation result).
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode that has been transferred by the first transition means, the determination that the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode corresponds to the first determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times, 40 times, 260 times) is reached without a result, the second transition means (main control device 162) shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. MPU402 (function to shift from the 4th normal game state to the 1st normal game state) and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A third transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) and a third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.
When the first transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the special effect executing means for executing the special effect suggesting the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. With
The special effect executing means determines the effect mode of the special effect based on the end reference number of times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination and the remaining number of games that reach the upper limit number of times. A gaming machine characterized by having a structure.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. Transition. In the second switching mode, the ball enters the second starting ball entry section frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the game may shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. In this case, a special effect is executed. The mode of the special effect is determined based on the number of times of the end reference in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode of the transition destination and the number of remaining games that reach the ceiling. According to such a configuration, for example, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained, the ceiling arrival is suggested, and conversely, the second switching mode-corresponding transition to the predetermined gaming state is triggered. It is possible to make it difficult or impossible to distinguish whether the judgment result corresponds to the judgment information or whether the result reaches the ceiling, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game due to the diversification of the game.

Feature D3. The special effect executing means is the first executing means.
As the special effect, a first special effect and a second special effect having different production modes are provided.
When the third transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special effect is executed as an effect suggesting the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. Equipped with a second means of execution
The first executing means has a means for executing the second special effect when the set number of ending reference times is larger than the number of remaining games that reach the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine described in D2.

According to the feature D3, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the ceiling is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode which shifts with the judgment result as an opportunity, the ceiling is reached at normal times. The special effect (second special effect) that is executed when this happens and the same special effect (second special effect) are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the ceiling look as if it were variable.

Feature D4. The first executing means is characterized in that it has a means for executing the first special effect when the set end reference number of times is less than the remaining number of games that reach the upper limit number of times. The gaming machine described in D3.

According to the feature D4, when the set end reference number of times <the number of games to reach the ceiling, the first special effect is executed instead of the second special effect. This is preferable in order to exert the mimicry effect shown in the feature D3.

Feature D5. When the second special effect is executed by the first executing means and then the third transition means shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second executing means is said to be the first. 2 The gaming machine according to feature D3 or feature D4, which is characterized in that it does not execute a special effect.

As shown in feature D5, when the ceiling is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the second special effect is not executed and the ceiling reach is hidden, so that the mimicry shown in feature D3 is shown. The effect can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature D6. When the upper limit number of times is reached during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode, the third transition means is triggered by the arrival of the end reference number of times by the second transition means. After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode, it is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode.
A state suggesting means for suggesting a state suggesting that the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is provided.
The state suggesting means reaches the upper limit number of times during the second switching mode, and by the third transition means, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode is changed from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. Any of the features D3 and D5 characterized in that the state is suggested over the three gaming states when the state is shifted to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature D6, when the second switching mode → the first switching mode → the second switching mode is established, the mimicry effect shown in the feature D3 is continued by continuing the suggestion of the second switching mode even during the first switching mode. Can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature D7. The first transition means is any number of times including the first end reference number and the second reference number, which are different in the number of times as the end reference number when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature D2 to the feature D6, which has a means for setting.

If the first end reference number of times and the second end reference number of times are used in combination as shown in the feature D7, the pseudo-variable function of the ceiling shown in the feature D2 and the like can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature D8. The first end reference number of times is less than the upper limit number of times.
The gaming machine according to feature D7, wherein the second end reference number of times is equal to or greater than the upper limit number of times.

According to the feature D8, when the first end reference number of times is set, the presence or absence of reaching the ceiling in the second switching mode depends on the remaining number of times until the ceiling is reached, and when the second end reference number of times is set. Can reach the ceiling during the second switching mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to preferably suppress that the function is not exerted well in pseudo-variable the ceiling using the second determination information.

The technical ideas shown in the above features D3 to D8 may be applied to the feature D1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above features A to C may be applied to the features D1 to D8.

<Feature E group>
The following feature group E describes "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the ball-entry part and the non-acceptance state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Feature E1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A, 92A and the variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
Judgment means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result) (process for lottery in MPU 402 of the main control device 162). Function to execute) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means becoming the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the game state is changed to the predetermined game state (for example, the normal game state or the special game). Special game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for special hit game state transition processing and jackpot game state transition) for shifting to a special game state (special hit game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state). Function to execute processing) and
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83B) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
When the variable ball entry unit control means shifts to the special gaming state as a determination result (for example, a special hit result or a big hit result) that the determination result by the determination means corresponds to the predetermined information. , The variable ball entry section is switched to the acceptance state.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The predetermined information includes first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a normal jackpot) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a probabilistic jackpot) that is more advantageous to the player than the first information. ,
The determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion has a configuration in which the determination result corresponding to the second information is more likely to be obtained than the determination based on the entry into the first start entry ball portion. Ori,
A variable mechanism (electric) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entering portion and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Character 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the low-frequency switching mode. High-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) is provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the special game state is shifted to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. A gaming machine characterized by having a means of transition.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the game shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. .. In the high frequency switching mode, it is possible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and in the judgment (lottery) based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, not only the judgment result corresponding to the first information but also the judgment result corresponding to the first information It can be a determination result corresponding to the second information which is more advantageous to the player than the first information. Therefore, the advantage in the determination is greatly increased. In other words, by reaching the ceiling, it will shift to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous gaming state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player shifts to the chance zone when reaching the ceiling, the player's willingness to play can be suitably stimulated. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature E2. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A, 92A and the variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special hit result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state or the special gaming state). Special game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transition processing to the special hit game state and jackpot game) for shifting to a special game state (special hit game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state). A function to execute the transition process to the state) and
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83B) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the predetermined information, first information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the big hit result) are provided.
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit is first controlled. A means for switching to the acceptance state in an embodiment and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (big hit result) and shifts to the special gaming state, or becomes the first determination result and the variable input. When the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the ball portion, the variable entering portion is provided with a means for switching to the receiving state in the second control mode.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The second storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The second determination result can be generated in any of the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion, while the first determination result. The result is configured so that it can occur only in the determination based on the entry into the second starting entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entering portion and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Character 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the low-frequency switching mode. High-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) is provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the special game state is shifted to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. A gaming machine characterized by having a transition means (a function of shifting from a normal gaming state to a third special gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the game shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. .. In the high frequency switching mode, it is possible to enter the second starting ball entry section, and in the judgment (lottery) based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section, not only the judgment result corresponding to the first information but also the judgment result corresponding to the first information It can be a determination result corresponding to the second information. Therefore, the advantage in the determination (probability of winning or transition to the special gaming state) is greatly increased. In other words, by reaching the ceiling, it will shift to a chance zone with a higher advantage than the previous gaming state. In this way, if the configuration is such that the player shifts to the chance zone when reaching the ceiling, the player's willingness to play can be suitably stimulated. This is preferable in order to suppress the monotony of the game and improve the degree of attention to the game.

Further, when the ball reaches the ceiling, the ball enters the second starting ball entry portion, so that not only the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed but also the probability of transition to the special gaming state is increased. In such a configuration, even if the stay period in the second switching mode is shortened, the benefit can be suitably exhibited, so that the extension of the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably suppressed.

Feature E3. The special transition means is the first special transition means, and is
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, the game times during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are not obtained as a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. When the number of executions reaches the end reference number (for example, once), the second special transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is triggered by a time saving digestion. 3 Function to shift from special game state to 4th special game state) and
With the resetting means (ceiling resetting function in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the upper limit number of times when shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode by the second special transition means. The gaming machine according to feature E2, characterized in that the machine is equipped with.

According to the feature E3, the number of games that reach the ceiling is reset when the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling ends. Such a configuration is preferable in order to realize a configuration in which the ceiling is shallow, the benefits of the ceiling are reduced, and a weak ceiling function is exhibited in a short cycle. That is, it is preferable in suppressing the monotony of the game.

Feature E4. An execution number counter (for example, an execution number counter) that grasps the number of times a game has been executed without producing a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means. Equipped with a continuation counter)
The second special transition means is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter becomes a value corresponding to the end reference number of times.
The execution number counter is updated (counted) when the game times based on the entry into the second start ball entry section are executed, while the game based on the entry into the first start ball entry section is updated (counted). The gaming machine according to feature E3, which is characterized in that it is not updated (not counted) when the times are executed.

As shown in the feature E4, by adopting a configuration in which the end reference number of times is updated when the ball enters the second start ball entry portion, it is possible to prevent the benefit of reaching the ceiling from being not enjoyed well.

Feature E5. The number of games M (integer), which is the upper limit, is a probability (for example, about 1/200) that the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E2 to the feature E4, which is specified to be smaller than the reciprocal of).

If the upper limit number of times is specified in the embodiment shown in this feature, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature states that "in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is m / N (for example, about 1 /). 200), and the number of games M (integer), which is the upper limit, is described in any one of the features E2 and E4, which is defined so that M <N / m. It is also possible to say "A game machine."

Feature E6. The number of games (integer), which is the upper limit, is the probability (for example, about 1/200) that the determination by the determination means results in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E2 to the feature E4, which is defined to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of.

If the upper limit number of times is specified in the embodiment shown in this feature, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

It should be noted that the configuration shown in this feature states that "in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode, the probability that the determination by the determination means will result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is m / N (for example, about 1 /). 200), and the number of games M (integer), which is the upper limit, is described in any one of feature E2 to feature E4, which is defined so that M ≤ N / m. It is also possible to say "A game machine."

Feature E7. The sum (integer) of the upper limit of storage of special information in the second storage means and the end reference number of times is the probability (for example, 1/10) that the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature E2 to the feature E6, which is defined to be equal to or less than the reciprocal of the above.

If the upper limit of storage and the reference number of terminations are defined in the manner shown in this feature, the effect of generating the chance zone in a short cycle and suppressing the monotony of the game can be more preferably exhibited.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "the probability that the determination result corresponding to the first information in the determination by the determination means is y / X (for example, 1/10) is y / X (for example, 1/10), and the second storage means. Described in any one of feature E2 to feature E6, wherein the sum S (integer) of the upper limit of storage of special information and the end reference number of times is defined to be S ≤ X / y. It is also possible to say "A game machine."

Feature E8. The end reference number of times is the first end reference number of times.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode, the game shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode through the special gaming state. The first transition means (a function of shifting from the normal gaming state to the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger).
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first transition means, the predetermined game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode is not obtained as a determination result corresponding to the first information and the second information. When the number of times the game is executed in the state reaches the second end reference number (for example, 6 times or 100 times), the second transition means (main control) for shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with (a function of shifting from the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state to the fourth special gaming state) triggered by the time saving digestion.
The gaming machine according to any one of features E2 to E7, wherein the first end reference number of times is defined to be less than the second end reference number of times.

Compared with the end reference number (second end reference number) set when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained as shown in feature E8, the end reference number set when the ceiling is reached. If the (first end reference number of times) is reduced, the relief function by reaching the ceiling can be suitably exerted while ensuring the superiority of the determination result (target in the game) corresponding to the second determination information.

The technical ideas shown in the above features E3 to E8 may be applied to the feature E1.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to D may be applied to the features E1 to E8.

<Characteristic F group>
The following feature F group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the ball-entry part and the non-acceptance state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Features F1. A game board (game board 80aB) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A, 92A and the variable winning device 83B) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (main control) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special hit result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the normal gaming state or the special gaming state). Special game state transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 for transition processing to the special hit game state and jackpot game) for shifting to a special game state (special hit game state or jackpot game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the state). A function to execute the transition process to the state) and
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83B) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83B) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the predetermined information, first information (random number group corresponding to the special hit result) and second information (random number group corresponding to the big hit result) are provided.
The control means for the variable ball entry portion is
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the first determination result (special jackpot result) that corresponds to the first information and the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit is first controlled. A means for switching to the acceptance state in an embodiment and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the second determination result (big hit result) and shifts to the special gaming state, or becomes the first determination result and the variable input. When the game ball passes through a predetermined area (V winning area) of the ball portion, the variable entering portion is provided with a means for switching to the receiving state in the second control mode.
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The second determination result can be generated in any of the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion, while the first determination result. The result is configured so that it can occur only in the determination based on the entry into the second starting entry section.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entering portion and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. Character 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the low-frequency switching mode. High-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) is provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the state shifts to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. 1 Special transition means (a function of shifting from the normal gaming state to the third special gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached) and
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means, the game times during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode are not obtained as a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. When the number of executions reaches the end reference number (for example, 100 times), the second special transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is triggered by the time saving digestion) to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. 3 Function to shift from special game state to 4th special game state) and
With
The sum (integer) of the upper limit of storage of special information in the second storage means and the end reference number of times is the probability (for example, about 1/5) that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained in the determination by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is specified to be equal to or greater than the reciprocal of.

In the configuration shown in this feature, when the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, the high frequency switching mode is used. It shifts to the corresponding predetermined gaming state. Here, even if the high-frequency switching mode is set, the following inconveniences may occur if the probability that the determination result substantially corresponds to the predetermined information remains low. That is, the period until the player can obtain the sufficient benefit (transition to the special gaming state) expected by the player despite reaching the ceiling is extended, or the frequency is switched before the sufficient benefit is obtained. It is assumed that the mode will end (run through). This is not preferable because it causes a great decrease in the player's willingness to play. In this regard, in the configuration shown in this feature, the ball can be entered into the second starting ball entry section by changing from the low frequency switching mode to the high frequency switching mode, and the determination is based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. In the (lottery), not only the second determination result corresponding to the second information but also the first determination result corresponding to the first information can be obtained. That is, the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information, that is, the probability of transition to the special gaming state is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling. Then, the sum (for example, 104 times) of the upper limit number of special information stored in the second storage means (for example, 4 times) and the end reference number of times (for example, 100 times) is the reciprocal of the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained. Since the above settings are made, it is possible to preferably realize a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is richly or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

If, for example, there is a limit to the number of games that can be played in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, there is a strong concern about running through. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the influence of the limitation on the number of games when reaching the ceiling can be relaxed. That is, even when the high-frequency switching mode with a limited number of times is adopted by reaching the ceiling, the occurrence of the above inconvenience can be suitably suppressed.

Feature F2. In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the probability of the first determination result (for example, 1/5) is higher than the probability of the second determination result (for example, 1/200). The gaming machine according to feature F1, which is characterized in that it is specified in.

According to the feature F2, when the mode is changed from the low frequency switching mode to the high frequency switching mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained can be greatly increased. This is preferable in order to shorten the stay period in the high-frequency switching mode and suppress the extension of the period until the above-mentioned sufficient benefit is given, in order to exert the relief function when reaching the ceiling shown in the feature F1. ..

Feature F3. An execution number counter (for example, an execution number counter) that grasps the number of times a game has been executed without producing a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information after shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first special transition means. Equipped with a continuation counter)
The second special transition means is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode when the value of the execution count counter becomes a value corresponding to the end reference number of times.
The execution number counter is updated (counted) when the game times based on the entry into the second start ball entry section are executed, while the game based on the entry into the first start ball entry section is updated (counted). The gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2, which is configured so as not to be updated (not counted) when the times are executed.

According to the configuration shown in the feature F3, the game times related to the second start ball entry section are counted by the execution count counter, whereas the game times related to the first start ball entry section are counted by the execution count counter. Not counted. In this way, by configuring the configuration in which the presence or absence of reaching the end reference number of times is determined by the number of times the game is executed related to the second start ball entry portion, the transition to the special game state is richly or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. The configuration to be used can be preferably realized.

Feature F4. The end reference number of times is the first end reference number of times (for example, 100 times).
When the second determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode is passed through the special gaming state. The first transition means (a function of shifting from the normal gaming state to the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger) and
After shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode by the first transition means, the game times during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode without obtaining a determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. When the number of executions reaches the second end reference number (for example, once or three times), the second transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 shortens the time) to shift to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. It is equipped with a function to shift from the first special gaming state or the second special gaming state to the fourth special gaming state when digested.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F3, wherein the first end reference number of times is defined to be larger than the second end reference number of times.

When the second determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode, the game shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode through the special gaming state. In the configuration shown in this feature, the number of termination reference times of the high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the ceiling is reached is larger than the number of termination reference times of the high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the second judgment result is reached. The transition to the special game state of the time is given preferential treatment. With such a configuration, the relief function shown in the feature F1 or the like can be suitably exerted.

Feature F5. The upper limit of the number of games M (integer) is defined to be larger than the reciprocal of the probability (for example, 1/200) of the second determination result in the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4.

As shown in feature F1, both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information are based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. In the configuration in which the game times are executed, the privilege when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high frequency switching mode is the same. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the privilege when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained, but the benefit expected when reaching the ceiling is also increased due to the influence, so that the relief by reaching the ceiling is also increased. There is concern that the functionality will be excessively powerful. In particular, as shown in feature F1, the above concern is expected to increase in a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is concentrated or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is made larger than the reciprocal of the probability of reaching the second judgment result, the benefit that can be expected by reaching the ceiling is increased, and the chance of reaching the ceiling is reduced. The above concerns can be dispelled.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "the probability that the second determination result will be obtained in the determination by the determination means is m / N (for example, 1/200), and the number of games M (integer) which is the upper limit. ) Can be the gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4, characterized in that M> N / m. "

Feature F6. It is defined that the number of games M (integer), which is the upper limit, is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability (for example, 1/200) of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F4.

As shown in feature F1, both the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling and the high-frequency switching mode triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information are based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section. In the configuration in which the game times are executed, the privilege when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained during the high frequency switching mode is the same. In order to improve the satisfaction of the player, it is preferable to increase the privilege when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined information is obtained, but the benefit expected when reaching the ceiling is also increased due to the influence, so that the relief by reaching the ceiling is also increased. There is concern that the functionality will be excessively powerful. In particular, as shown in feature F1, the above concern is expected to increase in a configuration in which the transition to the special gaming state is concentrated or substantially determined by reaching the ceiling. In this regard, as shown in this feature, if the upper limit number of times (ceiling) is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of reaching the second judgment result, the benefits expected from reaching the ceiling are increased, and the chances of reaching the ceiling are reduced. You can dispel concerns.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information in the determination by the determination means is m / N (for example, 1/200) is m / N (for example, 1/200), and the number of games which is the upper limit number of games. The gaming machine according to any one of the features F1 to F4, wherein M (integer) is defined so that M ≧ N / m. ”

Feature F7. When the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination by the determination means in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode that has been transferred by the special transition means, the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained under other circumstances. Described in any one of the feature F1 to the feature F6, which is configured so that the operation period of the game rotation operation is shorter than the case where the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained. Gaming machine.

As shown in feature F7, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode after reaching the ceiling, the operation period of the gaming rotation operation when the first determination result is obtained is shortened until the transition to the special gaming state. By shortening the required period, the player can promptly enjoy the expected benefits.

Feature F8. The second storage means can store a plurality of special information acquired based on the ball entering the second starting ball entry unit.
The game rotation control means is configured to execute the game rotation operation so that the operation period of the game rotation operation becomes shorter as the number of special information stored in the second storage means increases. Ori
As the high-frequency switching mode, the first high-frequency switching mode and the second high-frequency switching mode are longer than the first high-frequency switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first high-frequency switching mode. A second high-frequency switching mode is provided so that it is easy to enter the starting ball.
When the first determination result is obtained by the determination by the determination means, or when the game ball passes through a predetermined region (V winning region) of the variable entry portion as the first determination result. A means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first high frequency switching mode via the special gaming state is provided.
The special transition means corresponds to the second high-frequency switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined information. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature F1 to the feature F7, which is configured to shift to the predetermined gaming state.

According to the feature F8, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the ceiling is reached, the first judgment result → the first high-frequency switching mode that shifts when the predetermined area is passed or the second judgment result is triggered. The period during which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than the corresponding predetermined gaming state. That is, in the high-frequency switching mode triggered by reaching the ceiling, the frequency of entering the second starting ball entry portion increases, and the number of special information stored in the second storage means increases. Therefore, it is possible to preferably suppress that the operation period of the game rotation operation in the game rotation after reaching the ceiling is shortened, and the period from reaching the ceiling to being able to enjoy the above benefits is extended.

The technical ideas shown in the features A to E may be applied to the features F1 to F8.

<Characteristic G group>
The following feature G group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the ball-entry part and the non-acceptance state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Features G1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the low-frequency switching mode. High-frequency switching modes (high-frequency support modes A and B) are provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a third normal gaming state). 4th normal game state) is provided,
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, a first transition means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state via the special gaming state. In the MPU 402 of the device 162, the function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the third normal gaming state triggered by the jackpot result) and
In the type 2 gaming state transferred by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the type 2 gaming state does not become a determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the end reference number of times (for example, When the number of times is 10 or 20), the second transition means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 is triggered by the time saving digestion to shift from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state). Function to shift to) and
With the end reference number resetting means for resetting the end reference number (for example, resetting 20 times) when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type game state. With
The gaming machine characterized in that the end reference number of times resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special gaming state.

According to the feature G1, when the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, the process shifts to the second type gaming state through the special gaming state. The second type game state corresponds to the high frequency switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. There is a limit on the number of times in the type 2 game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the type 2 game state reaches the end reference number, the game state is changed to the type 1 game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. Transition. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information can be obtained. When the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type gaming state, the end reference number of times is reset without going through the special gaming state. As a result, the second type gaming state (high frequency switching mode) is looped (extended). With this loop, it is possible to aim for a judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature G2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode (low frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the first switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the first switching mode. The second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the second starting ball entry portion are longer than the first switching mode because the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set so that it is easy to enter the ball.
The predetermined gaming states include a first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a third normal gaming state). A third gaming state (for example, a fourth normal gaming state) corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, a first transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. (Function to shift from the first normal game state to the third normal game state) and the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state shifted by the first transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the first end reference number (for example). When the number of times is 10 or 20 times), the second transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the time saving digestion). Function to migrate) and
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second gaming state, the first determination result is reached without going through the special gaming state at the end of the game round. 3 A third transition means for transitioning to the gaming state (a function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger of a special deviation result).
In the third gaming state shifted by the third transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the third gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the second end reference number (for example, (20 times), a fourth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion). ) And a gaming machine.

According to the feature G2, when the determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the process shifts to the second gaming state through the special gaming state. The second gaming state corresponds to the second switching mode, and the decrease in the number of balls held is suppressed by increasing the number of balls entering the second starting ball entry section. A limit is set for the number of times in the second game state, and when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the first end reference number, the game shifts to the first game state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode. do. This makes it difficult to enter the second starting ball entry section. Here, in the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information can be obtained. When the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second gaming state, the process shifts to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The third game state corresponds to the third switching mode, and the game times related to the second start ball entry portion are executed as in the second game state, and in this state, the number of times the game times are executed is the second end criterion. It will continue until the number of times is reached. Here, when the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is made, the progress of the gaming round related to the second starting ball entry portion is continued. As a result, it is possible to aim for a determination result corresponding to the first determination information while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held. By realizing the diversification of games in this way, it is possible to contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

Feature G3. In the third game state, when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained, the end reference number resetting means (in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the second end reference number. Equipped with a function to reset the continuation counter)
The gaming machine according to feature G2, wherein the end reference number of times resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special gaming state.

According to the feature G3, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the third gaming state, the second end reference number of times is reset. That is, the third game state loops. In this loop, since the loop does not go through the special gaming state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated.

Feature G4. The game according to feature G2 or feature G3, wherein the second end reference number of times is defined to be the same number of times as the first end reference number of times or a number of times larger than the first end reference number of times. Machine.

According to the feature G4, when the second game state is changed to the third game state, the player is substantially impaired by the timing of the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (the game times that is the judgment result). Can be avoided. This is preferable in order to realize the diversification of the game by the loop function described above and to preferably exert the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature G5. In the third gaming state, the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the determination by the determination means is higher than the probability of the determination result corresponding to the second determination information. The gaming machine according to feature G3 or feature G4, characterized in that it is specified.

According to the feature G5, the probability of the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is higher than the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information during the loop. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as the above-mentioned loop function not being properly exerted due to frequent occurrence of determination results corresponding to the first determination information.

Feature G6. When a determination result (big hit result) corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the third gaming state, a fifth transition means (main control device 162) for transitioning to the second gaming state via the special gaming state. (Function to shift from the 4th normal game state to the 3rd normal game state) and the MPU 402 of
In the second gaming state shifted by the fifth transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the second gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, and the third end reference number (for example, A function of shifting from the third normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 as a trigger for the time saving digestion in the sixth transition means (function of shifting to the first normal gaming state in the case of 20 times). ) And
Any one of the feature G3 to the feature G5, wherein the third end reference number of times is defined to be the same number of times as the second end reference number of times or a number of times larger than the second end reference number of times. The gaming machine described in one.

According to the feature G6, when the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained during the loop described above, the end reference number (third end reference number) in the second gaming state to be transferred to the next is the second end. It becomes more than the standard number of times. With such a configuration, the judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information is obtained during the loop, so that the player's advantage is increased after the end of the special game state as compared with the loop, and the game in the loop is accented. Can be generated.

Feature G7. The switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode is closer to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode than the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the first switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G2 to the feature G6.

The configuration shown in this feature is preferable in order to encourage the player to recognize that the front and rear gaming states are the same when the second gaming state is changed to the third gaming state.

The "switching mode" shown in this feature is composed of three elements: a period during which the open state is maintained, the number of times the switch is made to the open state, and an interval period between the open states. "Similar to the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the above" means that there are more matching or similar elements among the three elements than in the "first switching mode".

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "feature G2 to feature G6, wherein the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the third switching mode matches the switching mode of the variable mechanism in the second switching mode. The gaming machine described in any one of the above. ”

Feature G8. As the determination mode in which the determination mode is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are relative to each other. High probability mode is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature G3 to the feature G7, wherein the determination mode in the second gaming state is the low probability mode.

According to the feature G8, it is possible to prevent the loop function from being buried because the determination result corresponding to the first determination information frequently occurs in the loop described above. As a result, it is possible to realize diversification of games while suppressing an increase in gambling.

Feature G9. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
As the starting ball entry section, a first starting ball entry section (first operating port 91A) and a second starting ball entry section (second operating port 92A) are provided.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
The determination result corresponding to the first determination information can occur in any of the determination based on the entry into the first start ball entry portion and the determination based on the entry into the second start entry ball portion. On the other hand, the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be generated only in the determination based on the entry of the ball into the second start entry portion.
A variable mechanism (electric) that can switch between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball can enter the second starting ball entry section and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. Character 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a low-frequency switching mode (low-frequency support) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the second starting ball entry portion. Mode) and the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than in the low-frequency switching mode, so that it is easier to enter the second starting ball than in the low-frequency switching mode. The high frequency switching mode (high frequency support mode A) is provided.
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode (for example, a fourth normal gaming state). And are provided,
When the number of times the game is executed during the type 2 game state reaches the end reference number of times (for example, 20 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information in the type 2 game state, the said A transition means for shifting to the first gaming state (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion), and
End reference number resetting means for resetting the end reference number (for example, resetting 20) when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type game state. With and
The gaming machine characterized in that the end reference number of times resetting means is configured to perform the resetting without going through the special gaming state.

According to the feature G9, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, the end reference number of times is reset. That is, the second type game state loops. In this loop, since the loop does not go through the special gaming state, the game proceeds smoothly even if the loop is repeated. Therefore, it is possible to realize diversification of games and contribute to increasing the degree of attention to games.

The technical ideas shown in the above features G3 to G8 may be applied to the features G1 and G9.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to F may be applied to the features G1 to G9.

<Characteristic H group>
The following feature H group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Features H1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A special transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling), which is compatible with the high-frequency switching mode.
A determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is provided, and an upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times is provided when shifting to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
As the predetermined determination information, the first information (random number group corresponding to the normal jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode are provided. The second information (random number group corresponding to the probability change jackpot result) that triggers the transition is provided.
The upper limit number setting means sets the first number of times (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination means determines. When the determination results in the determination corresponding to the second information, the upper limit is set to be a second number (for example, 100 times) smaller than the first number. A game machine to be.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. Transition. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the ceiling is reached is the first number (for example, 300 times) when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained, and the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained. The second number is less than the first. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. As a result, it is possible to suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A special transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling), which is compatible with the high-frequency switching mode.
A determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is provided, and an upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times is provided when shifting to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
As the predetermined determination information, the first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode Second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state of the correspondence is provided.
The upper limit number of times setting means sets the second information in the determination by the determination means as compared with the upper limit number of times set when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means. A gaming machine characterized in that the upper limit number of times to be set when a corresponding determination result is obtained is set to be small.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. Transition. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the ceiling is reached is reduced (shortened) when the judgment result corresponds to the second information is smaller than when the judgment result corresponds to the first information. Is configured. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. As a result, it is possible to suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode) that is set to
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A special transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling), which is compatible with the high-frequency switching mode.
A determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is provided, and an upper limit number of times setting means for setting the upper limit number of times is provided when shifting to the predetermined gaming state through the special gaming state.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
As the predetermined determination information, the first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode, and the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode Second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state of the correspondence is provided.
The upper limit number setting means sets the first number of times (for example, 300 times) as the upper limit number when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination means, and the determination means determines. When the determination results in the determination corresponding to the second information, the upper limit is set to be a second number (for example, 100 times) smaller than the first number. A game machine to be.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. Transition. By forcibly changing the rhythm of the game in this way, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed. Here, the upper limit of the number of times the ceiling is reached is reduced (shortened) when the judgment result corresponds to the second information is smaller than when the judgment result corresponds to the first information. Is configured. Here, since the high-probability mode shifts to the special gaming state at an earlier timing than the low-probability mode, the effect of the ceiling function can be suitably exhibited by setting the upper limit number of times to be small. As a result, it is possible to suitably contribute to improving the degree of attention to the game.

Further, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the game progresses without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information even though the high probability mode is set. Contrary to the expectations of the player, the investment will increase significantly. This is expected to be a factor that greatly reduces the player's willingness to play. In this regard, as shown in this feature, in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the upper limit number of times is lowered and the high frequency switching mode is shifted to the high frequency switching mode at an early timing to suppress investment. As a result, the effect of diversifying the game (the effect of improving the degree of attention to the game) can be suitably exhibited.

Feature H4. The first number of times is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the low probability mode, and the second number of times corresponds to the predetermined determination information in the high probability mode. The gaming machine according to feature H3, wherein the probability is equal to or greater than the reciprocal of the probability of the determination result.

If the relief function by reaching the ceiling shown in the feature H3 acts excessively, the technical significance (diversification of the game) of providing the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode may decrease. Therefore, as shown in this feature, by setting the upper limit number of times so as to be equal to or more than the reciprocal of the probability of the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in each game state, the diversification of the game and the above-mentioned relief function can be achieved. It can be suitably coexisted.

Feature H5. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality (for example, four) of the special information.
The game rotation control means varies depending on the operation period setting means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162) capable of setting the operation period of the game rotation operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means. Has a function to execute the display time setting process)
The operation period setting means is configured to set the operation period so that the larger the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means, the shorter the operation period.
In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode transferred by the special transition means, the number of executions of the game times in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode is the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. When the end reference number of times (for example, 400 times) is reached without becoming, a means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low frequency switching mode is provided.
The gaming machine according to feature H3 or feature H4, wherein the end reference number of times is specified to be larger than the second number of times.

It is preferable to have a configuration in which the operation period of the game rotation operation is shortened by increasing the number of stored special information in order to facilitate the progress of the game. However, on the premise of such a configuration, the following inconveniences may occur by applying the configuration shown in the above feature H3 or the like. That is, when the ceiling is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, and the game shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the game times in the predetermined gaming state become faster. An event may occur in which the benefit ends before the benefit of reaching the ceiling is fully experienced due to excessive progress. It is feared that this will be a factor that greatly reduces the player's attention to the relief function. In this regard, as shown in this feature, setting the end reference number of times to be larger than the upper limit number of times (second number of times) can contribute to solving the above concern.

Feature H6. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the first end is set as the end reference number. The reference number of times is set, and in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the transition is made when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. The configuration is such that the second end reference number is set as the reference number.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H5, wherein the first end reference number of times and the second end reference number of times are defined to be the same number of times.

According to the feature H6, it is preferable to set the first end reference number and the second end reference number in order to simplify the configuration related to the game. Even with such a configuration, since the probability that a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained is raised during the high probability mode, the predetermined determination information is supported while the above relief function is being exerted. The probability of becoming a judgment result increases. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the above-mentioned inconvenience that may occur in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode.

Feature H7. In the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, the transition is made when the first number of times is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode. The end criterion is set in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, in which the number of times is set and the first number of times is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode. The configuration is such that the second end reference number of times is set as the number of times.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H5, wherein the second end reference number of times is defined to be less than the first end reference number of times.

According to the feature H7, by making the second end reference number of times smaller than the first end reference number of times, it is possible to suppress that the relief function becomes a factor that incites gambling.

Feature H8. As the starting ball entering portion, the first starting ball entering portion (first operating port 91A) and the second starting ball entering portion (which is more advantageous to the player in the determination by the determination means than the first starting ball entering portion). A second operating port 92A) is provided.
The variable mechanism is in the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entering portion and in the non-accepted state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the accepted state. The gaming machine according to any one of feature H3 to feature H7, which is characterized by having a switchable configuration.

According to the feature H8, the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry section is given preferential treatment to the player in favor of the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section. When the ceiling is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, not only the investment is suppressed, but also the judgment result is given preferential treatment, so that the player is doubled in the rescue function. When a fit occurs in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode and a low frequency switching mode, the expectation for reaching the ceiling increases. This can contribute to further improvement in the degree of attention to the game.

Feature H9. In the determination based on the entry into the first starting ball entry section, the determination result includes a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. In the determination based on the entry into the second starting ball entry portion, the determination result includes a determination result that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H8, which is characterized by the absence.

According to the feature H9, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode is performed again while the relief function is exerted by reaching the ceiling during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode. It is possible to avoid an event in which the benefit of the ceiling is substantially lost (wasteful pulling) as a judgment result that triggers the transition to.

Feature H10. The first start ball entry portion and the second start ball entry portion are arranged on a predetermined flow path in the game area.
As the acquired information storage means, a first storage means (holding area Ra for the first operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the first start ball entry unit and the second start entry A second storage means (holding area Rb for the second operating port) for storing special information acquired based on the entry into the ball is provided.
When the special information is stored in both the first storage means and the second storage means, the determination means gives priority to the special information stored in the second storage means as the target of the determination. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H9, which is characterized by having a configuration.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, even if the player reaches the ceiling in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode and shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the high frequency switching mode, relief is provided. There is no need to change the launch destination of the game ball to enjoy the benefits of the function. Therefore, even if the rescue function is suddenly exerted without going through the special gaming state, it is possible to suppress the wasteful consumption of the game ball and preferably improve the satisfaction level with the rescue function. can.

Features H11. The high-frequency switching mode is the first high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode A).
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism, the second high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support mode B) is set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low-frequency switching mode. And are provided,
As the predetermined determination information, third information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) that triggers the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode is provided. Random numbers
In the second high-frequency switching mode, the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the first high-frequency switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature H3 to the feature H10, which is configured as described above.

According to the feature H11, when the ceiling is reached in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the low frequency switching mode, the game ball is more than the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second high frequency switching mode. It will shift to a predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode in which the decrease is suppressed and the first high frequency switching mode. With such a configuration, the superiority when reaching the ceiling can be emphasized, and the rhythm of the game can be significantly changed when reaching the ceiling.

The technical ideas shown in the features A to G may be applied to the features H1 to H11.

<Feature I group>
The following feature group I describes "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Feature I1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
During the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state does not become a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the upper limit number (ceiling). : For example, 50 times), the special transition means (in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having a function of shifting to a normal gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode A when reaching the ceiling).

According to the feature I1, during the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state does not become the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, and the upper limit number ( When it becomes the ceiling), it shifts to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
The first criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Execution of the game times after the high-probability mode ends when the number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached and the high-probability mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode are entered through the special game state. The second switching mode ends when the number of times becomes the second reference number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the first reference number of times without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Ori,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the third reference number of times (for example, 50 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the switching control mode is switched to the third switching. Equipped with a means to shift to the mode
A gaming machine characterized in that the third reference number of times is defined to be equal to or more than the second reference number of times and equal to or less than the first reference number of times.

According to the feature I2, after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed becomes the second reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. In this case, the second switching mode ends, and when the first reference number is reached, the high probability mode ends. Here, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the third reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. The third reference number is equal to or greater than the second reference number and equal to or less than the first reference number, and the switching control mode is switched to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
The first criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Execution of the game times after the high-probability mode ends when the number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached and the high-probability mode and the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode are entered through the special game state. The second switching mode ends when the number of times becomes the second reference number of times (for example, 50 times) less than the first reference number of times without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. Ori,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state becomes the third reference number (for example, 50 times), which is less than the first reference number, without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. A means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode is provided.
A gaming machine characterized in that the third reference number of times is defined to be the same number of times as the second reference number of times.

According to the feature I3, after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed becomes the second reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. In this case, the second switching mode ends, and when the first reference number is reached, the high probability mode ends. Here, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the third reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. The number of times of the third reference is the same as the number of times of the second reference, and the switching control mode is switched from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the high probability mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I4. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432A in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83A) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. A second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) set to be Support mode A) is provided,
As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information are obtained. There is a high probability mode with a relatively high probability of becoming
The predetermined determination information includes specific information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode.
The first criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. When the number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached, the first transition means for shifting the lottery mode to the low probability mode without going through the special gaming state, and
The first A second transition means for shifting the switching control mode to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state when the second reference number (for example, 50 times) is less than the reference number is provided. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the feature I4, after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode, the number of times the game is executed becomes the second reference number without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. In this case, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode, and when the first reference number of times is reached, the lottery mode becomes the low probability mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably suppress the monotonization of the game while ensuring the superiority of the player in the high probability mode.

Feature I5. The third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the second switching mode. The gaming machine according to feature I4, which is characterized in that it is used.

As shown in feature I4, in a gaming machine (so-called ST machine) of a type in which an upper limit (first reference number) is provided for the number of times a game is executed in a predetermined gaming state corresponding to a high probability mode, the number of times the game is executed is executed. As the number of times approaches the first reference number of times, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information will be obtained decreases, and the expectation of the player may be greatly reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, the third switching mode is set when the ball reaches the ceiling, so that the frequency of entering the second starting ball entry portion becomes higher than before, and the investment is suppressed. In this way, if the switching control mode is further favored in the latter half by using the ceiling function, the weak point of the ST machine (expectation is greatly reduced toward the end) can be overcome.

In addition, the configuration shown in this feature is "a game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and a game ball launch capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on a player's operation. A payout means for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on a means (game ball launching mechanism 110) and a ball entering a ball entry unit (operating ports 91A, 92A and variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. A gaming machine equipped with (payout device 224), which acquires special information (holding information) when a ball enters the starting ball entry section (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry section. Special information acquisition means (a function of executing a process of acquiring hold information in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and acquisition information storage means (main control device) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means. The reserved ball storage area 432A) in the RAM 404 of 162 and the special information stored in the acquired information storage means correspond to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The determination is made by the determination means (a function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the determination means prior to the determination by the determination means or by the determination means. Based on this, the game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operation port display units D1 and D2) is started, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. The predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) are controlled so that the game rotation operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. The game turn control means (a function of executing the game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and the judgment result by the determination means become the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, and the game turn control means Based on the end of the game rotation operation, the special game state is shifted to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined game state (first normal game state to fourth normal game state). The game state transition means (a function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), the accepted state (open state) in which the game ball flowing down the game area can enter, and the accepted state. A variable ball entry unit (variable winning device 83A) as the ball entry unit, which can be switched to a non-acceptance state (closed state) in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, and a case where the game shifts to the special game state. In addition, a control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepted state and the non-accepted state (a function of executing the opening / closing process of the variable winning device 83A by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162).
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and a variable mechanism control means for controlling the variable mechanism (a function of executing electric service support processing by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162), and switching of the variable mechanism by the variable mechanism control means. As the control mode (support mode), the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the second switching mode (high) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. The frequency support mode B) and the third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode are provided. The third switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the second switching mode. As a determination mode (lottery mode) in which the determination is performed by the determination means, a low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is relatively low and the determination mode corresponding to the predetermined determination information are supported. A high-probability mode in which the probability of a determination result is relatively high is provided, and as the predetermined determination information, a specific identification that triggers a transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high-probability mode and the second switching mode. The number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special game state, including information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 10R probability variation jackpot result B) When the first reference number of times (for example, 100 times) is reached without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode without going through the special gaming state. The number of times the game is executed after the transition to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode after the transition means and the special gaming state is obtained as the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. When the second reference number of times (for example, 50 times) is less than the first reference number of times without going through, the switching control mode is shifted to the third switching mode without going through the special gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having means. It is also possible to say.

Feature I6. The second transition means has a feature I4 or a feature I5 that is configured to shift from the second switching mode to the third switching mode during the game round when the second reference number of times is reached. Described gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in the feature I6, the game can be smoothly advanced by connecting the high support so as to be seamless.

Feature I7. The second transition means is a determination result in which the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode through the special gaming state corresponds to the predetermined determination information. When the second reference number (for example, 50 times) is reached without becoming the above, the predetermined number corresponding to the high probability mode and the first switching mode is accompanied by the end of the game times when the second reference number is reached. The feature I4 or the feature is characterized in that the game state is shifted to the game state, and the game state is shifted to the predetermined game state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode at the next game round of the game round. The gaming machine described in I5.

According to the configuration shown in the feature I7, when the relief function is activated when the ceiling is reached, the switching control mode becomes the third switching mode via the first switching mode. With such a configuration, the impact when the switching control mode is changed can be strengthened.

Feature I8. The second reference number of times is described in feature I7, which is defined so that the second reference number of times is equal to or less than the first reference number of times and equal to or more than the difference between the first reference number of times and the second reference number of times. Gaming machine.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the special gaming state is achieved by shortening the staying period of the game times corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode than the staying period of the game times corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode. It is possible to dramatically improve the attention level in the final stage in an advantageous state of transitioning after the end of.

Feature I9. The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means capable of setting an operation period of the game rotation operation according to the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means.
In the third switching mode, the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the game ball is continuously launched toward the starting ball entry portion is the average number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in the second switching mode. A feature characterized in that it is configured to be larger than the average number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means when the game ball is continuously launched toward the starting ball entry portion. The gaming machine according to any one of I4 to feature I5.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the game progresses by shifting from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached. It is possible to change the speed. Thereby, the monotonousness of the game can be suppressed more preferably.

Feature I10. As the starting ball entering portion, a first starting ball entering portion and a second starting ball entering portion in which the determination by the determination means is more advantageous to the player than the first starting ball entering portion are provided.
The variable mechanism is in the receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the second starting ball entering portion and in the non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state. It has a switchable configuration,
Both the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section are arranged in a predetermined flow path in the game area.
The gaming machine according to feature I9, wherein the determination means is configured to perform the determination in the order of entry into the first start ball entry section and the second start ball entry section.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, the second start is performed by shifting from the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode when the ceiling is reached. There will be more opportunities for the game rounds related to the ball entry section to be executed. As a result, the player's advantage is greatly increased by reaching the ceiling, and the degree of attention to the game after reaching the ceiling can be suitably improved.

Feature I11. The third criterion is that the number of times the game is executed after shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode by the second transition means does not result in a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information. A third transition means for shifting the switching control mode to the first switching mode without going through the special gaming state when the number of times is reached is provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature I4 to the feature I10, wherein the third reference number of times is defined to be larger than the first reference number of times.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, after the end of the special gaming state, the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the second switching mode → the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the high probability mode and the third switching mode → the low probability mode and the third The transition is made in the order of the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the switching mode → the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the low probability mode and the first switching mode. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the degree of attention to the game from rapidly decreasing when the third switching mode is set when the ceiling is reached and the mode is changed to the low probability mode.

The technical ideas shown in the above features I5 to I11 may be applied to the features I1 to I3.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to H may be applied to features I1 to I10.

<Characteristic J group>
The following feature J group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Features J1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a fourth normal gaming state). And are provided,
The number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state is the number of times when the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state and after the end of the special gaming state in the first type gaming state. When the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) is reached without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the first transition to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state. Means (a function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the special detachment result and the arrival at the ceiling are triggered),
After shifting to the second type gaming state by the first transition means, the number of times the game is executed during the second type gaming state is the end reference number (for example, without producing a determination result corresponding to the first determination information). When the number of times is 40 or 400), the second transition means for transitioning to the first type gaming state (in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by the time saving digestion, the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state) Function to shift to) and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit during the type 2 gaming state that has been transferred triggered by the determination result corresponding to the second determination information, the type 2 It is characterized by having a resetting means (a function of overwriting the value of the continuation number counter with the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for resetting the number of executions of the remaining game times that reach the end reference number in the game state. A game machine to be.

According to the feature J1, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information and the end of the special game state When the upper limit of the number of games is reached (reaching the ceiling) later, the game may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the high frequency switching mode. By entering the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to enhance the soundness of the game. However, as described above, when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information and the ceiling arrival are used together as an opportunity to shift to the second type gaming state, the following concerns arise. That is, if the ceiling is reached during the second type game state and the ceiling reach is invalidated, some of the benefits that the player should have originally enjoyed disappear, and the player's satisfaction level. Is a concern that will drop significantly. In this regard, according to the configuration shown in this feature, when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state, the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset. As a result, the above concerns can be dispelled and the satisfaction level of the player can be improved.

Regarding the "resetting means" shown in this feature, the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the game shifts to the second type game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information, and the second The configuration may be such that the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the number of times of execution of the game times after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit during the seed game state is the same as the number of times of execution, or the second determination information. The upper limit is the number of times the remaining game times are executed when the game shifts to the second type game state triggered by the judgment result corresponding to, and the number of times the game times are executed after the end of the special game state during the second type game state. The number of times may be different from the number of times the remaining game times are executed, which is set when the number of times is reached.

Feature J2. When the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset by the resetting means, the type 2 game state is continued without going through any game state other than the type 2 game state. The gaming machine according to feature J1, which is characterized in that it is configured as described above.

According to the feature J2, when the ceiling is reached and the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset during the second type game state, the second game state is not shifted to another game state due to the reset. The two-type game state will be continued. This is preferable in order to suppress the disturbance of the rhythm of the game in the second type game state.

Features J3. Regarding the number of executions of the remaining game times set by the resetting means, the number of executions of the remaining game times set when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type game state. The gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2, which is configured to be more than one.

According to the feature J3, it is possible to prevent the number of executions of the remaining game times from being reduced by reaching the ceiling, and to contribute to the improvement of the satisfaction level of the player.

Features J4. The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game rotation operation.
As the operation period, a first operation period (for example, 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec) shorter than the first operation period are provided.
The operation period setting means is any one of the features J1 to J3 having a configuration in which the second operation period is set as the operation period of the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached during the second type game state. The gaming machine described in.

If the second operation period is set as the operation period when the ceiling is reached during the second type game state as shown in the feature J4, it is preferable that the smoothness of the game progress is impaired by the reset function. Can be suppressed.

Feature J5. When the variable mechanism is in the accepting state and the number of executions of the remaining game times is reset by the resetting means, the acceptance period set in association with the switching to the accepting state is set. The gaming machine according to any one of the feature J1 to the feature J4, characterized in that the acceptance state is maintained until the lapse of time.

Feature As shown in J5, even if the variable mechanism is reset while it is in the accepting state, the smooth flow of the game is interrupted by avoiding the forced termination of the accepting state. This can be suitably suppressed.

The technical ideas shown in the above features A to I may be applied to the features J1 to J5.

<Characteristic K group>
The following feature K group is described in that "a game machine such as a pachinko machine has a game board in which a game area is formed and a game ball launching means for launching a game ball into the game area based on a launch operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the acceptance state and the non-acceptance state of the ball-entry part according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Features K1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, a means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with a function (function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state) triggered by a special deviation result.
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type game state, the determination result is invalid.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed is provided. ,
As the display effect, a first display effect and a second display effect are provided.
The display effect executing means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (normally deviated result) that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, the means for executing the first display effect and the means for executing the first display effect.
A means for executing the second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the first type gaming state. When,
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the second type gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by having and.

According to the feature K1, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is high. It may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the frequency switching mode. By entering the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to enhance the soundness of the game. However, if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type game state, the determination result becomes invalid. This is preferable in suppressing the increase in gambling, but if the player grasps that the judgment result has been obtained, there is concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she has wasted luck. Will be done. This can be a factor that reduces the motivation to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result by the judgment means becomes a judgment result (normal deviation result) that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information, the first display effect is executed, and the first type gaming state is executed. If the judgment result by the judgment means becomes the judgment result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second judgment information in the situation of, the second display effect is executed and the game becomes the second type game state. If the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the present situation, the first display effect is executed. With such a configuration, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, it can be made inconspicuous. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the satisfaction level of the player. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K2. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to a jackpot result or a random number group corresponding to a special deviation result). The function of executing the lottery process in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. It is provided with a game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port).
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information (random number group corresponding to the jackpot result) and second determination information (random number group corresponding to the special deviation result) are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (for example, the first normal game). Special game state transition means for shifting to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the state to the fourth normal game state (function of executing the game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) When,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
When the game shifts to the special gaming state, the variable ball entry unit control means (MPU 402 of the main control device 162 executes opening / closing processing of the variable winning device 83) for switching the variable ball entry unit between the accepted state and the non-accepted state. Function) and
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first type gaming state, a means (main control) for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state. The MPU 402 of the device 162 is provided with a function (function of shifting from the first normal gaming state to the fourth normal gaming state) triggered by a special deviation result.
When a determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the second type game state, the determination result is invalid.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed is provided. ,
The display effect executing means
A pattern display means (design display device 95) having a display screen (display screen 95a) and capable of variably displaying a plurality of patterns (designs) on the display screen,
A display control means for controlling the display of the symbol display means by variably displaying the plurality of symbols on the display screen and then finally stopping and displaying the symbol combination corresponding to the notification result by the predetermined notification means. (Notification / effect control device 140 and display control device 410)
When the game time control means obtains a determination result corresponding to the second determination information in a situation time in which the game state is either the first type game state or the second type game state. , The predetermined notification means is controlled so as to obtain a notification result corresponding to the determination result.
As the pattern combination to be finally stopped and displayed on the display screen, a first pattern combination (a symbol combination showing a normal deviation result) and a second pattern combination (a symbol combination showing a special deviation result) are provided.
The display control means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (normally deviated result) that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information, the means for stopping and displaying the first pattern combination and the means.
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the first type gaming state, the second pattern combination is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the second type gaming state, the first pattern combination is performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a means for displaying a stop display.

According to the feature K2, even if the game proceeds while the transition to the special game state (judgment result corresponding to the first judgment information) is not established, the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is high. It may shift to the second type game state corresponding to the frequency switching mode. By entering the high frequency switching mode, the frequency of entering the starting ball is increased, and investment is suppressed. Such a configuration is preferable in order to enhance the soundness of the game. However, if the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type game state, the determination result becomes invalid. This is preferable in suppressing the increase in gambling, but if the player grasps that the judgment result has been obtained, there is concern that the player will be given the impression that he or she has wasted luck. Will be done. This can be a factor that reduces the motivation to play. In this respect, in the configuration shown in this feature, when a judgment result (normal deviation result) that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the first pattern combination is stopped and displayed, and the game is in the first type gaming state. If the judgment result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained below, the second pattern combination is stopped and displayed, and the second judgment information is used in the situation where the game is in the second type gaming state. When the corresponding determination result (special deviation result) is obtained, the first pattern combination is stopped and displayed. With such a configuration, even when the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained during the second type gaming state, it can be made inconspicuous. Thereby, the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience can be suppressed, and it is possible to contribute to the improvement of the satisfaction level of the player. This is preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game.

Feature K3. The game rotation control means has an operation period setting means for setting an operation period of the game rotation operation.
As the operation period, a first operation period (for example, 20 sec to 30 sec) and a second operation period (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec) shorter than the first operation period are provided.
The operation period setting means
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the first type gaming state, the first operation period is defined as the operation period. Means to set and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes a determination result (normal deviation result) that does not correspond to the predetermined determination information in the situation of the second type gaming state, the second operation period is defined as the operation period. Means to set and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second determination information in the situation of the second type gaming state, the second operation period is defined as the operation period. The gaming machine according to the feature K1 or the feature K2, which comprises means for setting the above.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result (special deviation result) corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the first type game state, the operation period = the first operation period, and the second type game state is in progress. When a judgment result (normal deviation result) that does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information is obtained, the operation period = the second operation period, and the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information during the second type game state (special deviation result). When becomes, the operation period = the second operation period. By setting the operation period in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a sense of discomfort depending on the operation period, and to preferably exert the effects shown in the feature K1 and the like.

Features K4. The second operation period is a variable period that is variable within a predetermined range (for example, 3 sec to 14 sec).
The acquired information storage means can store a plurality of the special information.
In the situation of the second type gaming state, the judgment result by the judgment means does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information (normal deviation result) or the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information (special deviation). As a result), when the second operation period is set as the operation period, the operation period is shortened as the number of special information stored in the acquired information storage means increases. The gaming machine according to the feature K3.

In the second type game state, the ball enters the starting ball entry section frequently. Therefore, when the judgment result corresponding to the second judgment information is obtained during the second type game state, the operation period depends on the number of special information as in the case where the judgment result does not correspond to the predetermined judgment information. If the configuration is shortened, the game times that result in the determination result corresponding to the second determination information can be rapidly advanced without discomfort, and it is preferable that the notification result in the predetermined notification means be noticed by the player. It is possible to reduce to.

Feature K5. Before the special information stored in the acquired information storage means becomes the target of the determination, the destination specifying means for specifying whether or not the special information corresponds to the second determination information, and
In the first-class gaming state, a special effect executing means for executing a special effect based on a specific result by the prior specific means, and a special effect executing means.
A feature K1 to a feature, which comprises a regulating means for regulating either the identification by the prior identification means or the special effect by the special effect execution means in the second type gaming state. The gaming machine according to any one of K4.

By executing a special effect (preliminary performance, look-ahead effect) with the determination result corresponding to the second determination information as the target of identification (so-called look-ahead) by the look-ahead specifying means, the monotonization of the game can be suitably suppressed. However, in such a configuration, when the special effect occurs during the type 2 gaming state, it not only causes confusion for the player, but also greatly reduces the reliability of the special effect. Therefore, it is preferable to suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned inconvenience by regulating either of the above-mentioned specific or special effects during the type 2 gaming state.

The technical ideas shown in the features A to J may be applied to the features K1 to K5.

<Characteristic L group>
The following feature L group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry section provided in the game area, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out and other benefits are given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the ball-entry part and the non-acceptance state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). Regarding the technology, "The above-mentioned types of gaming machines can improve the degree of attention to gaming machines by promoting the diversification of games, but the management of gaming machines in the gaming hall becomes complicated due to this, etc. It was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is a concern that new issues will arise."

Feature L1. A game board (game board 80a) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out the game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91 and 92 and the variable winning device 83) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry unit (operating ports 91, 92) as the ball entry unit. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the first switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. There is a second switching mode (high frequency support mode B) that is set to be
A first execution number storage means (a game number counter provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) for storing the number of executions of the game times executed after the end of the special game state, and
When the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the first reset means (regular) for resetting (clearing 0) the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means. In the normal process, which is the process, the MPU 402 of the main controller 162 clears the game count counter to 0) and
When the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means reaches the upper limit (ceiling: for example, 400 times), the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode is performed without going through the special gaming state. The first transition means (the function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 when the ceiling is reached) and
A second execution number storage means (continuation provided in various counter areas 434 of the RAM 404) that stores the number of executions of the game times executed in the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode that has been transferred by the first transition means. Count counter) and
When the number of executions stored in the second execution number storage means reaches the end reference number (for example, 400 times) in the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode that has been transferred by the first transition means. , A second transition means for transitioning to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode (a function of shifting from the fourth normal gaming state to the first normal gaming state in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162, triggered by a time saving digestion). ,
When a predetermined reset operation (ON operation of the reset switch 166) is performed when the power of the game machine is turned on, the second execution number stored in the first execution number storage means is reset (cleared to 0). Reset means (a function to clear the game count counter to 0 by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 in the main process executed at startup),
It was the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode in which the gaming state before the power was cut off was shifted by the second transition means even when the power was turned on without the predetermined reset operation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a notification means (annular illumination unit 26 of the front door frame 14 and a notification / effect control device 140) for executing a predetermined notification (special notification) in case of a case.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode. Transition. In the second switching mode, the ball enters the starting ball entry portion frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, the predetermined game state corresponding to the second switching mode shifted by reaching the ceiling is provided with the end reference number of times, and even when the ceiling is reached, the predetermined game state is provided. There is a possibility that the predetermined gaming state may end without a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information (hereinafter, also referred to as ceiling run-through). This is preferable in order to prevent the benefits of reaching the ceiling from becoming excessive and causing excessive gambling. However, after running through the ceiling, the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means remains unreset, and the ceiling cannot be reached again. Here, if the power of the gaming machine is turned from OFF to ON without performing a predetermined reset operation in the state after running through the ceiling, a predetermined notification is executed. As a result, the manager of the game hall can grasp whether or not it is in the state after running through the ceiling. It is preferable to support grasping the state after running through the ceiling by turning on the power in this way in order to improve the convenience of the administrator.

Feature L2. The first operating means (effect button 35) and the second operating means (reset switch 166),
A notification canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification when any of the first operating means and the second operating means is operated in a situation where the predetermined notification is executed is provided.
It is configured that the number of executions stored in the first execution number storage means is reset when the second operation means is operated under the situation where the predetermined notification is executed. Characteristic The gaming machine according to the feature L1.

According to the configuration shown in the present feature, the manager of the game hall can easily select the correspondence to the game machine in which the predetermined notification is executed according to the business form of the game hall and the like. That is, it is possible to select whether to cancel only the predetermined notification described above and leave it in the state of running through the ceiling, or to reset the ceiling. With such a configuration, the effect shown in the feature L1 can be more preferably exhibited.

Feature L3. The gaming machine according to feature L2, wherein the first operating means is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, and the second operating means is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine.

As shown in this feature, if the second operating means for resetting and canceling the notification is arranged on the back side of the gaming machine and the first operating means for canceling the notification is arranged on the front side of the gaming machine, the convenience of the administrator can be improved. It is possible to reduce the inconvenience that the number of executions is reset by the player while trying.

Feature L4. The notification canceling means is the first notification canceling means, and is
The feature L2 is provided with a second notification canceling means for canceling the predetermined notification when the power is cut off and the power is turned on again under the condition that the predetermined notification is being executed. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to feature L3.

A large number of gaming machines are often installed in the island facilities of the gaming hall. As the number of installations increases, the number of gaming machines on which the above-mentioned predetermined notification is executed also increases. Here, as shown in this feature, if the predetermined notification is canceled by turning the power off and then on under the condition that the predetermined notification is being executed, each gaming machine is individually provided. It is not necessary to perform the above release operation, which can contribute to further improvement of the convenience of the administrator.

Feature L5. The notification means performs the predetermined notification by setting the light emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front surface portion (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, all lighting). Is a thing
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L4, which comprises at least the regulating means for regulating the predetermined notification when the gaming time is progressing by the game time controlling means. ..

In order to make the predetermined notification as conspicuous as possible, it is technically significant to execute the predetermined notification on the light emitting display unit provided on the front portion of the gaming machine. However, if the predetermined notification is not canceled due to overlooking the predetermined notification or the like, the predetermined notification will be continued even during the business hours of the game hall. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, a predetermined notification is regulated at least when the game times are in progress. As a result, it is possible to allow the use of the light emitting display unit for the purpose of producing or the like. This is preferable in suppressing the oversight of a predetermined notification and suppressing the deterioration of the effect function due to the suppression.

Incidentally, the configuration shown in this feature is described as "In the notification means, the light emitting display unit (annular illumination unit 26) provided on the front surface portion (front door frame 14) of the gaming machine is set to a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, all lighting). By doing so, the predetermined notification is performed.
The gaming machine according to any one of the feature L1 to the feature L4, characterized in that the predetermined notification is canceled when the game rotation is started by the game rotation control means. It is also possible to say.

The technical ideas shown in the features A to K may be applied to the features L1 to L5.

<Characteristic M group>
The following feature M group is described as "a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine has a gaming board in which a gaming area is formed and a gaming ball launching means for launching a gaming ball into the gaming area based on a launching operation by a player. Some of them are provided. When a game ball launched from a game ball launching means enters a ball entry portion provided in the game area, a privilege such as paying out a predetermined number of game balls is given to the player. The background of the game is that the game is diversified by making the ball-entry part variable and switching between the ball-entry part and the non-acceptance state according to the game situation (see, for example, Patent Document 1). The technology was made in view of the background and issues such as "There is still room for improvement in the configuration of the above-mentioned type of gaming machine in order to increase the degree of attention to the game."

Features M1. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the first type game state, the said Means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
The display effect executing means
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second type game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode Move to the state. In the type 2 game state, the frequent entry into the starting ball entry section suppresses the investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, there is a possibility that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information may be obtained in the game times when the ceiling is reached. In the configuration shown in this feature, when the above-mentioned duplication occurs, different display effects are displayed depending on whether the determination result is the determination result corresponding to the first information or the determination result corresponding to the second information. It is configured to be executed. Specifically, when the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the first display effect clearly indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is executed, and in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the first display effect is executed. When the determination result corresponding to the two pieces of information is obtained, the second display effect is executed without clearly indicating that the upper limit of the number of times has been reached. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the monotonousness of the game production and contribute to the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

In addition, the description regarding "predetermined determination information" is described as "the first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) in which the player's advantage is relatively high, and the player's advantage as the predetermined determination information. Second information with a relatively low degree (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) is provided. "

Feature M2. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal gaming state) 4th normal game state) is provided,
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the first type game state, the said It is equipped with a means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the means for shifting to the second type gaming state through the special gaming state and the means.
When a determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, a means for shifting to the first type gaming state through the special gaming state and a means for shifting to the first type gaming state.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
The display effect executing means
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second type game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode Move to the state. In the type 2 game state, the frequent entry into the starting ball entry section suppresses the investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it becomes conspicuous that the benefits cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game times reaching the ceiling (in the case of duplication), the judgment result corresponds to the first information. The display effect differs depending on whether it is the determination result or the determination result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information (that is, the judgment result in which the high frequency switching mode is set after the end of the special game state) is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the upper limit number of times is clearly indicated. 1 When the display effect is executed and the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the game times when the maximum number of times is reached (that is, the judgment result in which the low frequency switching mode is set after the end of the special game state), the maximum number of times is reached. The configuration is such that a second display effect that is not specified is executed. With such a configuration, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is set and the special game state → high frequency switching mode is set, the player is made to imagine that it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. It is possible to make a judgment result corresponding to the second information, and when the special game state → low frequency switching mode is set, the player can imagine that the benefit is not generated in the first place by not clearly indicating the arrival at the ceiling. Can be made to. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

Feature M3. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As the switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, the low frequency switching mode (low frequency support mode) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the low frequency switching mode. There is a high-frequency switching mode (high-frequency support modes A and B) set so that
As the predetermined gaming state, a first-class gaming state corresponding to the low-frequency switching mode (for example, a first normal gaming state) and a second-class gaming state corresponding to the high-frequency switching mode (for example, a second normal gaming state). The third normal game state and the fourth normal game state) are provided.
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information in the first type game state, the said Means for shifting to the second type gaming state without going through the special gaming state (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling).
When the number of times the game is executed becomes the first end reference number (for example, 400 times) without the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second type gaming state transferred by the second transition means. Is provided with a means for shifting to the first-class gaming state.
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R normal jackpot result) are provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first information and the determination result corresponding to the second information are obtained by the determination by the determination means, the means for shifting to the second type gaming state through the special gaming state is provided. ,
The type 2 gaming state that has been transferred as the determination result corresponding to the first information is continued until the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, while the determination result corresponding to the second information is used. Then, when the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, or in the second type gaming state, the number of times the game is executed corresponds to the predetermined determination information. When the second end reference number (for example, 40 times) is less than the first end reference number without any result, the game shifts to the first type gaming state.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) for executing a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed is provided. ,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
The display effect executing means
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

If the number of times the game is executed (number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the second type game corresponding to the high frequency switching mode Move to the state. In the type 2 game state, the frequent entry into the starting ball entry section suppresses the investment associated with the progress of the game. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it becomes conspicuous that the benefits cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game times reaching the ceiling (in the case of duplication), the judgment result corresponds to the first information. The display effect differs depending on whether it is the determination result or the determination result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached (that is, the judgment result in which the high frequency switching mode of long continuation is set after the end of the special game state), the upper limit number of times is reached. When the first display effect to be specified is executed and the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the game times when the maximum number of times is reached (that is, the judgment result in which the short continuation high frequency switching mode is set after the end of the special game state). Is configured to execute a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the maximum number of times has been reached. With such a configuration, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is set and the special game state → long continuation high frequency switching mode is set, the player as if it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. In the case of a special game state → high frequency switching mode of short continuation as a judgment result corresponding to the second information, it is possible to make the ceiling arrival unclear so that the benefit is not generated in the first place. You can make the player imagine it. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

It should be noted that, in the present feature, "the second type game state that has been transferred as the determination result corresponding to the first information is continued until the next determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained, while the second information". When the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information is obtained next, or in the second type gaming state, the number of times the game is executed is the predetermined number. When the second end reference number (for example, 40 times), which is less than the first end reference number, is reached without the determination result corresponding to the determination information, the game is shifted to the first type gaming state. " The description "The first end without the number of executions of the game times being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information in the second type gaming state that has been transferred as the determination result corresponding to the first information". When the second end reference number (for example, 9999 times) is greater than the reference number, the game shifts to the first type gaming state, while the second type shifts to the determination result corresponding to the second information. In the game state, the number of times the game is executed in the second type game state is larger than the first end reference number without producing a determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information (for example, 40 times). ), It is possible to change to the above-mentioned type 1 gaming state.

Features M4. In the first display effect, the display effect executing means executes an effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached, and then executes an effect that clearly indicates that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information has been obtained. On the other hand, in the second display effect, the effect of clearly indicating that the upper limit number of times has been reached is not executed, and the effect of clearly indicating that the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information has been obtained is provided. The gaming machine according to any one of feature M1 to feature M3, which is configured to be executed.

According to the configuration shown in this feature, in the first display effect executed when the judgment result corresponding to the first information is obtained, the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is made after it is clearly indicated that the ceiling has been reached. It is clearly stated that it has become. With such a configuration, it is clearly stated that the judgment result corresponds to the predetermined judgment information → a special game state is obtained, so that it is as if two benefits are given while suppressing the discomfort of the production. I can show you.

Feature M5. A game board (game board 80aA) in which a game area (game area PE) is formed, and
A game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player, and
It is provided with a payout means (payout device 224) for paying out a game ball (prize ball) based on the ball entering the ball entry portions (operating ports 91A and 92A and the variable winning device 83A) provided in the game area. It ’s a game machine,
Special information acquisition means (hold information by MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for acquiring special information (hold information) when a ball enters the start ball entry part (operating ports 91A, 92A) as the ball entry part. (A function to execute the process to acquire) and
The acquisition information storage means (holding ball storage area 432 in the RAM 404 of the main control device 162) capable of storing the special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and
A determination means (for lottery in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to predetermined determination information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the jackpot result). (Function to execute the processing of) and
The game rotation operation (variable display of the pattern on the operating port display units D1 and D2) is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the determination is made. The end of the game round operation as a notification result corresponding to the result is regarded as one game round, and the game round operation of each game round is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. A game turn control means (a function of executing a game turn control process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that controls a predetermined notification means (display units D1 and D2 for the operation port) so as to be described.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is changed to the predetermined gaming state (first normal gaming state). ~ A special game state transition means (a function of executing a game state transition process, etc. by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) that shifts to a special game state (open / close execution mode) that is more advantageous to the player than the fourth normal game state). ,
As the ball entry unit, which can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the accepted state. Variable ball entry section (variable winning device 83A) and
A control means for the variable ball entry section (a function of executing the opening / closing process by the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for switching the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism (electric accessory) that can be switched between a receiving state (open state) in which the game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state (closed state) in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than the receiving state. 93A) and
It is provided with a variable mechanism control means (a function of executing electric service support processing in the MPU 402 of the main control device 162) for controlling the variable mechanism.
As a switching control mode (support mode) of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode (low frequency support mode) set so as to make it difficult or impossible to enter the starting ball entry portion. The second switching mode is set so that the variable mechanism is in the receiving state for a longer period of time than the first switching mode, so that the ball can be easily entered into the starting ball entry portion as compared with the first switching mode. Since the switching mode (high frequency support mode B) and the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state are longer than in the first switching mode, it is easier to enter the starting ball than in the first switching mode. There is a third switching mode (high frequency support mode A) that is set to
As the predetermined determination information, first information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 6R probability variation jackpot result) and second information (for example, a random number group corresponding to the 2R probability variation jackpot result) are provided.
When a determination result corresponding to the first information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the first transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode via the special gaming state, and
When a determination result corresponding to the second information is obtained by the determination by the determination means, the second transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode via the special gaming state, and
When the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number of times (ceiling: for example, 400 times) without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the predetermined determination information, the game goes through the special game state. A third transition means (a function of shifting to the fourth normal gaming state when the MPU 402 of the main control device 162 reaches the ceiling) and a third transition means for shifting to the predetermined gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode.
A display effect executing means (design display device 95, notification / effect control device 140, display control device 410) that executes a display effect in parallel with the game turn operation when the game turn operation is performed. Prepare,
As the display effect, a first display effect that clearly indicates that the upper limit number of times has been reached and a second display effect that does not clearly indicate that the upper limit number of times has been reached are provided.
The display effect executing means
A means for executing the first display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the first information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached.
A game characterized in that it has a means for executing a second display effect when the determination result by the determination means becomes the determination result corresponding to the second information in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached. Machine.

When the number of times the game is executed (the number of games) after the end of the special game state reaches the upper limit number (ceiling) without the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information, the player enters the predetermined game state corresponding to the third switching mode. Transition. In this predetermined game state, the ball enters the starting ball entry portion frequently, so that the investment associated with the progress of the game is suppressed. Such a function (ceiling function) is preferable in order to relieve the player. Here, when the above-mentioned ceiling function is provided, it is assumed that the investment of the player is large when the ceiling is reached. For this reason, it is feared that if it becomes conspicuous that the benefits cannot be enjoyed even though the player has reached the ceiling, the player's willingness to play will be reduced. This is not preferable in order to improve the degree of attention to the game. Here, in the configuration shown in this feature, when the judgment result corresponding to the predetermined judgment information is obtained in the game times reaching the ceiling (in the case of duplication), the judgment result corresponds to the first information. The display effect differs depending on whether it is the determination result or the determination result corresponding to the second information. Specifically, when the judgment result corresponding to the first information (that is, the judgment result of the second switching mode after the end of the special game state) is obtained in the game times when the upper limit number of times is reached, the upper limit number of times is clearly indicated. 1 When the display effect is executed and the judgment result corresponding to the second information is obtained in the game times when the maximum number of times is reached (that is, the judgment result in which the first switching mode is set after the end of the special game state), the maximum number of times is reached. The configuration is such that a second display effect that is not specified is executed. With such a configuration, if the judgment result corresponding to the first information is changed from the special gaming state to the high frequency switching mode (second switching mode), it is as if it is a benefit of reaching the ceiling. It is possible to make the player imagine it as such, and when the judgment result corresponding to the second information is changed from the special game state to the low frequency switching mode (first switching mode), the ceiling arrival is not specified. It is possible to make the player imagine that the benefits are not occurring in the first place. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the satisfaction level of the player and preferably realize the improvement of the degree of attention to the game.

The technical idea shown in the above features M1 to M4 may be applied to the feature M5.

Incidentally, the technical ideas shown in the above-mentioned features A to L may be applied to the features M1 to M3.

Pachinko game machine: An operating means operated by a player (game ball launching handle 41), a game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operating means (game ball launching mechanism 110), and the launching thereof. A ball passage (guidance rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and each game part (nails, etc.) arranged in the game area are provided, and a predetermined passage of each of the game parts is provided. A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a gaming ball passes through a section (general winning opening 81, etc.).

Revolving gaming machine such as a slot machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence, and the symbol changes start due to the operation of the starting operation means. A special game that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the stopping operation means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

Ball-using belt-type gaming machine: Equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable display of a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the final stop display of the symbol sequence. A special gaming state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or the predetermined time elapses, and the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol. A throwing device that is provided with a ball tray to generate a game, etc. A gaming machine configured so that the operation of the starting operation means becomes effective when the gaming ball is thrown in.

10 ... Pachinko machine as a game machine, 41 ... Game ball launch handle, 80 ... Game board unit, 80a ... Game board, 82 ... Actuating port unit, 83 ... Variable winning device, 84 ... Through gate, 86 ... Out port, 91 ... 1st operating port, 92 ... 2nd operating port, 93 ... Electric accessory, 95 ... Design display device, 95a ... Display screen, 99 ... Main display unit, 110 ... Game ball launch mechanism, 140 ... Notification / effect control device , 162 ... main control device, 224 ... payout device, 242 ... payout control device, 402 ... MPU, 403 ... ROM, 404 ... RAM, 421 ... pass / fail table storage area, 422 ... distribution table storage area, 423 ... variable display time Table storage area, 431 ... Lottery counter buffer, 432 ... Hold ball storage area, 433 ... Electric service hold area, PE ... Game area.

Claims (6)

The game board where the game area is formed and
A game ball launching means capable of launching a game ball into the game area based on the operation of the player,
A gaming machine provided with a payout means for paying out a game ball based on a ball entering a ball entry portion provided in the game area.
Special information acquisition means for acquiring special information when a ball enters the starting ball entry section as the ball entry section, and
An acquisition information storage means capable of storing special information acquired by the special information acquisition means, and an acquisition information storage means.
A determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored in the acquired information storage means corresponds to the predetermined determination information, and
The game rotation operation is started prior to the determination by the determination means or based on the determination made by the determination means, and the game rotation operation is terminated as a notification result corresponding to the result of the determination. This is regarded as one game time, and the game time control means for controlling a predetermined notification means so that the game time operation of each game time is performed according to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means. ,
As the predetermined determination information, first determination information and second determination information are provided.
Based on the determination result by the determination means being the determination result corresponding to the first determination information and the game rotation operation by the game rotation control means being completed, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the predetermined gaming state. Special game state transition means to shift to a special game state,
A variable ball entry section as the ball entry section, which can be switched between a receiving state in which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter than the receiving state.
A control means for the variable ball entry section that switches the variable ball entry section between the accepting state and the non-accepting state when the game shifts to the special gaming state.
A variable mechanism that can switch between a receiving state in which a game ball can enter the starting ball and a non-accepting state in which it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the receiving state.
A control means for a variable mechanism for controlling the variable mechanism is provided.
As the switching control mode of the variable mechanism by the control means for the variable mechanism, a first switching mode and a second switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the accepting state is longer than that of the first switching mode. And a third switching mode set so that the period in which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is longer than that of the first switching mode is provided.
The second switching mode and the third switching mode are configured so that the frequency at which the variable mechanism is in the receiving state is different.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and
A third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode is provided.
When the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state, the first transition means for shifting to the second gaming state via the special gaming state, and
It is provided with a second transition means for shifting to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. A featured gaming machine. As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are relative. Has a high probability mode and
In both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained by the determination by the determination means is configured to be the same.
The first gaming state corresponds to the first switching mode and the low probability mode.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the third gaming state corresponds to the third switching mode and the low probability mode. The variable mechanism control means has a configuration in which the variable mechanism is switched to the acceptance state when a lottery is won based on the passage of a game ball through a passing portion provided in the game area.
The second switching mode is configured so that the winning probability in the lottery is changed to be higher than that of the first switching mode.
The third switching mode is configured so that the winning probability in the lottery is the same as that in the first switching mode, but the required period from winning in the lottery to the acceptance state is shortened. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above. The second switching mode is configured such that the ratio of the number of game balls paid out by the payout means to the number of game balls fired by the game ball launching means is higher than that in the third switching mode. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above. As the determination mode in which the determination is performed by the determination means, the low probability mode in which the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information is relatively low and the probability of the determination result corresponding to the first determination information are relative. Has a high probability mode and
In both the low probability mode and the high probability mode, the probability that the determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained by the determination by the determination means is configured to be the same.
As the predetermined gaming state,
The first gaming state corresponding to the first switching mode and the low probability mode, and
The second gaming state corresponding to the second switching mode and the low probability mode, and
A third gaming state corresponding to the third switching mode and the low probability mode is provided.
The first transition means is configured to shift to the second gaming state through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the first determination information is obtained in the first gaming state.
The second transition means is configured to shift to the third gaming state without going through the special gaming state when a determination result corresponding to the second determination information is obtained in the first gaming state. Ori,
A third transition means for shifting to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the second game state reaches the end reference number of times without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information.
It is provided with a fourth transition means for shifting to the first game state when the number of times the game is executed in the third game state reaches the end reference number of times without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 4, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by the above. In the first gaming state, when the number of times the game is executed after the end of the special gaming state reaches the upper limit without obtaining the determination result corresponding to the first determination information, the fifth game state is shifted to the third gaming state. Migration method and
When the fifth game state is shifted to the third game state, the number of times the game is executed in the third game state becomes the end reference number without the determination result corresponding to the first determination information. Is provided with a sixth transition means for transitioning to the first gaming state.
The number of termination reference times, which is the standard for shifting to the first gaming state by the sixth transition means, is set to be larger than the number of termination reference times, which is the reference for shifting to the first gaming state by the fourth transition means. The gaming machine according to claim 5, wherein the gaming machine is configured to be set.

Images